HARVARD UNIVERSITY
Ernst Mayr Library
of the Museum of
Comparative Zoology
ASIATIC
HERPETOLOGICAL
RESEARCH
VOLUME 3
1990
ISSN 1051-3825
CONTENTS
TUNIYEV, BORIS S., AND SAHAT M. SHAMMAKOV. Coluber atayevi Sp. Nov. (Ophidia,
Colubridae) from the Kopet-Dag Mountains of Turkmenistan 1
CHOU, WEN-HAO. On the Status of Rhacophorus prasinatus Mou, Risch, and Lue
(Anura: Rhacophoridae) 11
AUFFENBERG, WALTER, AND HAFIZUR REHMAN. Studies on Pakistan Reptiles. Pt. 3.
Calotes versicolor 14
ROCEK, ZBYNEK. Holocene anurans from Caucasus 31
Wei, Gang, ning xu, dejun Li, guanfu wu and xiquan Song. Karyotype, C-
Band and Ag-Nors Study of Three Stink Frogs 45
GOLUBEV, M. L. The Variegated Toad Agama in Djungar Gate (Eastern Kazakstan) with
Notes on Certain Systematic Problems of Phrynocephalus versicolor Str. (Reptilia:
Agamidae) 51
MEZHZHERIN, SERGEI AND MICHAEL L. GOLUBEV. Allozyme Variation and Genetic
Relationships within the Phrynocephalus guttotus Species Group (Sauria: Agamidae)
in the Former USSR ." 59
WANG, YUEZHAO AND HUIZHAO WANG. Geographic Variation and Diversity in Three
Species of Phrynocephalus in the Tengger Desert, Western China 65
TUNIYEV, BORIS. S. AND SVETLANA. YU. BEREGOVAYA. Sympatric Amphibians of the
Yew-box Grove, Caucasian State Biosphere Reserve, Sochi, Russia 74
SMITH, BRIAN E. Notes on a Collection of Squamate Reptiles from Eastern Mindanao,
Philippine Islands Part 1 : Lacertilia 85
SMITH, BRIAN E. Notes on a Collection of Squamate Reptiles from Eastern Mindanao,
Philippine Islands Part 2: Serpentes 96
ZHONG, CHANGFU. First Records for Ophisaurus harti and Python molurus bivittatus
from Jiangxi Province, China 1 03
MANILO, VALANTINA V. AND MICHAEL L. GOLUBEV. Karyotype Information on some
Toad Agamas of the Phrynocephalus guttatus Species Group (Sauria, Agamidae) of
the former USSR ' 105
MANILO, VALENTINA V. A Karyosystematic Study of the Plate Tailed Geckos of the
Genus Teratoscincus (Sauria, Gekkonidae) 109
WANG, PEI-CHAO AND JlANG-HUA ZHANG. Resting Metabolic Rate in Three Age-groups
of Alligator sinensis 112
ZHANG, YUN, YULIANG XlONG AND CASSIAN BON. Effects of Chinese Snake Venoms
on Blood Coagulation, Purified Coagulation Factors and Synthetic Chromogenic
Substrates H7
SCHAMMAKOV, SAHAT, CHARI. ATAEV, AND ELDAR. A. RUSTAMOV.
Herpetogeographical Map of Turkmenistan 1 27
LRJ, WAN-ZHAO, AND DA-TONG YANG. A Karyosystematic Study of the Genus
Bombina from China (Amphibia: Discoglossidae) 137
SONG, JIANXING, YlTLIANG XlONG, WANYU WANG, AND XlAOCHUN PU. A Study on
the Purification and Pharmacological Properties of Two Neurotoxins from the
Venom of the King Cobra (Ophiophagus hannah) 143
TARKHNISHVILI, David N., and Irina. A. Serbinova. The Ecology of the Caucasian
Salamander (Mertensiella caucasica Waga) in a Local Population 1 47
Guidelines for Manuscript Preparation and Submission 166
ASIATIC
HERPETOLOGICAL
RESEARCH
VOLUME 6
1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Editor
Ermi Zhao
Chengdu Institute of Biology, Academia Sinica, Chengdu, Sichuan, China
Associate Editors
J. Robert Macey
Department of Biology, Washington University, St.
Louis, Missouri, USA
Theodore J. Papenfuss
Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University of
California, Berkeley, California, USA
Managing Editor
Valeurie E. Friedman
University of California Press, Berkeley, California, USA
Editorial Board
KRAIG ADLER
Cornell University, Ithaca, New Yoik, USA
Natalia B. ananjeva
Zoological Institute, St. Petersburg, Russia
STEVEN C. ANDERSON
University of the Pacific, Stockton, California, USA
KELLAR AUTUMN
Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University of California,
Berkeley, California, USA
AARON BAUER
Villanova University, Villanova, Pennsylvania, USA
LEOBORHN
Zoological Institute, St. Petersburg, Russia
Bmui CHEN
Anhui Normal University, Wuhu, Anhui, China
ILYA DAREVSKY
Zoological Institute, St. Petersburg, Russia
INDRANEIL DAS
Madras Crocodile Bank, Vadanemmeli Perur, Madras, India
WILLIAM E. DUELLMAN
University of Kansas, Lawrence, Kansas, USA
HAJIMEFUKADA
Sennyuji Sannaicho, Higashiyamaku, Kyoto, Japan
CARLGANS
University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan, USA
HUI-QING GU
Hangzhou Teacher's College, Hangzhou, Zhejiang, China
ROBERT F. INGER
Field Museum, Chicago, Illinois, USA
Mahmoud Latifi
Insutut d'Etat des serums et vaccins Razi, Teheran, Iran
KUANGYANG LUE
National Taiwan Normal University, Taipei, Taiwan, China
RONALD MARLOW
University of Nevada, Las Vegas, Nevada, USA
ROBERT W. MURPHY
Royal Ontario Museum, Toronto, Ontario, Canada
GOREN NTLSON
University of Goteborg, Goteborg, Sweden
HIDETOSHI OTA
Department of Biology, University of the Ryukyus, Nishihara,
Okinawa, Japan
JIONG-HUA Pan
South China Normal University, Guangzhou, Guangdong,
China
YUN-XU TONG
Lanzhou University, Lanzhou, Gansu, China
KE-MING XU
Liaoning Normal University, Dalian, Liaoning, China
yu-hua Yang
Sichuan University, Chengdu, Sichuan, China
KEN-TANG ZHAO
Suzhou Railway Teacher's College, Suzhou, Jiangsu, China
Asiatic Herpetological Research is published by the Asiatic Herpetological Research Society (AHRS) and the
Chinese Society for the Study of Amphibians and Reptiles (CSSAR) at the Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University
of California. The editors encourage authors from all countries to submit articles concerning but not limited to Asian
herpetology. All correspondence outside of China and requests for subscription should be sent to AHR, Museum of
Vertebrate Zoology, University of California, Berkeley, California, USA 94720, or by email to
asiaherp@uclink.berkeley.edu. All correspondence within China should be sent to Ermi Zhao, Editor, Chengdu
Institute of Biology, P.O. Box 416, Chengdu, Sichuan Province, China. Authors should consult Guidelines for
Manuscript Preparation and Submission at the end of this issue. Subscription and membership are $25 per year
($45 for libraries). Postage outside of the USA and China, please add $5 per issue for surface mail or $10 per issue for
air mail. Make checks or money orders payable in US currency to AHRS. If you do not have access to US currency,
please notify us, and we will make other arrangements.
Asiatic Herpetological Research Volume 6 succeeds Volume 5 published in 1993, Volume 4 published in 1992,
Volume 3 published in 1990 and Chinese Herpetological Research Volume 2, which was published at the
Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, 1988-1989 as the journal for the Chinese Society for the Study of Amphibians and
Reptiles. Volume 2 succeeded Chinese Herpetological Research 1987, published for the Chengdu Institute of
Biology by the Chongqing Branch Scientific and Technological Literature Press, Chongqing, Sichuan, China. Acta
Herpetologica Sinica ceased publication in June, 1988.
Cover: Batrachuperus pinchonii Elev. 2270 m, 53.2 km north of Hanyuan (29° 21' N 102° 43' E), on the Ya'an to
Hanyuan Rd., Liba Shan (mountain), Ya'an Prefecture, Sichuan Province, China. Photo by J. Robert Macey.
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 1-26
Systematics of the Vipers of the Caucasus: Polymorphism or Sibling
Species?
GORAN NILSON1, BORIS S. TUNIYEV2, NIKOLAI ORLOV^, MATS HOGGREN4 AND CLAES
ANDREN1
'Department of Zoology, Goteborg University, Sweden
2Caucasian State Biosphere Reserve, Sochi, Russia
^Zoological Institute, Russian Academy of Sciences, St. Petersburg, Russia
^Department of Genetics, University of Uppsala, Russia
Abstract. -Inter- and intramorphological variation were examined in sympatric and allopatric polymorphic
and monomorphic populations of the Vipera ursinii and Vipera kaznakovi complexes. The alpine Vipera
dinniki populations in upper Great Caucasus show a pronounced, and to a certain extent geographical,
polymorphism. Color patterns include among others 'kaznakovi', 'tigrina', 'berus', 'bronze', and 'ursinii'
types. Several of these patterns can be represented within the same litter in certain populations. Vipera
dinniki is sympatric with the Caucasian representative of the Vipera ursinii complex in some areas. This last
taxon shows a similar degree of polymorphism, which is unique for this complex, and due to morphological
and molecular distinction, we consider it to be a Caucasian evolutionary species within the ursinii complex -
Vipera lotievi sp.n.
Key Words: Reptilia, Squamata, Viperidae, Vipera dinniki, V. kaznakovi, V. ursinii, V. renardi, V. lotievi
sp.n., Caucasus, Russia, Georgia, taxonomy, morphology, polymorphism.
Introduction
The taxonomy of the vipers of Caucasus
has for a long time been confusing and
contradictory. According to the traditional
view a single species, Vipera kaznakovi, is
distributed in the moist and warm lowlands
of the western Caucasus as well as in the
mountain valleys towards the east. In the
east the habitat is drier and along the range
the vipers gradually change toward Vipera
ursinii in appearance. In the east Caucasus
only this last viper was supposed to occur.
Thus there seemed to be a somewhat clinal
transformation from "pure" V. kaznakovi in
the west to "pure" V. ursinii in the east.
Vipers from the intermediate region could be
difficult to determine. Within the same
locality some specimens look like V.
kaznakovi, other ones are more like V.
ursinii, while still some can be intermediate.
Nikolsky (1913) separated the alpine
populations into the taxon Vipera berus
dinniki, which was based on alpine
specimens of the conventional V. kaznakovi
from high altitudes in the western Caucasus
(Malaya Laba River- terra typica restricta
and Svanetia) as well as from other places.
The name dinniki was long considered as a
synonym of V. kaznakovi until Vedmederja
et al (1986) recognized it as a separate
species inhabiting alpine and subalpine
meadows in the Caucasus, and thus
restricting V. kaznakovi to lower altitudes in
western Caucasus and adjacent moist
lowland habitats along the eastern Black Sea
coast. Thereby the problem of the gradual
transformation from V. kaznakovi in the
west of the Caucasus to V. ursinii in the east
is restricted to the high Caucasus
populations, now including V. dinniki and
V. ursinii. Vipera kaznakovi is well defined
and restricted in distribution, and
geographically separated from all the other
viper species in the region.
The complex history of nomenclature
and taxonomy has been clarified to a great
part in some recent publications (see Orlov
& Tuniyev, 1986; 1990), together with
hypotheses about the phylogeny of this
group. Concurrently the need of genetic
studies was stressed, and this has led to the
present work where we in a series of papers
intend to clarify the taxonomy and evolution
of the vipers of this region. The work is
planned to have a broad perspective
including phenetic and phylogenetic
analyses, habitat choice, niche-breadth, and
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 2
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
reproduction. Different methods take
different time and in this first paper the
morphology is reexamined, based on
available material in Museum collections and
freshly collected material from a number of
new places, as well as on inheritance of
color pattern. Genetic structures based on
phenetic analyses of allozyme data are also
presented.
The morphological distinction between
Vipera dinniki and V. kaznakovi has been
presented elsewhere (Orlov and Tuniyev,
1986; 1990) and will not be repeated in this
study. In the present paper we are focusing
on patterns of morphological and molecular
variation within and between the different
populations in the Caucasus, and the
taxonomy of these populations.
Material and Methods
The work has mainly been a study of
variation in external morphology, allozymes
and reproduction in order to reveal patterns
of sympatry and sibling species. Additional
genetic studies will follow when material
becomes available in suitable samples
(presently delayed due to political reasons).
Thus live and preserved museum material
has been examined concordantly with
studies of reproduction in the laboratory.
Additional preserved material used in
this study originates from the Natural
History Museum in Goteborg (GNM);
Dipl.-Biol. F. J. Obst, Staatliches Museum
fur Naturkunde, Dresden (MTKD D); Aram
Agasian, Zoological Institute, Academy of
Sciences, Eriwan, Armenia. Abbreviations
for museums as used in the text are: CNR-
Caucasian State Biosphere Reserve,
Collection of Boris Tuniyev at Yew-box
Groove, Sochi; GNM- Goteborg Natural
History Museum, Goteborg; MTKD-
Staatliches Museum for Naturkunde,
Dresden; ZIEr- Zoological Institute,
Academy of Sciences, Eriwan; ZIG-
Department of Zoology, University of
Goteborg; Goteborg- (authors' collection,
which later will be incorporated in GNM);
ZIN- Zoological Institute, Academy of
Sciences, St. Petersburg.
Altogether about 300 preserved or live
specimens of vipers from the Caucasus and
adjacent regions have been seen during the
study. Joint field trips were made in
different parts of the Caucasus in 1990 and
1992, but two of us (Tuniyev and Orlov)
have performed extensive research in the
region prior to that. For morphometric
studies 183 preserved snakes within the
ursinii and kaznakovi complexes have been
examined more carefully, and for most of
these specimens 30 different items of data
have been collected. This information was
used, down to population level, in
morphological descriptions, taxonomical
analyses and conclusions about
zoogeography and range overlap.
Inheritance of color pattern was studied
based on 23 pregnant females and their
offspring.
Data collected were: total length and tail
length; number of preventrals, ventrals,
subcaudals, anterior and mid-body dorsal
scale rows, apical plates, supralabials,
sublabials, circumocular scales, loreals,
second chinshields, mentals, crown scales
(=intercanthals + intersupraoculars), and
zig-zag windings in dorsal band. Further
rostral index (height/breadth) and head index
(breadth/length) were calculated. Division
of parietals, frontal, and nasalia was noted,
as was the color of dorsal and ventral sides,
and iris (in live specimens). Further, upper
preocular size; and head, labial and lateral
body patterns, as well as distinctiveness of
canthus rostralis were examined. Details
about these methods are found in Nilson and
Andren (1986).
Morphologylphenetics
Standard errors accompanying mean
character ratios were used as relative
measurement of dispersion. For the
analysis of intra- and interpopulational
morphological variation (phenetic analysis)
the samples were divided into subsamples
depending on questions raised. Thus
besides an analysis of morphological
variation also a pattern confirming or
rejecting the present taxonomic pattern could
be achieved. This pattern could also be
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 3
TABLE 1 . Number of specimens used in the genetic analyses and localities (Russia if nothing else is stated)
for the examined taxa.
kaznakovi:
1. Dagomys, north of Sochi. Six specimens.
2. Rudorova, inland locality, 900 m alt. Four specimens.
dinniki:
3 . Fisht/Oshten, the westernmost locality of the main Caucasus range. Seven specimens.
4. Lake Impsi, 1,980 m. alt., at a tributary to the Little Laba River on the northern slope
of the main range. Seven specimens.
5 . Aishkha-II on the southern slope of the main range. Three specimens.
6. Lake Kardyvach at upper Mzymta River on the southern slope of the main range
Seventeen specimens.
lotievii:
7. Armkhi, Checheno-Ingushetia. 2,000 m altitude. Seven specimens.
berus:
8. Uppsala (terra typica), Sweden. Eleven specimens.
eriwanensis:
9. pooled sample from Asbua and Cildir, Kars, east Turkey; and Sevan, Armenia. Six
specimens.
supported or rejected by the parallel
biochemical studies. Thereby it is possible
to state or reject the occurrence of
convergent or parallel evolution, i.e. sibling
species.
Estimation of the different color pattern
frequencies in local populations was based
on observations during the field work.
Small museum samples collected by others
were not included in this analysis due to
uncertainty of randomness in sampling
(unusual morphs might have been collected
and preserved at a higher degree).
Biochemical data
Enzyme electrophoresis. — Sixty-eight
specimens representing different taxa of
Caucasus vipers, and Vipera berus from
Sweden were examined. The samples were
treated as nine independent operational
taxonomic units (OTUs) in the genetic
analysis, in order to avoid a priori
assumptions of taxonomic relationships
among the eight Caucasus populations
studied (see Table 1, for locality data and
sample sizes). A potential risk of sampling
error due to syntopic occurrence of two taxa
may be avoided by testing observed
genotype distribution within a locality
against Hardy-Weinberg expectations (see
results). Fresh or frozen tissues (-75°C)
from liver and skeletal muscle were
homogenized in distilled water. The extracts
were centrifuged for 10 min at 10,000 rpm
and 4°C and the supernatants were then
stored at -75°C until used. Standard
horizontal starch gel electrophoresis was
carried out, as described by Harris and
Hopkinson (1976) and Murphy et al.
(1990). Gels (11% w/v) were prepared
from Sigma starch (Sigma Chemical Co.,
St. Louis, Mo). Two buffer systems were
used: (A) Gel: 0.03 M tris-0.005 M citric
acid; Electrode: 0.06 M lithium hydroxide-
0.03 M boric acid, pH 8.0 (Ridgway et al.,
1970). (B) Gel: 0.002 M citric acid, pH
6.1; Electrode: 0.04 M citric acid, pH
adjusted with N-(3-amino-propyl)morpholin
Vol. 6, p. 4
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 2. Enzymes and electrophoretic conditions of the polymorphic loci scored in this study.
Nomenclature and commission numbers following the International Union of Biochemistry, Nomenclature
Committee (1984). Abbreviations for tissue sources are: L=liver and M= skeletal muscle.
1) Harris and Hopkinson (1976)
2) Johnson et al. (1970)
3) Shaw and Prasad (1970)
4) Murphy etal. (1990)
5) De Lorenzo and Ruddle (1969)
A) Tris-citrate/lithium hydroxide, boric acid, pH 8.0, lOV/cm, 4h (Ridgway et al., 1970)
B) N-(3-amino-propyl)morpholine/citrate, pH 6.1, lOV/cm, 6h (Clayton and Tretiak, 1972)
(Clayton and Tretiak, 1972). Enzymes
assayed, tissues, modified electrophoretic
conditions and staining references (Table 2)
follow Nilson etal. (1994).
Reproduction
Inheritance of color morphs within
broods was studied by keeping pregnant
females in the laboratory until giving birth.
By this, various hypotheses of
polymorphism and its inheritance patterns
could be evaluated.
Fieldwork
Substantial information has been
gathered during several years in the field in
Russia, Georgia, Armenia and Turkey. A
more intensive field survey was performed
in the western Caucasus in July, 1990, in
order to obtain information of color morphs
in natural populations. Together with
preserved material, this information was the
base for the study of morphological
intrapopulational variation in V. dinniki.
Material was also used for reproductive
studies (see above).
The V. dinniki localities, situated in the
Caucasian State Biosphere Reserve and in
the Sochi Nature State National Park and
listed below were included in this study:
Fisht/Oshten — The westernmost high
mountain area of the main Caucasus range,
and of the Reserve, characterized by the
peaks Mt. Fisht (2868 m. alt.) and Mt.
Oshten (2804 m. alt.). This region is
separated and isolated from the main range
(with Mt. Chugush 3237 m. alt.) by the
forested, moist and warm "Colchis Gate" at
low altitude (not more than 1500 m).
Loyub — Mt. Loyub (2990 m. alt) at the
uppermost part of the Mzymta River in the
eastern part of the Reserve, situated on the
southern slope of the main range.
Aishkha-II (2858 m. alt) — in the same
mountain massif, a little bit further to the
west, and situated on the southern slope of
the main range.
Lake Kardyvach (1850 m. alt) — the
eastern border of the Park, close to Mt.
Loyub but a little further down the Mzymta
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 5
FIG.. 1. The typical "dinniki" pattern type of Vipera dinniki, with unicolored lateral sides typical for
Fisht/Oshten (ZIG).
FIG. 2. The "dinniki" pattern type of Vipera dinniki, with a tendency towards the "tigrina" morph. From
Kardyvach (ZIG).
River. Also situated on the southern slope
of the main range.
Lake Impsi — at 1980 m. alt., situated at
the Tsahvoa River, a tributary of the Little
(Malaya) Laba River. The locality is mainly
on the slopes of the Damhorts Range at the
northern part of the Reserve, and partly on
Akaragvarta Mountain situated on the
northern slope of the main range.
In addition much information on Vipera
kaznakovi was gathered at the lowland
Black Sea coast localities of Dagomys, north
of Sochi (Russia) and Hopa, Artvin
Province (Turkey).
Results
The results of the analyses of
morphometries and enzyme electrophoresis
are presented separately.
Intra- and interpopulational variation in
morphology
A great number of different color
morphs are expressed in the Caucasian
vipers. Although several stages of
overlapping and intermediate forms could be
seen, we define the following major pattern
types:
Nilson et al.
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Plate 1
a. The "ursinii" pattern type of Vipera dinniki, from Kardyvach (ZIG).
b. The "tigrina" morph of Vipera dinniki, from Impsi with partly divided transverse bars
(ZIG).
Plate 1
Nilson et al.
Asiatic Herpetological Research
c. The "bronze" morph of Vipera dinniki, from Impsi (ZIG).
d. The "bronze" morph of Vipera lotievi from Itum Kali, Checheno-Ingushetia.
Vol. 6, p. 6
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG. 3. The "kaznakovi" morph of Vipera dinniki, from Fisht/Oshten (Mt.Oshten - Armenian pass).
A. "dinniki": a more or less continuous
zig-zag band, and pronounced lateral
blotches. Sometimes nebulous in pattern.
Sometimes rather Vipera berus like (Figs.
1,2).
B. "kaznakovi": pronounced black
lateral and dorsal longitudinal bands, and
yellow or orange ground color. The dorsal
band is waving or expressed as a straight
band resulting in a contrasting more or less
bilineated pattern. Besides these we could
define a "bilineated" morph which is similar
to the "kaznakovi" type of pattern but much
lighter. In the analysis below it is included
in the "kaznakovi" type (Fig. 3, compare
Fig. 4).
C. "ursinii": a black-edged continuous
dark brown zig-zag band on a paler ground
color and lighter sides of body (Fig. 5, Plate
la).
D. "tigrina": dorsal pattern fragmented
into broad or narrow transverse bands.
Also spotted pattern could be seen in some
populations. This pattern type is most close
to "tigrina", but differ by being divided
along the vertebral line thus resulting in two
rows of dark spots along the dorsal side of
the body (Fig. 6, Plate lb).
E. "bronze": a uniform greyish to
brownish or blackish ground color covering
all parts of body except the head.
Sometimes with a darker narrow or broad
vertebral stripe (Figs. 7, 8, Plate lc).
F. "melanism": black, with a high
production of melanin covering all other
color patterns.
The different morphs were represented
in different frequencies at the different
localities examined, and some morphs
seemed to be restricted to one or a few
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 7
FIG. 4. A typical Vlpera kaznakovi from the inland locality cordon Babuk-Aul at the foothills of Mt. Fisht
(ZIG).
FIG. 5. The "ursinii" pattern type of Viper a
dinniki, with more unicolored lateral sides from Mt.
Fisht (ZIG).
localities (Table 3). Also variation in other
color characteristics was obvious when
comparing populations. The number of
windings in the dorsal zig-zag band varied
markedly with low number in the western
isolated Fisht population and high in the
more eastern populations (Fig. 9). This was
especially pronounced when comparing
Fisht with Kardyvach, characterized by a
high frequency of "tigrina" morphs (Table
3). Almost no overlap was detected as in
Kardyvach the vipers have 68 or more
windings while in the Fisht population the
corresponding figures are 69 or less (Table
4). In general the west Caucasian samples
(except Fisht) have higher number of dorsal
windings or transverse bars than central and
east Caucasian dinniki vipers. Also V.
kaznakovi has fewer windings.
Vol. 6, p. 8
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG. 7. The "bronze" morph of Vipera dinniki, from Mt. Loyub (ZIG).
TABLE 3. Distribution of color morphs in samples of V. dinniki and V. kaznakovi (Dagomys) in absolute
numbers and in percentage (in some cases) in 1991. Sample size in parenthesis.
Inheritance of color morphs
The different color morphs can be seen
in broods from different types of females
(Table 5), verifying that at these localities a
single polymorphic species is involved. The
sample is not big enough for allowing
definite conclusions about inheritance, but
some indications can be obtained. The three
"bronze" females only gave birth to
"bronze" juveniles (one brood) or mixture of
"bronze" and narrow banded "tigrina"
juveniles (two broods). No other female
than these three (in the total sample of 23
pregnant females) gave birth to "bronze"
juveniles. Further, the "tigrina" pattern
seems dominant as it shows up in several
broods, and is always expressed when the
female has a pattern towards "tigrina". In
the three pure "tigrina" females that gave
birth all juveniles were of "tigrina" type
(N=8). Further (although not seen from the
table) eleven females with other pattern
types than "tigrina" also produced "tigrina"
juveniles together with other morphs. Thus
"tigrina" and "bronze" were the most
frequent juvenile morphs in the dinniki
material.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 9
FIG. 6. The narrow-banded "ligrina" morph of
Vipera dinniki, from Kardyvach (ZIG).
Of the juveniles taken together half
(50%) were "tigrina". When considering
the Kardyvach material alone (10 broods
with 29 juveniles) 52% were "tigrina" while
24% were "bronze". Of 47 adults observed
in the field in July 1991 at this locality 24%
were "bronze". The number of adult
"tigrina" observed (33%) was lower than the
frequency of juvenile "tigrina" produced
while the number of adult "ursinii" was
rather high (27%). This slight reduction of
the "tigrina" pattern between juveniles and
adults can have an ontogenetic explanation
as pattern often fades with age.
In other populations examined the
combinations of morphs were different,
with other patterns dominating. The number
of windings is much lower in Fisht
compared to the Kardyvach sample (with
"tigrina" predominating). "Melanism" was
only observed at Fisht, but it is known also
from Aishkha-II and the Bezymyanka River.
"Bronze" was only observed at Kardyvach
and Impsi. When comparing field
observations and all available specimens in
collections, this morph was not documented
from any other locality along the entire area.
FIG. 8. The "bronze" morph of Vipera dinniki,
from Mt. Loyub (ZIG).
Dorsal bars
FIG. 9. Distribution of number of bars and/or
windings in the dorsal zig-zag band in the different
Vipera dinniki populations, running from west
towards east in high Caucasus (1: Fisht, 2: Loyub,
3: Kardyvach, 4: Impsi, 5: "central Caucasus"
(=Elbrus and surroundings), 6: "east Caucasus"
(=mountains above Lagodechi, Georgia), and V.
kaznakovi populations (7: Sochi-Adler, 8: Hopa,
Artwin).
At Impsi the typical "dinniki" pattern was
dominating (56%).
Analysis ofscalation characters in the
different dinniki populations
Geographic variation in color morph
frequencies is also reflected in scalation
characters (Table 4). Going from the west
Caucasus towards east, certain changes
could be observed. The central and east
Caucasus samples of dinniki have higher
mean number of preventral plates, lower
Vol. 6, p.
10
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 4. Variation in scalation and color pattern characters between different isolated populations of Vipera
dinniki The localities include a series of isolates at close distance in the Caucasus State Biosphere Reserve (1:
Mt Fisht/Oshten; 2: Mt. Loyub; 3: Lake Kardyvach; 4: Lake Impsi), and 5: central Caucasian population
(Mt Elbrus region) and 6: east Caucasian population (the mountain region of Lagodekhi) sample. Given as
Mean value, S.E. and range (except for preventrals and apicals). Number of specimens in parentheses.
Rostral
index
Apicals
Circ urn-
oculars*
1.1+0.1
1.0-1.4
1.1±0.0
1.0-1.3
1.1±0.0
0.9-1.3
1.1±0.1
0.9-1.1
1.0±0.0
0.9-1.3
18.3 ±0.5
15-21
19.1 ±1.0
14-23
18.4 ±0.5
14-22
17.8 ±0.6
13-22
17.3 ±0.9
12-19
1.1±0.1
1.0-1.3
1.46 ±0.14 1.33 ±0.17 1.47 ±0.13 1.50 ±0.13 1.00 ±0.00 1.17 ±0.17
19.2 ±0.8
18-23
* Counted as sum of both sides.
** Unicolored "bronze" specimens as well as completely bilineate and melanistic specimens excluded.
TABLE 5. Phenotypic expression of inheritance of color patterns in 23 clutches of Vipera dinniki. Given as
taxa, female morph, number of clutches, numeric distribution of morphs in group of juveniles of each female
morph.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 1 1
o o
- o o
o o o
o
o o o o o
o o o o o
- o o o o o o -
o o o o o o
o o o o o o
o o o o o o
o o o o o o
o o o o -
0 0 o
o
o o
o o
o
Crownscales 25
FIG. 10. Distribution of ventral numbers in the
different Vipera dinniki populations, running from
west towards east in high Caucasus (1: Fisht, 2:
Loyub, 3: Kardyvach, 4: Impsi, 5: "central
Caucasus" (=Elbrus and surroundings), 6: "east
Caucasus" (=mountains above Lagodechi, Georgia),
and V. kaznakovi populations (7: Sochi-Adler, 8:
Hopa, Artwin).
head index iQO
rostral index
FIG. 12. Head index (breadth/length) and rostral
index (height/ breadth) in sympatric sibling species
of east Caucasus. White circles= V. dinniki ("east-
dinniki"); black squares= V. lotievi.
mean number of apical scales, and lower
number of loreal scales. Also the number of
ventrals showed a slight decrease towards
the east, a pattern also observed between
northwestern and southern populations of
Vipera kaznakovi (Fig. 10).
Analysis of scalation characters in the
different dinniki morphs
In subalpine and alpine mountain belts of the
west Caucasus (eastward to the basin of the
Big Laba River) the "ursinii" morph belongs
to the same species as the rest of the
120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160
FIG. 11. Numbers of crown scales and ventral
plates in "ursinii/ bronze" and "dinniki" morphs and
sympatric sibling species of west and east Caucasus.
The dotted line indicate the main separation between
V. lotievi and the V. dinniki from different regions.
Big white circles= the "dinniki" morph of western
Caucasus (V. dinniki); big black squares= the
"ursinii/bronze" morphs of western Caucasus (V.
dinniki); small white circles= the "dinniki" morph of
eastern Caucasus (V. d/nw'/fc/="east-dinniki"); small
black squares= the "ursinii/bronze" morphs of
eastern Caucasus (V. lotievi)
mountain vipers: Vipera dinniki. But in the
extreme eastern part of the west Caucasus,
and the central and east parts of the high
Caucasus, the "ursinii" and "bronze"
morphs belong to a different species. An
examination of the morphology of the
different morphs clearly indicate that in the
eastern half of high Caucasus there are two
sympatric species (Figs. 11 and 12).
Vipera kaznakovi (Fig. 4).
This species also shows some regional
variation, although not so pronounced as in
V. dinniki. When comparing the southern
(Turkish) populations with the northern
(Russian) ones, differences in color pattern
as well as in scalation could be detected.
Specimens from the southernmost
population in Hopa (Turkey) are more
yellowish in ground color compared to the
snakes in the northern parts (Dagomys). To
the contrary, specimens in the north often
have more black areas on the body and
often the orange or reddish ground color is
expressed only as two dorsolateral rows of
spots. Melanism is frequent in this northern
Vol. 6, p. 12
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 6. Variation in scalation and color pattern characters between the northern and southern Vipera
kaznakovi populations. The samples are from northeastern Black Sea regions in Russia (Sochi-Adler); and
from northeastern Turkish Anatolia (Hopa, Artvin province). Given as Mean value, S.E. and range (except
for preventrals and apicals). Number of specimens in parentheses.
Sochi-Adler (17)
Hopa (13)
Preventrals
Ventrals
Rostral index
Apicals
Circumoculars*
Loreals*
Crown scales
Zig-zag windings**
1.4L+0.19
133.8+0.6, 130-138
1.1±0.02, 1.0-1.27
1.50±0.13
20.0±0.48, 16-23
11.06±0.76, 7-16
14.9410.92, 10-23
56.33±0.67, 55-57
1.54±0.18
130.4±0.9, 124-136
1.1±0.06, 0.87-1.5
1.64±0.14
19.31±0.43, 15-21
8.69±0.60, 5-12
17.33+1.08, 11-22
50.75+1.55, 48-55
* Counted as sum of both sides.
** Four completely bilineate and melanistic specimens are excluded.
TABLE 7. Allele frequencies of polymorphic loci (see Table 2 for locus abbreviations). For taxon
abbreviations, sample sizes and localities, see Table 1.
population, a phenomenon never observed
in the southern one. It can be added that
melanistic specimens have been found in
more or less all Russian populations.
During a stay 1992 at an inland locality
along the Psou River we observed ten adult
specimens of which all but three were
melanistic.
In scalation characters there are some
minor differences: e.g. the Hopa population
has a lower mean value in number of
ventrals and crown scales (Table 6).
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 13
TABLE 8. Genetic distances (above diagonal) and genetic identities (below diagonal) of eight OTUs of
Caucasus vipers and Vipera berus. 1- kaznakovi, Dagomys; 2- kaznakovi, Rudorova; 3- dinniki, Fisht; 4-
dinniki, Impsi; 5- dinniki, Aishka; 6- dinniki, Kardyvach; 7- lotievii; 8- berus; 9- eriwanensis.
OTU
1
FIG. 13. UPGMA phenogram clustering modified
Nei genetic distances (Hillis 1984) among eight
OTUs of Caucasus vipers and Vipera berus.
Phenetic analysis of electrophoretic data
Of twenty-seven presumptive gene loci
scored, from 14 enzyme systems and one
general protein, only eight were
polymorphic. Allelic products (allozymes)
for each locus were designated numerically
in order of increasing anodal mobility to
identify genotypes (Table 7), with the
relative mobility of the most common allele
in each locus as a standard of reference
("100"). Despite the fact that average
sample sizes were rather small for obtaining
significant results of frequency analysis we
elected not to pool different localities (except
for eriwanensis), for reasons of objectivity
discussed above, although we recognize the
obvious risks of missing rare alleles through
this procedure.
species found in west and east high Caucasus.
Modified Nei genetic distances (Nei,
1978; Hillis, 1984) between OTUs were
computed from allele frequencies (Table 8).
A UPGMA phenogram (Sneath and Sokal,
1973) was constructed from the distance
data (Fig. 13). This phenogram illustrates
only the relative degree of genetic
differentiation among OTUs and should not
be considered as a phylogenetic tree.
Observed genotype distribution of the most
polymorphic locus (Sod-1) in the largest
individual sample (Kardyvach; N=17) was
tested against Hardy-Weinberg expectations
to investigate homogeneity and possible
biased sampling due to potential within-
locality sympatry of taxa (i.e. Wahlund
effect). A chi- square test performed to
obtain the goodness-of-fit between observed
and expected distributions (X2=0.060, 1 df,
P=0.90) strongly support unbiased
sampling. The genetic analysis confirms
that the four populations from the western
Main Caucasus (Fisht, Kardyvach, Aishka-
Vol. 6, p. 14
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
II and Impsi) belong to one polymorphic
taxonomic unit (V. dinniki).
Discussion
The original question, whether
polymorphism or sibling species are the
prevailing phenomenon in the Caucasian
populations of vipers, must be answered
with yes in both cases. In the western
Caucasus a large number of morphs can be
recognized. We separate six different ones
in that region while the number is restricted
to three in the eastern and central parts of the
mountain range (Fig. 14). As seen in the
reproductive studies all six morphs
("melanism", "bilineat-kaznakovi", typical
"dinniki" (including "nebulosa"), "tigrina",
"bronze", and "ursinii") in the mountain
habitats in the western Caucasus belong to a
single species. This is also verified by
cladistic analyses of biochemical and
morphological data (Nilson et al., 1994).
The different morphs can be seen sympatric
and syntopic in suitable rocky, vegetation-
rich, and moist habitats. There seems to be
a certain inheritance pattern, but in principle
most morphs can occur in the same brood
(Table 5). Certain areas seem to have a
certain range of frequency of the various
morphs, which might be unique for that
particular area. It must be kept in mind that
only a random number of populations have
been investigated, and it is likely that
additional morphs will be described from
other isolated localities. The isolation of the
different mountains in the Caucasus is much
comparable with e.g. the Andes of Ecuador,
or the Galapagos islands, and a high degree
of isolation has obviously taken place
between the different mountain peaks.
How could this particular polymorphic
pattern in the subalpine Vipera dinniki
populations have evolved? The present
warm and wet subtropical Colchis area of
western Transcaucasia at the Black Sea coast
has, as indicated by botanical evidence,
served as a refuge for animals and plants
during the whole of Pliocene and
Pleistocene (Tuniyev, 1990). The total
region has varied much in size during the
Pleistocene glacial and interglacial periods
but remained a permanent relict key area.
The warm and wet adapted Vipera
kaznakovi is distributed in this area today,
and it has been considered that this species
has had an occurrence in this region for a
long time (Orlov and Tuniyev, 1990;
Tuniyev, 1990) due to the climatic stability.
A scenario for the arise of various
polymorphic V. dinniki populations could
have taken place in two steps and been like
this:
1. First, the evolution of Vipera dinniki.
If the Pliocene Colchis region decreased in
range during a Pleistocene glacial period
there are two alternatives for the species in
that part of the old range that have turned
cold: the viper could disappear or it could
adapt. If it disappears it can be done in two
ways: the snake becomes extinct or it is
forced down to the remaining warm zone.
In both these two cases the net result will be
a reduced range for the single species
(kaznakovi) in the remaining warm and wet
Colchis refuge. In the second case, if the
viper is adapted to the new climate, "the cold
zone", it would be a new, physiologically
different race.
In an interglacial period when the climate
becomes warmer again the warm and wet
Colchis zone expands and "the cold zone" is
forced upwards to higher altitudes in the
mountains. Now, if there is a cold-adapted
physiological race, again two alternatives are
open: first, it could adapt, or second, it
could disappear. If it is adapted back to the
new warm environment, it can either go
back into and unite with the old species
(kaznakovi) which under the new climatic
conditions can expand its range, or it could
form a sympatric but physiological distinct
taxon. In the case of sympatry there is a
good possibility that it would disappear due
to competition (if not ecological distinct). In
both these last situations there is a great
probability that the original species
(kaznakovi) would return and again cover its
original range.
If the new physiological race disappears
from the region it could again be done in
two ways: it simply becomes extinct due to
the new "severe" climatic conditions, or it
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.6, p. 15
migrates upwards following the pushed up
"cold zone". In the first case again only the
original species (kaznakovi) will remain in
its new expanded (=original) warm and wet
range. In the second case there will be a
number of cold-adapted populations at
higher altitudes (the present different
dinniki, "east-dinniki", darevskii
populations). This would mean a number of
isolated populations as the mountains of the
Caucasus are rather steep and
subalpine/alpine habitats are in many cases
climatologically isolated. Further the
geology is very complex reflecting a high
degree of local endemism among plants and
animals. One can postulate that the different
populations, or groups of populations, must
have become adapted to local conditions.
2. This may have been the prerequisite
for an evolution of a polymorphic Vipera
dinniki. During Pleistocene there were
several glacial and interglacial periods, and
the scenario postulated above would have
been repeated several times, and during each
interglacial the "cold zone" and its cold
adapted viper were forced downwards with
the result of a secondary contact with
neighboring populations. Unique morphs
could by this be spread to adjacent
populations etc.
Today we can see a polymorphic color-
pattern in the cold adapted Vipera dinniki
that to a high degree is unique for one or a
small number of populations in close
connection, e.g. the "bronze" and "tigrina"
morphs, but not seen in all populations.
Vipera dinniki could be a polymorphic
species, constituent of a number of
populations that during periods are isolated
from each other, but irregularly have
secondary contact. In some cases the
isolation could also have been more
permanent resulting in a number of sister
species along the range, a possible
phylogenetic pattern we currently are trying
to solve with genetic studies. But overall,
the relative genetic differentiation between
examined taxa and degree of genetic
polymorphism were low, indicating a rather
recent divergence.
The present geographical distribution
and morphological pattern of Vipera dinniki,
as well as the fact that in all subalpine
mountain regions where V. dinniki is
located today, there also are fragmented
more or less subtropical Colchian refugia at
lower altitudes, inhabited by V. kaznakovi
(Tuniyev, 1990). This supports the
evolutionary pattern postulated above.
Further east in the mountains, the
habitats get drier with moist areas restricted
to stream surroundings and lake shores. In
central Caucasus (Mt. Elbrus) the number of
morphs decreases to two ("ursinii" and
"dinniki") or three in the eastern Caucasus
(where again a form of "bronze" morph
appears) (Fig. 14).
Now, in the region of the central and
eastern Caucasus two different sympatric
species are involved. As shown in the
results section above, at several localities the
two morphs "dinniki" and "ursinii" actually
represents two sympatric species from the
kaznakovi line and the ursinii line
respectively. It is obvious that these two
species are sympatric (but not necessarily
syntopic) in a large number of places in
these eastern and central parts of the main
range of the Caucasus. We have in our
material such records of sympatry from Mt.
Elbrus in the central Caucasus (Figs. 15-
18); mountains north of Lagodechi in the
eastern Caucasus; at Itum- Kali, Checheno-
Ingushetia (Fig. 19); and various records
from Dagestan, besides several isolated
records of both species from the entire
eastern and central Caucasus range.
Vipers of the kaznakovi group are
known from subalpine meadows, and
snakes of the ursinii group have been found
in the semiarid hollows between the main
range and the Skalisty (Rocky) range. At
several places with connection of subalpine
meadows and semiarid hollows the two
species have a sympatric occurrence (and
syntopic along the ecotones of both types of
landscapes). The ursinii line has probably
never been widely represented in the
perpetually humid western Caucasus, as this
taxon is adapted to dry environments, but as
stated earlier, in the extreme eastern part of
Vol. 6, p. 16
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG. 15. Male of the east Viper a dinniki ("east-
dinniki") at the sympatric locality, Mt Elbrus,
central Caucasus. This specimen was found together
with the Vipera lotievi on figures 17 and 18 (ZIG).
FIG. 17. Female of the Vipera lotievi at the
sympatric locality, Mt Elbrus, central Caucasus.
This specimen was sympatric with the Vipera
dinniki ("east-dinniki") on photo 15 and 16 (ZIG).
the west Caucasus there are some isolated
populations of the ursinii complex (from the
Abishiz-Akhuba Range to Mt. Elburs).
The eastern form of dinniki is not
polymorphic in the same way as the western
populations. Rather the main color pattern
is the typical "nebulosa-dinniki" kind of
pattern. In sympatric areas the ursinii taxon
is more or less typical "mountain ursinii" in
color pattern although with a certain
similarity to the type of bilineate pattern seen
in the southwest European V. seoanei (Fig.
20). In some populations of this taxon in
Checheno-Ingushetia, a certain fraction of
the snakes are also "bronze" colored (Plate
Id). This pattern type has not been
observed in the sympatric populations. The
FIG. 16. Ventral side of the male of the east
Vipera dinniki ("east-dinniki") at the sympatric
locality, Mt Elbrus, central Caucasus from figure 15
(ZIG).
FIG. 18. Ventral side of the female of the Vipera
lotievi at the sympatric locality, Mt Elbrus, central
Caucasus from photo 17 (ZIG).
"nebulosa-dinniki" pattern of eastern dinniki
and the "seoanei-ursinii" pattern of
Caucasian ursinii taxon shows great
similarities, and can in some specimens be
difficult to separate. This is certainly the
reason for much of the confusion in earlier
studies of these vipers.
However, at a closer examination, the
two taxa are possible to identify (Table 9).
In ursinii the belly is lighter and the snout
more concave with raised canthus. The
preocular is large and in contact with the
nasal, and the apical is always single. Also
the crownscales are less fragmented. There
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.
6, p. 17
TABLE 9. Main morphological characteristics separating the sympatric Vipera lotievi and "east-dinniki".
White belly
Preocular in contact with nasal
Snout concave
Mean no. of ventrals
Always a single apical
Mean no. of crown scales
Parietal ocellated spot
Iris gold-edged in life
FIG. 19. Vipera dinniki ("east-dinniki")(upper) and Vipera lotievi (lower) from Itum Kali, Checheno-
Ingushctia. These specimens were found together at the same time (ZIEr).
Vol. 6, p. 18
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG. 20. Female of Vipera lotievi sp.n. from the type locality, the surroundings of Armkhi Village,
Checheno-Ingushetia, Nazranovskiy District.
always seems to be an ocellated spot present
on the parietal plate, and the ventral number
is high. In the "east dinniki" taxon the belly
is blackish and the snout more flat, the
preocular is always separated from the
nasal, and there is a higher fragmentation of
the crown scales. The iris always seems to
be gold-edged in live specimens (as is the
case for the entire V. kaznakovi complex),
and this is specially distinct in younger
specimens. The ventral number is lower.
Although in many ways similar in
pholidosis the kaznakovi lineage and the
ursinii lineage are genetically well separated
and paraphyletic. Immunological
comparisons of blood serum albumins
indicate that Vipera kaznakovi and related
taxa belongs to the berus-aspis branch while
ursinii constitute a distinct evolutionary
lineage (Herrmann et al, 1987; 1992). The
genetic comparisons of the west Caucasian
dinniki and the ursinii taxon from
Checheno-Ingushetia point in the same
direction (this study; Nilson et al., 1994)
except that the closer relation between
kaznakovi and aspis was not supported.
Thus this morphological similarity between
the two lineages in Caucasus might be a case
of convergent adaptation towards a similar
habitat, although Muellerian mimicry might
be involved.
A number of nominal taxa related to
these populations are recognized from this
geographical region (Russian Republic,
Georgia, Azarbaidjan and Armenia): renardi,
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 19
FIG. 21. Distribution of the vipers of the Caucasus and adjacent areas discussed in this paper. Light
stippled= Vipera renardi; dark stippled= Vipera kaznakovi; cross-hatching= Vipera (u.) eriwanensis; horizontal
hatching= Vipera lotievi; vertical hatching= Vipera dinniki. Due to environmental reasons the distribution of
all taxa are only fragmented within the depictured ranges, a situation especially pronounced in renardi. Also
occurring in the region and related to the vipers discussed are the north Iranian populations of the ursinii
complex ('ebneri') that penetrates into southeastern Azarbaidjan in the Talysh mountains, Vipera darevskii (of
the kaznakovi complex) which has its known distribution restricted to northwestern Armenia (Mt. Legli), and
V. pontica from the Artwin province in Turkey. Other species of vipers not discussed here occur
sympatrically in the region.
kaznakovi, darevskii, eriwanensis, dinniki
(Fig. 21).
What names are then available for these
two different sympatric central and east
Caucasian taxa? Vipera dinniki was
originally described from Malaya Laba and
Svanetia, localities situated on the western
side of the upper parts of Little Laba River
and the high-mountain basin of the Inguri
River, respectively (Orlov and Tuniyev,
1986). The type locality has been restricted
to Malaya Laba (by selection of 'The
Museum of Natural History of Kharkov
State University specimen no. 26044' as
lectotype; Vedmederja et al., 1986). The
type locality is situated in the western
Caucasus and the polymorphic western
Vol. 6, p. 20
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 10. Variation, given as Mean ±S.E. and range (for apicals in % of specimens with two plates) of
selected morphological characters in Vipera eriwanensis (N=44), Vipera lotievi (N=14, if not otherwise stated),
andVipera renardi (N=42).
* Counted as sum of both sides. ** No specimen with two apicals, but one with three. Also two specimens
with no apical; thus 6.8% total with more than one or without apical. *** N=16. Four unicolored "bronze"
specimens not included. **** reduction from 21 to 19 dorsal scale rows (at ventral number)
dinniki populations must be referred to this
name. The complex picture of separation
and similarities between all the different
isolated mountain populations in the western
Caucasus demands parallel genetic studies.
The name Vipera kaznakowi orientalis
(Vedmederja, 1984; non Vipera orientalis
Seba, 1734-1735; Daudin, 1801-1803;
Shaw, 1802) was given by Vedmederja
(1984) for eastern vipers at Lagodechi. As
stated above at this locality the two species
are sympatric, but the name orientalis is not
available (nomen nudum - Orlov and
Tuniyev, 1986). Besides the color pattern,
the eastern dinniki is as well somewhat
morphologically distinguished compared to
western dinniki (Table 4). It is
geographically separated from the western
dinniki and it might be justified to treat it as
a taxon of its own. The genetic distance has
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 21
TABLE 1 1 . Frequency of certain characteristics in the populations (in percentage of investigated specimens)
Divided parietals
Divided frontal
Preocular(s) in contact with nasal
Without upper nasal split
Supralabial dark sutures absent
Lateral body blotches absent
Snout concave on dorsal side
Belly whitish (not dark)
however not yet been calculated as
fundamental material still is lacking.
Thereby we prefer not to draw any
taxonomic conclusion about the "east-
dinniki" populations. We preserve the terra
typica restricta for Vipera dinniki to Malaya
Laba.
The other question is to what taxon does
the viper of the ursinii complex belong. In
principle north of the Caucasus on the dry
steppes renardi occurs while in the
Armenian highlands south of the Caucasus
eriwanensis is found (the species status of
renardi is analyzed and discussed in Joger et
al., 1992). We consider also eriwanensis as
an evolutionary species (Hoggren et al.,
1993; Nilson et al., 1994). The Caucasian
form is geographically separated from these
two taxa, and morphologically distinguished
(Tables 10 and 11, Figs. 17, 19-20, Plate
Id), also supported by genetic distinction
(Tables 7, 8; Nilson et al., 1994).
Taxonomically it does not fit in with these
two allopatric ursinii s.l. taxa, although
morphological similarity with eriwanensis
can be noted. As there is no reason to
believe reduced reproductive cohesion- all
populations traditionally referred to ursinii
would belong to a single species (albeit
divided in several subspecies) according to
the biological species concept (BSC).
However, all here (and elsewhere- Nilson &
Andren, 1994) recognized taxa in this
complex are allopatric and apomorphic in
characters (morphological and/or genetic),
and as we are interested in a taxonomy that
reflects the phylogeny, we find the
evolutionary and phylogenetic species
concepts preferable (Frost and Hillis, 1990;
Frost et al., 1992; see Nilson, 1993, for
application on vipers). We therefore
recognize it as a separate taxon in this group
of vipers.
Taxonomic Account
Vipera lotievi sp.n. (Fig. 22)
Holotvpe and Terra typica: ZIN
20309, Fig. 22, female, Armkhi, Checheno-
Ingushetia, Russia, below Mt. Stolovaya,
2000 m. altitude, 1986-07-20-23. leg. K.
Lotiev.
Paratypes: ZIN 20305, Itum-Kali,
Checheno-Ingushetia, 1990-08, leg. K.
Lotiev; ZIN 20310, Armkhi, Checheno-
Ingushetia, below Mt. Stolovaya, 2000
altitude, 1986-07-20-23, leg. K. Lotiev;
ZIN 20304, vicinity of village Armkhi,
Checheno-Ingushetia, 1988-07, leg.
Gizatulin; ZIG 298-306, river Chanty-
Argun w. Itum-Kali, Checheno-Ingushetia,
Vol. 6, p. 22
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG. 22. The female holotype of Vipera lotievi (ZIN 20309), Armkhi, Checheno-Ingushetia, below Mt.
Stolovaya, 2000 m altitude.
1986-05-28, leg. B.Tuniyev; ZIN 20307,
Itum-Kali, Checheno-Ingushetia, 1987-08,
leg. Lotiev; ZIN 20312, Armkhi,
Checheno-Ingushetia, 1987-09, leg. Lotiev;
ZIN 20313, Armkhi and Mt. Stolovaya,
Checheno-Ingushetia, 1986-07-20, leg.
Gizatulin; ZIG 297, Mt. Elbrus, 1986, leg
Filippov, coll. Tuniyev; ZIN 18203,
Teberda, State Reserve, Mt. Bolshaya
Hatipara, 1969, leg. Zalslavsky; ZIN
18226, Kabardino-Balkaria, vicinity of
village Terskol, 1970-08-19, leg. Kireev;
ZIN 11996, Caucasus, Gunib, Dagestan,
1909-05-29, leg. Berg; ZIN 20303,
Lagodechi, 1988-07, leg. Bakradze.
Diagnosis and definition: A species
of the Vipera ursinii complex characterized
by polymorphism in color-pattern, including
"bilineate pattern" of the same kind as in V.
seoanei, and "bronze" unimorphs. External
morphology evolved as typical for mountain
taxa of the ursinii complex but not similar to
any of the other in color pattern.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 23
From the sympatric "east-dinniki" it
differs in several scalation characters and in
color of the belly (Table 9, Fig. 11). In
lotievi the belly is generally white, preocular
in contact with nasal, snout concave, 138 or
more ventrals, always a single apical, less
fragmentized crown scales (7-16), parietal
ocellated spot present, iris not gold-edged in
life. In "east-dinniki" the belly is black,
preocular separated from nasal, snout not
concave, 136 or less ventrals, apical single
or divided, more fragmentized crown scales
(10-21), no parietal ocellated spot, iris gold-
edged in life.
From the allopatric renardi it differs
besides color pattern in morphology by
having light supralabials (sutures heavily
colored in black in renardi), a higher rostral
index, smaller size, white belly (dark in
renardi), and a different niche by being
alpine {renardi is a lowland steppe
inhabitant). No future reproductive
cohesion can be postulated.
It is separated from the likewise
allopatric eriwanensis in the Armenian
highlands by the semidesert lowland of the
Kura River Valley, that separates the Big
Caucasus from the Small Caucasus. No
connection can be postulated in an
evolutionary time frame. Besides color
pattern there is a differentiation in
morphology by eriwanensis having a higher
number of crown scales and a somewhat
lower ventral count, and preocular separated
from nasal to a higher degree (Tables 10 and
11).
Description of holotype (Fig.
22): An adult female, total length 422 mm,
tail 41 mm, latter equal to 10.8 % of total
length. Length of head, from posterior
border last supralabial to tip of snout 16.8
mm, from posterior border of parietals to tip
of snout 12.2 mm, breadth of head at
broadest part of head 9.5 mm, at level of the
eyes 8.0 mm, size of eye horizontally 2.5
mm and vertically 2.0 mm, distance between
eye and lip 2.6 mm. Head covered with
rather large scales or plates. Two large
supraoculars and 1 large frontal plate on top
of head, parietals large, frontal separated
from supraoculars by 3 and 2 smaller scales
on right and left side respectively, 1 canthal
and 1 supranasal scale on each canthus
rostralis, but the two supranasals are partly
united with the apical; 3 intercanthals and 6
intersupraoculars. Height/depth of rostral
3.4/2.7 mm (=1.26), it is bordered by 2
supralabials, 2 internasals and the broad
"apical"; eye surrounded by 8 circumoculars
on each side, 5 loreals on each side, upper
preocular in contact with nasal on both
sides, nasal partly divided at upper edge, 8
supralabials, with forth below eye, and 9
sublabials on each side, anterior supralabials
not much enlarged compared to posterior
ones, 6 second chinshields bordering the
anterior ones and 4 scales in the gular row.
Dorsal side of snout concave resulting in a
pronounced and raised canthus rostralis.
Two preventrals and 141 ventrals, 24+1
subcaudals, 21 dorsal scale rows at
midbody and on neck one head-length
behind the head, 17 dorsal scalerows one
head-length anterior to anal. Reduction
from 21 to 19 dorsal scale rows at level of
ventral number 89. Dorsal pattern
consisting of a weakly winding zig-zag band
with 48 windings, lateral body pattern dark
weakly contrasting towards the lighter
dorsal groundcolor. Head pattern consists
of 2 dark oblique bands which do not unite,
and a posterior band from eye to corner of
mouth and somewhat further back along the
lateral sides of neck, no dark pattern on chin
or in labial region although a very weak
dotted pattern at the supralabial sutures can
be imagined, ground color light brown with
dorsal pattern dark brown and black edged,
ventral side light, throat light. Ocellated
spot on frontalia.
Variation: See Tables 5 and 6.
Besides the variation in scalation a
pronounced variation in color and pattern is
expressed. Most striking, and unique for
the entire ursinii complex, is the bronze
morph, which is found in 25 % of the
investigated specimens (N=40) (Plate Id).
Distribution: Vipera lotievi is
distributed in the semiarid 'hollows'
between the northern slope of the main
Caucasian range and Skalisty range from the
upper part of the Kyafar River (range
Abishir-Akhuba) eastward to the interior of
Vol. 6, p. 24
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Daghestan (see map). Altitudinal span in
this region goes from 1200 m up to 1600 m
(1800m). Further it is recorded from Mt.
Elbrus in the central Caucasus, and
mountains north of Lagodechi in the eastern
Caucasus, besides several isolated records
from the eastern and central Caucasus range.
Habitats: Typical habitats are
oreoxerophytes landscapes with semiarid
light-forests (like Shibliak), phrygana (with
'tragakant' astragalus) which are very
similar to east-Mediterranean types of
vegetation. On the upper elevation of the
distribution V. lotievi reaches the subalpine
mountain belt.
"Refuge History": The development
of the xerophilous vegetation has taken place
since Pliocene in the eastern part of the
Caucasian Isthmus. Four main refuges are
known: two humid (Colchis and Talysh-
Hyrkanian) and two arid-xerophilous
(Armenian and Dagestanian). The north
Caucasian refuge of oreoxerophits,
including shibliak and phryganas are
situated along the shale-depression between
the main Caucasian Range and the Skalistiy
(Rocky) Range. There are several semiarid
hollows from central Dagestan (Gunibskoe
Plateau) and westward to the beginning of
the Kuban River (at the Mt. Elbrus region).
The vegetation is composed of Juniperus
oblonga, Paliurus spina-christi, Cerasus
incana, Colutea orientalis, Berberis vulgaris,
Astragalus denudatus, Celtis glabrata,
Ephedra procera and others. This vegetation
superficially is very close to the vegetation
of the Armenian highland and the mountains
of the Near East, but the regions share
relatively few species (3-5%). The major
part of the plants of these hollows has an
east Caucasian origin. For example, 25% of
the flora of the Itum-Kali hollow
(Checheno-Ingushetia) has east Caucasian
origin. Altogether, more than 200 species
of plants are endemic to these hollows
(Galushko, 1974).
There have been different interpretations
about the age of the vegetation in these
hollows. Most botanists have been of the
opinion that this vegetation has a Pliocene
origin (Grossgeim, 1948; Krasnov, 1894;
Kuznetsov, 1890), while Galushko (1974)
has the opinion that the semiarid hollows of
Checheno-Ingushetia are younger than the
hollows of Kardino-Balkaria and Osetia in
the west and Dagestan in the east, and
perhaps not older than Holocene. But the
remains of xerophilous flora on the crests
between the semiarid hollows are the
witness of the existence of a united
enormous xerophilous (Mediterranean)
refuge, running from Dagestan to the region
of Mt. Elbrus. Later, in Pleistocene, this
refuge disintegrated to several micro-refuges
which have persisted to different extent until
present. However, it must be pointed out
that although the xerophilous vegetation
(including mountain-steppe) had a wide
distribution along the shale-depression, it
also had the possibility to disperse up to the
mountains along the river valleys. Both
ways could be used by representatives of the
"ursinii-sptcics group" of vipers. Besides
the "ursinii-group" also thermophilous
species like Lacerta strigata, Coluber
najadum, and Elaphe hohenackeri are
present as isolates in these hollows. One
should also pay attention to the occurrence
of relicts of the xerothermal epoch in the
western Caucasus near the mountains
Jatyrgvarta and Magisko (Altukhov, 1966),
but the xerophilous vegetation did never
have any wide development in that area.
Literature Cited
ALTUKHOV, U. D. 1966. [About the high
mountain flora of the limestone of Tryu-Yakirgvart].
Problems of botanik, vol. 8, Leningrad. (In
Russian).
CLAYTON, J. W. AND D. N. TRETIAK. 1972.
Amine-citrate buffers for pH control in starch gel
electrophoresis. Journal of the Fisheries Research
Board of Canada 29:1 169-1 172.
DE LORENZO, R. J. AND F. H. RUDDLE. 1969.
Genetic control of two electrophoretic variants of
glucosephosphate isomerase in the mouse.
Biochemical Genetics 3:151-162.
FROST, D. R. AND D. M. HILLIS. 1990. Species
in concept and practice: Herpetological applications.
Herpetologica 46(1):87-104.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 25
FROST, D. R., A. G. KLUGE AND D. M. HILLIS.
1992. Species in contemporary herpetology:
Comments on phylogenetic inference and taxonomy.
Herpetological Review 23(2):46-54.
GALUSHKO, A. I. 1974. [On the flora to arid
slopes of vicinity of Itumkale (Checheno-
Ingushetia)]. Pp. 5-22. In Flora and vegetation of
the Eastern Caucasus. Ordjonikidze. (In Russian).
GROSSGEIM, A. A. 1948. [Vegetation of the
Caucasus]. Publishing House of the Moscow
Society of Researcher of Nature. (In Russian).
HARRIS, H. AND D. A. HOPKINSON. 1976.
Handbook of Enzyme Electrophoresis in Human
Genetics. North-Holland, Amsterdam.
HERRMANN, H.-W., U. JOGER, G. NILSON AND C.
G. SIBLEY. 1987. First steps towards a
biochemically based reconstruction of the phylogeny
of the genus Vipera.. Pp. 195-200. In J.J. van
Gelder, H. Strijbosch and P.J.M. Bergers (eds.),
Proceedings of the Fourth Ordinary General Meeting
of the Societas Europaea Herpetologica, Nijmegen
1987.
HERRMANN, H.-W., U. JOGER AND G. NILSON.
1992. Molecular phylogeny and systematics of
viperine snakes I. General phylogeny of European
vipers (Vipera sensu strictu). Pp. 219-224. In Z.
Korsos and I. Kiss (eds.), Proceedings of the Fifth
Ordinary General Meeting of the Societas Europaea
Herpetologica, Budapest 1991.
HILLIS, D. M. 1984. Misuse and modification of
Nei's genetic distance. Systematic Zoology 33:238-
240.
HOGGREN, M., G. NILSON, C. ANDREN, N. L.
ORLOV AND B. S. TUNIYEV. 1993: Vipers of the
Caucasus: Natural History and Systematic Review.
Herpetological Natural History 1(2):11-19.
JOGER, U., H.-W. HERRMANN AND G. NILSON.
1992. Molecular phylogeny and systematics of
viperine snakes II. A revision of the Vipera ursinii
complex. Pp. 239-244. In Z. Korsos and I. Kiss
(eds.), Proceedings of the Fifth Ordinary General
Meeting of the Societas Europaea Herpetologica,
Budapest 1991.
JOHNSON, A. G., F. M. UTTER AND H. O.
HODGINS. 1970. Interspecific variation of
tetrazolium oxidase in Sebastodes (rockfish).
Comparative Biochemistry and Physiology 37:281-
285.
KRASNOV, A. N. 1894. [Caucasian chains of
mountains, paralleled to Main Ridge, and its role in
formation of forest and steppe flora of the western
Caucasus]. Transactions of Naturalist Society of the
Kharkov University. (In Russian).
KUZNETSOV, N. I. 1890. [Geobotanical
investigation of the northern slope of the Caucasus].
Reports of the Russian Geographical Society. Vol.
26. (In Russian)
MURPHY, R. W., J. W. SITES, D. G. BUTH AND C.
H. HAUFLER. 1990. Proteins I: Isoenzyme
electrophoresis. Pp. 45-126. In D.M. Hillis and
C. Moritz (eds.), Molecular Systematics. Sinauer,
Sunderland, Massachusetts.
NEI, M. 1978. Estimation of average
heterozygosity and genetic distance from small
number of individuals. Genetics 89:583-590.
NIKOLSKY, A. M. 1913. [Reptiles and
Amphibians of the Caucasus]. The Caucasus
Museum Press, Tiflis, Georgia. 272 pp. (In
Russian).
NIKOLSKY, A. M. 1916. Fauna of Russia and
adjacent countries, Reptiles, Vol. 2. (1964: Israel
Program for Scientific Translations, Jerusalem,
vi+247 pp.).
NILSON, G. 1995. Venomous snakes in west Asia:
-Applicability of current species concepts.
Proceedings of the Asiatic Herpetological Congress.
In Press.
NILSON, G. AND C. ANDREN. 1986. The
mountain Vipers of the Middle East- The Vipera
xanthina complex (Reptilia, Viperidae). Bonner
Zoologische Monografien 20:1-90.
NILSON, G. AND C. ANDREN. 1994. The meadow
and steppe vipers of Europe and Asia, the Vipera
ursinii complex. Submitted.
NILSON, G., M. HOGGREN, B. S. TUNIYEV, N. L.
ORLOV AND C. ANDREN. 1994. Phylogeny of the
vipers of the Caucasus (Reptilia, Viperidae).
Zoologica Scripta. (In press).
ORLOV, N. L. AND B. S. TUNIYEV. 1986. [The
recent areas, their possible genesis and the
phylogeny of three viper species of Eurosiberian
group of the Vipera kaznakowi complex in the
Caucasus]. Pp. 107-135. In: N. Ananjeva and L.
Borkin (eds.), Systematics and Ecology of
Amphibians and Reptiles. Proceedings of the
Zoological Institute, Leningrad, 157. (In Russian).
Vol. 6, p. 26
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
ORLOV, N. L. AND B. S. TUN1YEV. 1990. Three
species in the Vipera kaznakowi complex
(Eurosibirian group) in the Caucasus: their present
distribution, possible genesis, and phylogeny.
Asiatic Herpetological Research 3:1-36.
RIDGWAY, G. J., S. W. SHERBURNE AND R. D.
LEWIS. 1970. Polymorphism in esterase of
Atlantic herring. Transactions of the American
Fisheries Society 99:147-151.
SELANDER, R. K., M. H. SMITH, S. Y. YANG, W.
E. JOHNSON, AND J. R. GENTRY. 1971.
Biochemical polymorphism and systematics in the
genus Peromyscus. I. Variation in the old-field
mouse (Peromyscus polionotus). Studies in
Genetics VI. University of Texas Publications
7103:49-90.
SNEATH, P. H. A. AND R. R. SOKAL. 1973.
Numerical Taxonomy. W.H.Freeman and Co., San
Francisco. 573 pp.
TUNIYEV, B. S. 1990. On the independence of the
Colchis Center of Amphibian and Reptile
speciation. Asiatic Herpetological Research 3:67-
84.
VEDMEDERJA, V. L., N. L. ORLOV AND B. S.
TUNIYEV. 1986. [On the taxonomy of the three
viper species of the Vipera kaznakowi complex].
Pp. 55-61 In: N. Ananjeva and L. Borkin (eds.),
Systematics and Ecology of Amphibians and
Reptiles. Proceedings of the Zoological Institute,
Leningrad, 157. (In Russian).
SHAW, C. R. AND R. PRASAD. 1970. Starch gel
electrophoresis of enzymes - a compilation of
recipes. Biochemical Genetics 4:297-330.
I June 1995 Asiatic Herpetological Research Vol. 6, pp. 27
Calotes versicolor nigrigularis Auffenberg and Rehman 1993
a Junior Primary Homonym
'Walter Auffenberg and 2Hafizur rehman
'7008 NW 67th Ave, Gainesville, FL. 32653 USA
Zoological Survey Dept. , Karachi 1 , Pakistan
Key Words: Reptilia, Sauna, Lacertilia, Agamidae, Calotes.
We recently described a new subspecies of Calotes versicolor, which we named C. v.
nigrigularis (Auffenberg and Rehman, 1993, Studies on Pakistan Reptiles. Pt. 3. Calotes
versicolor. Asiatic Herpetological Research 5:14-30). Immediately after publication, Dr.
Hidetoshi Ota brought to our attention that the same name has recently been used for a new
species of Calotes from Borneo (Ota and Hikida, 1991, Taxonomic review of the lizards of
the genus Calotes Cuvier 1817 (Agamidae: Squamata) from Sabah, Malaysia. Tropical
Ecology 4:179-192). Thus Calotes versicolor nigrigularis Auffenberg and Rehman is a
junior primary homonym of Calotes nigrigularis Ota and Hikida 1991.
The name we propose for Calotes versicolor nigrigularis Auffenberg and Rehman is
CALOTES VERSICOLOR FAROOQI
It is named in honor of Farooq Ahmed, Director, Zoological Survey Department, Pakistan.
Our extensive herpetological exploration in Pakistan would have been impossible without his
generous logistic support.
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 28-29 I
Simplified Field Technique for Obtaining Blood from Freshwater Turtles
RESHMA batra and Sant prakash
Department of Zoology, D.EJ., Dayalbagh Agra, 282 005, India
Brief Communication
Studies on the biochemical and
molecular aspects have now been recognized
as essential components of the conservation
program of species. The choice of the tissue
in such studies have invariably been the
blood and this has necessitated researchers
to look for the best procedure for field
sampling without harming or sacrificing the
animal.
Several methods have been proposed to
obtain uncontaminated blood, each having
its merit restricted to the species under study
or to the specific experiment. The most
common method of collection of samples of
blood in reptiles has been by cardiac
puncture (Gandal, 1958; Stephens and
Creekmore, 1983) but has been less popular
in turtles because of their thick plastron.
Cutting off the end of the tail (Duguy,
1970), toenail clipping (Frye, 1991) or
collecting blood from the major veins and
arteries (Maxwell, 1979) have been some of
the other proposals. Each of them has at
least one disadvantage; for example, intricate
dissection of veins/arteries is required
(Avery and Vitt, 1984). The procedure for
obtaining blood samples from the ventral
caudal vein, as suggested by Galbraith
(pers. comm.) and described in alligator
snapping turtles (Powell and Knesel, 1992),
has been initially utilized in our procedure
but we had to discard it as the amount of
blood obtained was not enough for multiple
analyses. Falling back on the oldest method
of heart puncture by inserting a long needle
laterally through the soft tissue between the
plastron and the carapace, we found that the
front leg provides the safest and the shortest
way to reach the heart, thus avoiding the
drilling of the plastron. In addition, our
technique does not require elaborate
equipment and can be used easily in the
field.
syringe
FIG. 1. Method for obtaining blood, h: heart, rfl:
fight fore-leg, s: syringe.
We have applied this technique in the
turtles of the genus Kachuga, K. tentoria
and K. dhongoka. These are primarily
medium sized turtles with males ranging
between 4-8 inches and females between 9-
18 inches in length. Presumably this
technique can be applied to many other
turtles of similar size.
Handling of the turtles, to keep them
docile, is the skill of the field worker and no
standard procedure can be described for it.
However, the turtle has to be suspended in a
manner that the head hangs freely
downward and the foreleg remains
unrestrained. The weight of the body forces
the foreleg to stretch, but this may need
some time. In this position, the left foreleg
can be stretched at an angle of 35° from the
head. The skin joining the leg with the
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 29
carapace is dabbed with 95% alcohol in
order to sterilize the area (Fig. 1).
A 2-inch long 32-gauge hypodermic
needle attached to a 5 ml syringe is inserted
(as shown in the figure) parallel to the
stretched foreleg. The needle is gently
inserted until it reaches the ventricle. The
depth of the needle penetration is often
between 1-1.5 inches. Gentle suction is
applied until the blood spurts into the
syringe and withdrawal pressure is then
slowly increased, until the syringe is at its
full suction capacity. The needle is then
slowly pulled out, with full syringe suction
still being applied. About 2-3 ml of blood is
drawn per sample. No pressure is applied
for the control of bleeding as no visible
bleeding occurs in this procedure.
However, germicidal powder is immediately
sprinkled at the point of the insertion of the
needle, before marking and releasing the
turtles.
Blood samples have successfully been
collected from over 50 freshwater turtles and
several of them have been utilized for
repetitive blood lettings and maintained in
captivity for over 4 months with no apparent
ill-effects. For field sampling, this
procedure provides a safe, practical and
simple technique for obtaining blood in
turtles.
Literature Cited
AVERY, H. W. AND L. J. VITT. 1984. How to
get blood from a turtle. Copeia 1984:209-210.
DUGUY, R. 1970. Numbers of blood cells and
their variation. Biology of reptiles. Pp. 93-109. In
Gans and Parson (Eds). Academic Press, New York.
FRYE, F. L. 1991. Biomedical and surgical aspects
of captive reptiles husbandry, Vol. 1. Kreiger
Publishing Co., Inc., Florida.
GANDAL, C. P. 1958. Cardiac puncture in
anaestized turtles. Zoologica 43:93-94.
MAXWELL, J. H. 1979. Anaethesia and surgery.
Pp. 127-152. In Harless and Morlock (Eds) Turtles:
perspective and research. John Wiley and Sons,
New York.
POWELL, S. C. AND J. A. KNESEL. 1992. Blood
collection from Macroclemys temmincki (Troost).
Herpetological Review 23(1): 19.
STEPHENS, G. A. AND J. S. CREEKMORE. 1983.
Blood collection by cardiac puncture in conscious
turtles. Copeia 1983:522-523.
Acknowledgments
We thank Mr. Dayal Prashad Gupta and
Mr. Akash Mathur for their help in turtle
collection.
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 30-35
The Systematic Relationships of Dravidogecko anamallensis
(Gunther 1875)
AARON M. BAUER1 AND ANTHONY P. RUSSELL2
1 Biology Department, Villanova University, Villanova, Pennsylvania 19085, USA
2Vertebrate Morphology Research Group, Department of Biological Sciences, University of Calgary, 2500
University Drive N.W., Calgary, Alberta, Canada T2N 1N4
Abstract. -The relationships of the monotypic gekkonine genus Dravidogecko are assessed by comparative
evaluation of its external and internal morphology. A suite of shared-derived features is possessed by
Hemidactylus and a variety of satellite genera, including Dravidogecko. These similarities are advocated as
being so compelling, and the ostensible defining features of Dravidogecko to be so weak that the latter is
subsumed as a junior synonym of Hemidactylus. The biogeographic consequences of this taxonomic shift are
considered.
Key words: Dravidogecko, Hemidactylus, Teratolepis, digits, scansors, phalanges, paraphalangeal elements,
muscles, biogeography, India.
Introduction
Dravidogecko is a monotypic genus of
gekkonid lizards endemic to south India.
The single species, D. anamallensis, was
originally described as a member of the
genus Hoplodactylus (Gunther, 1875;
Strauch, 1887), but following the work of
Smith (1933), it was assigned to a new
genus, primarily on the basis of differences
in the distal scansors and in preanal pore
arrangement. Subsequently it has been
demonstrated that Dravidogecko is a
gekkonine gecko, whereas Hoplodactylus
sensu stricto is a diplodactyline
(Underwood, 1954; Kluge, 1967). The
relationships of Dravidogecko have
remained obscure, and the systematic status
of the species has never been investigated
adequately. It is known from only a few
specimens from the Anaimalais, Palnis and
Tirunelveli Hills (Satyamurti, 1962; Murthy,
1985) but is reportedly widely distributed
throughout forested areas of southern
peninsular India (Daniel, 1983).
Russell (1972) considered Dravidogecko
to belong, on morpho-functional grounds,
in the Hemidactylus group, along with
Hemidactylus, Briba, Teratolepis and
Cosymbotus. Kluge (1983) placed it, along
with the other gekkonine genera previously
mentioned, in the tribe Gekkonini on the
basis of the absence of the second
ceratobranchial arch. Russell (1976: 238;
Fig. 14) suggested that Dravidogecko had a
digital structure that was most closely
approached by that of Hemidactylus and its
close allies. While external form of the
digits is particularly sensitive to functional
demands and thus prone to exhibiting
convergence and parallelism (Russell,
1979), details of the internal anatomy are
much more helpful at indicating true
homology and, therefore, affinity (Russell,
1976, 1979; Russell and Bauer, 1990). We
herein present the results of a comparative
survey of both the external and internal
anatomy of the feet and digits in
Hemidactylus (and its close relatives) and
use these to demonstrate both the wide range
of variation present and the shared derived
features that circumscribe this cluster and
help clarify the relationships of the enigmatic
Dravidogecko. We further relegate the
generic name Dravidogecko into the
synonymy of Hemidactylus as there are no
derived features of Dravidogecko that are
not also shared by at least some
Hemidactylus. It is probable that H .
anamallensis is a primitive hemidactyl.
Materials and Methods
Specimens of Dravidogecko were
examined or borrowed from the collections
of The Natural History Museum, London
(BMNH) and the Institute Royal des
Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, Brussels
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.6, p. 31
(IRSNB). Comparative material of other
gekkonines, especially Hemidactylus, were
borrowed from the BMNH and the
California Academy of Sciences, San
Francisco (CAS). Observations on toe
structure were made using a Nikon SMZ-10
microscope. The specimens examined are
listed below. All numbers refer to BMNH
specimens unless otherwise identified.
Dravidogecko anamallensis 82.5.22.79-84;
IRSNB 1194.
Briba brasiliana 1971.1045.
Cosymbotus craspedotus 1926.12.7.7,
1930.10.9.2
C. platyurus xxi.36a, 97.6.21.4,
97.12.28.10, CAS 18565, CAS 18567
Hemidactylus albopunctatus 1946.8.22.75;
H. ansorgii 1901.1.28.22; 1966.337; H.
barodanus 1905.11.7.1-6; 1937.12.5.215-
216; 1958.1.6.29; 1970.1437-38; H.
bouvieri 66.4.12.3; 75.4.26.10; H .
bowringii 1929.12.1.7-10; 1940.4.26.2-3;
1956.1.11.15-16; H. brookii 1918.1 1.12.2-
10; 1930.10.6.6; 1931.12.10.6-7;
1970.2196-98; 1971.242; H. citernii
1931.7.20.114-119 and 128-130;
1937.12.5.202-204; H. curlei
1946.8.25.41; H. depressus 52.2.19.21;
61.2.21.5; 1948.1.7.35; H. echinus
89.7.6.1; 1903.7.28.1-2; H. fasciatus
1919.8.16.48; 1956.1.11.37-40; 1971.253;
H. flaviviridis 1931.7.20.153-155;
1971.1378-1382; H.forbesii 1946.8.25.43-
Al;H.frenatus 1938.10.2.1; 1952.1.4.30-
31; 1970.1879-1895; H. garnotii
95.11.7.1; 1903.2.21.1-2; 1940.6.3.24-29;
H. giganteus 1908.12.28.27; 1969.828-
829; H. gracilis 74.4.29.1388;
80.11.10.47; H. granti 1957.1.9.52-66; H.
greeffii 93.12.7.1; 98.3.30.21-22; H.
homeolepis 99.12.5.38; 1953.1.7.84-85;
1967.485-489; H. isolepis 1952.1.7.79-80;
H. jubensis 1946.8.23.66; H. karenorum
68.4.3.88-89; 91.11.26.13-14; H.laevis
1946.8.25.42; H. leschenaulti 70.5.18.70-
71; 74.4.29.233-236 (six specimens); H.
longicephalus 1936.8.1.287-305; H.
mabouia 1923.11.9.46-50; 1964.1429-35;
1970.2209-15; H. macropholis
1931.7.20.109; 1937.12.5.250-258; H.
maculatus 69.8.25.15; 1956.1.11.44; H.
megalops 1946.8.25.67; H. mercatorius
1930.7.1.84-90; 1938.8.3.11-15; H.
muriceus 1926.9.24.13; 1966.283; H.
modestus 1946.8.25.37; H. ophiolepis
1937.12.5.324-325; H. oxyrhinus
99.12.5.170-175; 1967.491-494; H .
persicus 1970.250; 1972.716; H. prashadi
1946.8.14.66-69; H. pumilio 1946.8.20.1;
1946.8.25.58-61; H. reticulatus,
1901.3.8.1-3; H. richardsoni 1916.5.29.1;
1919.8.16.49; H. ruspolii 1937.12.5.228-
229; 1937.12.5.239-246; H. sinaitus
97.10.28.83-86; 1937.2.5.293;
1953.1.6.97-98; H. smithi 1931.7.20.85-
89; 1972.745; H. somalicus 1946.8.25.77-
78; H. squamulatus 9 8.1.8.2-3;
1902.5.26.2; 1923.10.9.2; 1923.10.9.14-
15; H. subtriedrus 74.11.11.1; H. taylori
1946.8.23.48; H. triedrus xxi.l9a-b; H.
tropidolepis 1937.12.5.322-323; H .
turcicus 1934.11.8.10- 14; 1971.1143-45;
H. yerburii 99.12.13.43-44; 1903.6.26.3-4;
1945.12.18.12.
Teratolepis fasciata 69.8.28.32;
1933.7.8.37; 1963.1019; 1964.930-931; T.
albofasciatus 1963.613-621
Results
A considerable range of variation in
digital form and subdigital scansor design
exists among members of the genus
Hemidactylus (Fig. 1). This variation is
evident in such aspects as the number of
divided scansors (lamellae), the extent of
their division, the extent of the undivided
lamellar series at the base of the digits, and
the length, form and degree of separation of
the free, distal, claw-bearing segment of the
digits. Figure 2 illustrates the general form
of the ventral aspect of the right pes of
Dravidogecko and provides comparison
with the ventral aspects of the fourth pedal
digit of Hemidactylus reticulatus and
Teratolepis fasciata. While some species of
Hemidactylus, such as H. garnotii and H.
smithii (Fig. 1), have digits with a large
number of completely divided scansors, and
an elongate, free distal, claw-bearing
portion, this is not so for other species, such
as Teratolepis albofasciatus (see Grandison
and Soman, 1963), Hemidactylus somalicus
and H. bouvieri (Fig. 1). In the latter three
cases the number of scansors is small, only
the distal most ones are notched, and the
distal, free, claw-bearing portion of the digit
Vol. 6, p. 32
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG. 1. The array of digital form in the genera
Hemidactylus and Teralolepis. All illustrations are
of the fourth digit of the pes; a-e, j are of the right
pes, f-h, k-p are of the left pes. The 2 mm scale bar
refers to all specimens except n, to which the 5 mm
scale bar applies. All catalogue numbers refer to the
Natural History Museum, London (BMNH). a.
Teralolepis albofasciatus 1963.617; b. Hemidactylus
bowringii 1929.12.1.6; c. //. garnotii 95.11.7.1; d.
H. barodanus 1970.1438; e. H. turcicus 1971.1144;
f. H. somalicus 1946.8.25.77; g. H. ophiolepis
1937.12.5.324; h. H. mabouia 1964.1431; j. H.
forbesii 1946.8.25.47; k. H. smithii 1931.7.20.85;
1. H. fascial us 1919.8.16.48; m. H. ansorgii
1901.1.28.22; n. //. richardsonii 1916.5.29.1; p. H.
bouvieri 66.4.12.3.
is relatively short. This situation is also
seen in Hemidactylus reticulatus and
Teratolepis fasciata (Fig. 2, b, c). The
almost continuous range of variation in
external digital characters, especially among
the west Asian and Somali species of the
Hemidactylus group of geckos has long
been recognized, and has resulted in the
establishment of several different, largely
arbitrary, generic arrangements (see Parker,
1942 for a discussion). Thus, while
division of the scansors is generally
characteristic of the genus Hemidactylus,
there are many species that express this trait
only marginally.
Russell (1976: Fig. 14) indicated this
potential continuity in scansor form, from
undivided to completely divided, by
FIG. 2. a. Ventral aspect of the right pes of
Dravidogecko anamallensis, BMNH 82.5.22.79. b.
Ventral aspect of the fourth digit, right pes of
Hemidactylus reticulatus, BMNH 1901.3.8.1. c.
Ventral aspect of the fourth digit, left pes of
Teratolepis fasciata, BMNH 1933.7.8.37. Scale bar
in millimeters.
comparing Dravidogecko with
Cyrtodactylus brevipalmatus, Hemidactylus
reticulatus and H. barodanus. While this
was simply a depiction of change of form
assembled as a morphotypic series, it was
also implied that there may be deeper
underlying anatomical clues that are
indicative of the closeness of relationship of
Dravidogecko to Hemidactylus. The
superficial comparisons of the digits(Figs.
1, 2; see above) provide some idea of the
potential range of variation, but should be
treated with caution when being implicated
in arguments about relationship because of
the extreme plasticity of external digital
form. [Such aspects are well exemplified by
the taxonomic history of the taxon that is the
subject of this contribution.] Detailed
examination of the internal anatomy of the
digits provides more convincing evidence
about the affinities of Dravidogecko.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 33
Russell (1976) presented a mechanistic
diagram of the main features of digital
design in Hemidactylus. The chief aspects
of note here are the unusual form and
relationships of the antepenultimate phalanx
of digits III-V of the pes (Russell, 1977),
the distal extent of the dorsal interossei
muscles along the digit, and the means of
tendinous insertion of these muscles onto
the scansors. The pattern of digital
characteristics of Hemidactylus is essentially
repeated in Dravidogecko and is restricted to
only a few other genera (Briba, Cosymbotus
and Teratolepis). This suite of shared-
derived digital features of these taxa (the
short, erect nature of the antepenultimate
phalanx of pedal digits III-V, the distal
extension of the dorsal interossei muscles as
far as the distal end of the antepenultimate
phalanx, and the tendinous insertion of the
dorsal interossei muscles onto the distal
margin of each scansor in turn) unites them
as a distinctive evolutionary unit. Apart
from Hemidactylus, all of the other genera
in this cluster are either monotypic (Briba
and Dravidogecko) or include only two
species (Cosymbotus and Teratolepis).
Dissection of the digits of Dravidogecko
reveals that the dorsal interossei muscles are
well-developed and robust and extend as
fleshy bellies as far distally as the digital
inflection (the point of emplacement of the
reduced, erect antepenultimate phalanx
onmanual digits III and IV and pedal digits
III-V). The dorsal interossei muscles send
individual tendons to the distal borders of
the scansors as they do in Hemidactylus (see
Russell, 1976) and Cosymbotus. This
situation also pertains in Teratolepis and
Briba (Russell, 1972). Dravidogecko also
shares with Hemidactylus, Briba and
Cosymbotus the particular morphology and
placement of paraphalangeal elements
(Russell and Bauer, 1988).
The above comparisons indicate that
Dravidogecko shares with other members of
the Hemidactylus radiation (Hemidactylus,
Briba, Cosymbotus, Teratolepis) all of the
derived digital features that distinguish these
taxa from all other geckos. However,
apomorphic features characteristic of many
Hemidactylus species, such as those
associated with the complete division of the
scansors, are lacking in Dravidogecko. It is
therefore likely that D. anamallensis is a
relatively plesiomorphic member of this
radiation. As such, it is probable that the
recognition of Dravidogecko renders
Hemidactylus as presently construed
paraphyletic. In order to maintain
monophyletic generic units we hereby place
Dravidogecko into the synonymy of
Hemidactylus Gray, 1825. The correct
designation for the single known species
formerly referred to this genus thus becomes
Hemidactylus anamallensis (Giinther 1875),
new combination.
Discussion
Many lizard families include monotypic
genera. Although in some cases these
represent independently evolving lineages,
in most they are relatively primitive or
highly derived members of other lineages,
and their recognition renders the latter
groups paraphyletic. Hemidactylus is the
most specious genus in the Gekkonidae,
with 75 species currently recognized
(Kluge, 1991). Relationships within the
genus are very poorly understood (Parker,
1942; Loveridge, 1947; Kluge, 1969;
Bastinck, 1981) and a general uniformity
among most forms (Russell, 1976) has
rendered casual attempts at investigating its
phylogeny unsuccessful. The placement of
Dravidogecko anamallensis into this morass,
of course, does nothing to aid this
confusion. It does, however, ensure that
Hemidactylus anamallensis is taken into
account if and when a generic revision of all
Hemidactylus is accomplished.
It is not only in the interest of
maintaining monophyletic groups that the
revaluation of monotypic genera is
undertaken. Current nomenclatural usage
has implications for non-systematists. As
an endemic Indian subcontinent form,
Dravidogecko might be used to support
arguments about the uniqueness and
antiquity of the Indian biota. The use by
biogeographers of classification schemes
that do not adequately reflect phylogenetic
patterns has been shown to lead to the
erection of demonstrably false hypotheses
Vol. 6, p. 34
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
(Bauer, 1989). Clearly, biogeographic
interpretations must be based upon the
phylogenetic relationships of the organisms
considered. Some other Hemidactylus
group geckos sharing with H. anamallensis
at least partially undivided scansors are also
Indian forms (e.g., Teratolepis albofasciatus
from the Ratnagiri District, Maharashtra,
Hemidactylus gracilis from the Madhya
Pradesh, Maharashtra and Andhra Pradesh
(Smith, 1935;Murthy, 1985), and H.
reticulatus from Tamil Nadu, Andhra
Pradesh and Karnataka (Smith, 1935;
Murthy, 1985)). Teratolepi fasciata is also
from the Indian subcontinent (Anderson,
1964; Minton, 1966) and it appears likely
that the hemidactyls, as a group, have
undergone a long period of evolution and
diversification within the region.
Although the geographic ranges of some
forms of Hemidactylus are indicative of
relatively recent expansions (Kluge, 1967,
1969), most Indian species are moderately
to highly circumscribed in their distribution
and hold the promise of contributing
substantially to biogeographic hypotheses of
area relationships within peninsular India.
However, both biogeographic analyses and
meaningful studies of the evolution of the
pedal characteristics that have made
Hemidactylus sensu lato so successful in
India (and elsewhere) must await the
ultimate resolution of phylogenetic
relationships within the genus. In
subsuming Dravidogecko within
Hemidactylus we concur with the sentiments
expressed by Loveridge (1947: 97) in
discussing the African members of this
radiation, "Any arrangement that would
break up so unwieldy a genus as
Hemidactylus is worthy of careful attention .
. ." Such an arrangement must be
phylogenetically based, and at present
insufficient data are at hand to attempt this.
However, we regard the identification of all
members belonging to the Hemidactylus
clade as a necessary first step in the process.
Acknowledgments
We thank E. N. Arnold, Mathias Lang
and Jens Vindum for access to specimens.
E. Prickley and S. F. Milone provided
general assistance in the laboratory.
Literature Cited
ANDERSON, J. A. 1964. A report on the gecko
Teratolepis fasciata (Blyth 1853). Journal of the
Bombay Natural History Society 61(1):161-171.
BAST1NCK, J. 1981. Phyletische analyse van
dertien kenmerken verspreid over degeslachten der
Gekkoninae. Unpublished thesis, University of
Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
BAUER, A. M. 1989. Reptiles and the
biogeographic interpretation of New Caledonia.
Tuatara 30:39-50.
DANIEL, J. C. 1983. The Book of Indian Reptiles.
Bombay: Bombay Natural History Society, x +
141 pp.
GRANDISON, A. G. C. AND P. W. SOMAN. 1963.
Description of a new geckonid lizard from
Maharashtra, India. Journal of the Bombay Natural
History Society 60(2):322-325.
GUNTHER, A. 1875. Second report on collections
of Indian reptiles obtained by the British Museum.
Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London
1875:224-234 + 5 pis.
KLUGE, A. G. 1967. Higher taxonomic categories
of gekkonid lizards and their evolution. Bulletin of
the American Museum of Natural History 135:1-59.
KLUGE, A. G. 1969. The evolution and
geographical origin of the New World Hemidactylus
mabouia-brooki complex (Gekkonidae: Sauria).
Miscellaneous Publications of the Museum of
Zoology, University of Michigan 138:1-78.
KLUGE, A. G. 1983. Cladistic relationships
among gekkonid lizards. Copeia 1983:465-475.
KLUGE, A. G. 1991. Checklist of gekkonid
lizards. Smithsonian Herpetological Information
Service 85:1-35.
LOVERIDGE, A. 1947. Revision of the Africn
lizards of the family Gekkonidae. Bulletin of the
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard
University 98(1): 1-469.
MINTON, S. A. 1966. A contribution to the
herpetology of West Pakistan. Bulletin of the
American Museum of Natural History 134:27-184.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 35
MURTHY, T .S. N. 1985. A field guide to the
lizards of Western Ghats. Records of the Zoological
Survey of India Miscellaneous Publications,
Occasional Paper 72: 1-51.
PARKER, H. W. 1942. The lizards of British
Somaliland, with an appendix on topography and
climate by Capt. R. H. R. Taylor, O. B. E.
Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology,
Harvard University 91:1-101.
RUSSELL, A .P. 1972. The foot of gekkonid
lizards: a study in comparative and functional
anatomy. Unpubl. Ph. D. thesis, University of
London, England.
RUSSELL, A. P. 1976. Some comments
concerning interrelationships amongst gekkonine
geckos. Pp. 217-244. In A. d'A. Bellairs and C.
B. Cox (Eds.), Morphology and Biology of
Reptiles. London, Academic Press.
RUSSELL, A. P. 1977. The phalangeal formula of
Hemidactylus Oken, 1817 (Reptilia:Gekkonidae): a
correction and a functional explanation. Zentralblatt
fur Veterinar Medizin, Reihe C. Anatomia,
Histologia Embryologia 6:332-338.
RUSSELL, A. P. 1979. Parallelism and integrated
design in the foot structure of gekkonine and
diplodactyline geckos. Copeia 1979(1):1-21.
RUSSELL, A. P. AND A. M. BAUER. 1988.
Paraphalangeal elements of gekkonid lizards: a
comparative survey. Journal of Morphology
197:221-240.
RUSSELL, A. P. AND A. M. BAUER. 1990. Digit I
in pad-bearing gekkonine geckos: alternate designs
and the potential constraints of phalangeal number.
Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 29(2):453-472.
SATYAMURTI, S. T. 1962. Guide to the lizards,
crocodiles, turtles and tortoises exhibited in the
reptile gallery, Madras Government Museum, pp. 1-
45. Government of Madras.
SMITH, M. A. 1933. Remarks on some Old World
geckos. Records of the Indian Museum 35:9-19.
SMITH, M.A. 1935. The Fauna of British India,
including Ceylon and Burma. Reptilia andAmphibia,
vol. II, Sauria. London, Taylor & Francis.
STRAUCH, A. 1887. Bemerkungen iiber die
Geckoniden-Sammlung im zoologischen Museum
der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu St.
Petersburg. Memoires de l'Academie Imperial des
Sciences, St-Petersbourg. (7)35(2): 1-38.
UNDERWOOD, G. 1954. On the classification and
evolution of geckos. Proceedings of the Zoological
Society of London 124:469-492.
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 36-37 j'
The Ceylonese Tree Frog Polypedates cruciger Blyth, a New Record for
India
R. J. Ranjit Daniels1 and m. S. Ravichandran2
'M. S. Swaminathan Research Foundation, 3rd Cross Gtreet, Taramani Institutional Area, Madras, India
600113
Zoological Survey of India, 100 Santhome High Road, Madras, India 600028
Abstract. -The Ceylonese tree frog Polypedates cruciger was considered endemic to the island of Sri Lanka.
However, recent surveys in the Western Ghats, India has revealed that the species is widespread outside its
originally reported range. P. cruciger differs from both the Indian species P. maculatus and P. leucomystax in
morphology and ecology. P. cruciger is an addition to the amphibian fauna of India.
Key words: Amphibia, Anura, Polypedates cruciger, India, Western Ghats, distribution.
FIG. 1. Polypedates cruciger from the Western
Ghats of India.
Introduction
During a recent survey of amphibians in
the Western Ghats and southwestern India,
three specimens of tree frogs were obtained
in June 1990 from a private estate in the hills
of Kanyakumari district (c. 8° 15' N; 77°25'
E). Later in the year, two more specimens
of the same species were observed in parts
of Karnataka State around 14" N; 75° E.
The specimens have been deposited in the
ZSI (Madras) and BNHS (Bombay)
museums.
Discussion
Based on the extent of webbing between
the toes and fingers, the specimens were
assigned to the genus Polypedates (Liem,
1970; Daniel and Sekar, 1989). In India,
only two specimens of Polypedates have
been hitherto reported. These are P .
leucomystax (Gravenhorst) and P.
maculatus (Gray) (Inger and Dutta, 1986).
The examples from the Western Ghats
differed from both leucomystax and
maculatus in the skin of the head adhering to
the nasal and frontoparietal bones, the
tympanum being two-thirds the diameter of
the orbit, the three-fourth webbing on toes
and in the hour-glass shaped marking on the
dorsum. These characters agree well with
Rhacophorus (-Polypedates) cruciger of
Boulenger (1890) described from Sri Lanka.
Further, the hour-glass marking on the
dorsal side commencing from the middle
level of eyes to mid-body terminating in the
form of a trident is unmistakably similar to
that in Rhacophorus cruciger illustrated by
Kirtisinghe (1957). Considering the above
characteristics, we confirm the identity of
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 37
our specimens as Polypedates crucigerfFig.
1).
These specimens mark the first record of
this species in India outside its range (Sri
Lanka). The first three animals were located
within a clove plantation at an elevation of
400 m above MSL. These hills receive an
average annual rainfall of about 2000 mm.
Several males were observed calling on a
rainy night in June, perched on low
branches (c. 1 m above ground). The calls
consisted of a harsh tre... chuck repeated by
rival males followed by a series of chucks of
low intensity. In captivity, the males
continued to call during overcast and rainy
days. They fed well on a variety of live
insects including grasshoppers and
cockroaches.
The specimens observed in
southwestern Karnataka were in evergreen
forests in regions of 3000-6000 mm rainfall.
One individual was observed on October
1990 crossing a forest road and moving
towards a stream at midday. A second
individual was observed on November 1990
in a patch of dense forest, resting on a tree
trunk at c. 2 m above ground in the
company of a few smaller Philautus spp.
Specimens of Polypedates cruciger observed
in Karnataka were found at lower elevations
between 50 and 250 m above MSL.
The habitat preference, altitudinal and
geographical range, of this species in
southwest India suggest that this species
may be widespread in the Western Ghats
and has been overlooked by surveys until
recently. This species seems to be most
active during the rains and much of the
Western Ghats are inaccessible at this time.
This partly explains why the species has not
been reported from nearly 500 km of
intervening hills in its known range in India.
Acknowledgments
The authors wish to thank the Director,
Zoological Survey of India, Calcutta, Dr. K.
V. Lakshminarayana, Officer-in-charge,
Southern Regional Station, ZSI, Madras and
the Centre for Ecological Sciences, Indian
Institute of Science, Bangalore for the
facilities provided. Thanks are due to Dr.
R. S. Pillai, Scientist Emeritus (ZSI,
Madras), Mr. Romulus Whitaker, and Mr.
Harry Andrews of the Madras Crocodile
Bank for critically reviewing the manuscript.
Literature Cited
BOULENGER, G. A. 1890. Fauna of British India:
RepUlia and Batrachia, Taylor and Francis. London,
541 pp.
DANIEL, J. C. AND A G. SEKAR. 1989. Field
Guide to the Amphibians of Western India: Part
Four. Journal of the Bombay Natural History
Society 86:194-202.
INGER, R. F. AND S. K. DUTTA. 1986. An
overview of the amphibian fauna of India. Journal
of the Bombay Natural History Society 83
(supplement): 135- 146.
KIRTISINGHE, P. 1957. The Amphibia of Ceylon.
Colombo. 112 pp.
LIEM, S. S. 1970. The morphology, systematics
and evolution of the old world tree frogs
(Rhacophoridae and Hyperoliidae). Fieldiana
Zoology 57:1-145.
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 38-44 :
Size-gradation in Syntopic Frogs in South India
INDRANEIL DAS
Animal Ecology Research Group, Department of Zoology, University of Oxford, South Parks Road, Oxford
0X1 3PS, England
Present address: Centre for Herpetology, Madras Crocodile Bank, Post Bag No. 4, Mamallapuram-603 104,
Tamil nadu, S. India
Abstract. -An assemblage of eight metamorphosed anuran amphibians were studied at a seasonal locality in
South India to examine patterns of body size-gradation. In general, body shape was found to be closely
correlated to ecological characteristics of the species. The mean ratio of linear dimensions of the body in
adjacent species, when arranged in a size -series was 1.3 (range 0.83-1.88), as predicted by Hutchinson (1959)
for closely-related sympatric species. It was concluded that competition may be at work in producing these
ratios.
Key words: Amphibia, Anura, India, body size, competition.
Introduction
The body forms and sizes of organisms
have been considered, since the time of
Darwin (1859), to be determined by the
powerful forces of natural selection, and
may mirror a wide range of ecological
interactions often too complex to
comprehend in their entirety. The concept
of a form-function relation appears to have
stood the test of time, and is central to the
problem of organismic evolution (Gans,
1988). Animal size, for example, may be an
evolutionary response to demands of the
immediate environment, related to key life
history traits, such as fecundity, foraging,
locomotion, and reduction of predation,
desiccation, heating and cooling. Some
workers (e.g. Hutchinson, 1959; Schoener,
1986a) have argued that smaller species are
generally more specialized, as reflected in
their restricted diets and geographical
ranges. Gould (1966), however,
considered both large and small species to
be viable strategists, optimal size, according
to Phillipson (1981) being dependent on
competitive abilities and survival
probabilities of the various size and age
classes. However, large species tend to
appear later in a group's evolutionary
history, an exception being the Amphibia
(Peters, 1983).
Within ecological communities, if
environmental resources are partitioned
according to dimension, as documented by
Schoener (1965) and subsequent workers
(reviewed by Schoener, 1974; 1986b),
differences in the comparative sizes of the
organisms are to be expected. In fact, such
apparent differences were reported much
earlier by Hutchinson (1959), who found
constant differences in the ratios of linear
dimensions of the trophic (feeding)
apparatus among closely-related sympatric
species in his now controversial "Homage to
Santa Rosalia, or why are there so many
kinds of animals?" paper. Hutchinson
argued that similar species could coexist if
the ratios of linear dimensions and weights
of presumed competing species are around
1.3 and 2.0 respectively. While possible
causal factors remain unclear, such ratios
have been found in a wide range of both
invertebrate and vertebrate communities,
including beetles, spiders, frogs, lizards and
birds (reviewed by Schoener, 1986a).
In this paper, I report patterns of body
size and shape, and of size-gradation
observed in metamorphosed anurans from a
locality in South India. Specifically, I
searched for patterns of size gradation
within the eight syntopic frog species.
Materials and Methods
Eight species of anuran amphibians
occur in sympatry in the coastal scrublands
of Chengai Anna District, Tamil Nadu State,
South India. These, along with their mean
snout-vent lengths have been listed below:
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 39
Tomopttma rolandat
(2 82 pat
Microhyla rubra
(1.566 gm)
Uperodon tystorna
(13 0 gm)
Microhyla ornaia
(0 362 gm)
Rana htiadacryla
(99 64 gm)
FIG. 1. Shapes and masses of the species studied.
Figures in brackets are mean weights.
Microhyla ornaia (4.1 mm), M. rubra (7.2
mm), Tomopterna rolandae (10.9 mm),
Uperodon systoma (12.4 mm), Polypedates
maculatus (20.9 mm), /?a/za cyanophlyctis
(16.1 mm), fl. crassa (22.9 mm) and R.
hexadactyla (33.4 mm).
Abbreviations used include SVL (snout-
vent length), HW (head width at the angle of
the jaws, perhaps better defined as the
gape), TBL (tibia length, the distance from
the convex surface of knee to the convex
surface of heel, with both tibia and tarsus
flexed) and WT (wet body weight). Linear
measurements were taken to the nearest 0.1
mm with a Mitutoyo Dial Vernier Caliper,
weights were taken to the nearest 0.1 gm
with an Acculab Electronic Balance (Model
333).
To interpret shape changes, logarithmic
transformations of the dimensions of the
organ of each species were used in the
function log y = b log x + log a (where x
and y are the morphological variates), which
has been considered to approximate shape
change in most organisms (see Gould,
1966, for justification).
Observations
The assemblage of eight anuran species
studied display a range of body forms
(Figure 1) and sizes (Table 1). Except for
the diminutive species of the genus
Microhyla (maximum SVL 17.4 and 26.5
mm) and the large ranid, Rana hexadactyla
(maximum SVL 132.2 mm), all species
were small to medium, with maximum SVL
between 43.2 to 93.1 mm (mean 68.2).
A general impression is that some
species are comparatively short and squat,
while others are long and thin. To quantify
differences, WT was divided by the cube of
the SVL for individuals of each species.
Three morphological groups along a
continuum were recognized based on the
patterns of body form (length-weight data in
Table 2), which comprise species with
similar ecological preferences, including
heavy-bodied, terrestrial forms; light bodied
aquatic forms; and an arboreal form of
intermediate body mass.
The relationships of untransformed
values of WT/SVL3 (Figure 2.1), as well as
the arcsine-transformed data (Figure 2.2)
can be described as linear, the slope b being
0.38 and 1.89 respectively, not differing
significantly (r-test, P>0.05) from isometry,
indicating that large frogs are not likely to be
comparatively lighter.
The ratios of differences in linear
dimensions (SVL, HW, ED and TBL) and
weight (WT) of frogs from this study,
arranged in a size series (mean dimensions
divided by corresponding figures for
Microhyla ornata, the smallest member of
the assemblage) are shown in Figure 3. The
range of ratios of SVL (1.57-6.17) appear
greater than shown by Neotropical Anolis
lizards, 1.01-1.46 (Duellman, 1978), or
Vol. 6, p. 40
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 1 . Morphometric data on the eight species of anurams studied. References to species: MO,
Microhyla ornata; MR, Microhyla rubra; TR, Tomopterna rolandae; US, Uperodon systoma; RC, Rana
cyanophlyctis; PM, Polypedates maculatus; RCR, Rana crassa; RH, Rana hexadactyla. References to body
parts: SVL, snout-vent length; HW, head width; TBL, tibia length; WT, weight. Linear dimensions in cm;
wights in gm.
Philippines scincid lizards, 1.41-4.33
(Auffenberg and Auffenberg, 1987). Ratios
of HW (here considered the measure of the
trophic apparatus) which may be more
meaningful for understanding differences in
morphology that may be the result of
differences in feeding patterns, in the
present study were somewhat greater than
SVL ratios, the mean 4.3 (range 1.61-8.15).
Mean values of the SVL, HW and WT ratios
appear to be arranged in pairs that do not
reflect phylogenetic affinities, and the
implications, if any, are unclear. The
incremental increase in SVL from the
smallest to the largest species varied
between 2.93-60.99, and no regular pattern
of increment between adjacent species seems
evident, although Auffenberg and
Auffenberg (op. cit.) found that the greatest
size differences exist among the smallest
species in the skink community they
studied.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.6, p. 41
TABLE 2. Weight to cube of snout-vent length in the eight species of anurans studied.
Ratios of linear dimension of the body in
adjacent species, when arranged in a size-
series (Table 2) appear close to the
Hutchinsonian ratio, mean values for all
species ranging between 0.83-1.88 (mean
1.32± SE 0.09). Weight ratios were,
however, 0.83-4.60, the mean 2.63 (±SE
0.56) substantially larger than 2.0 as
predicted by Hutchinson.
Discussion
Morphologically similar species tend to
display similar ecological need, and if they
occur in sympatry, it is assumed that they
compete.
Duellman (1978), in his study of the
Ecuadorian herpetofaunal communities
discovered no size groupings among frog
and lizard species, using SVL ratios of
differences between sympatric species,
showing that there is, instead, a steady
increase in SVL. Auffenberg and
Auffenberg (1987) found that Philippines
skinks show greater ratios of differences
between species, and presumed predation on
a significantly greater size range of prey by
the scincids.
With Microhyla ornata, the smallest
species in the area, was used as a standard
against which all others were compared, the
range of ratios of SVL (1.57-6.17) was
found to be considerably greater than figures
reported from other studies on tropical
herpetological assemblages, including those
of Duellman (1978) and Auffenberg and
Auffenberg (1987), suggesting that
members of the assemblage of South Indian
amphibians under investigation feed on a
greater size range of prey.
For coexisting frog species, the ratio of
mean head width among species pairs
appear close to the ratio for closely-related,
sympatric and presumably competing
species described by Hutchinson (1959) in
studies from Canada (McAlpine and
Dilworht, 1989) and Peru (Toft, 1980),
indicating the potential for competition. The
mean values (±SE) of the ratios of SVL,
HW and WT for adjacent species in the
South Indian amphibians were 1.31
(±0.09), 1.37 (±0.09) and 2.63 (±0.56),
respectively.
The 1.3 ratio concept has recently come
under close scrutiny, leading some workers
(e.g. Strong et al., 1979; Simberloff and
Boeklen, 1981) to doubt its constancy. In
fact, Simberloff and Boecklen, op cit.)
attempted to show that the methods utilized
by workers reporting the constancy of the
Vol. 6, p. 42
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
SVL
0 2
0 4 0 6
log SVL
0 8
FIG. 2. Relationship between snout- vent length
(SVL) and the ratio of weight to cube of snout-vent
length (Wt/cube SVL) in the species studied. 2.1.
Untransformed data; 2.2. Log-transformed data.
Species abbreviations as in Table 1 .
ratios have been erroneous, although
subsequent workers have demonstrated that
the evidence is, in many cases, quite strong
on examination of fresh data (e.g. Schoener,
1984) or even on the basis of the tests
conducted by Simberloff and Boecklen (see
Losos et al., 1989). Maiorana (1978)
suggested that if ecological segregation of
two species (or age classes) requires a
minimum level of overlap in their degree of
morphological variability, the linear
displacement in mean size will also be
relatively constant, and argued that the
presence of similar ratios in many man-made
objects, as discovered by Horn and May
SVL
300
200
<
100 -
SVL
FIG. 3. Size-gradation in the species studied (mean
dimensions divided by corresponding figures for the
smallest species in die assemblage, Microhyla
ornata. 3.1. Snout-vent length (SVL); 3.2. Head
width (HW): 3.3 Weight (Wt).
(1977) may be associated with human
perceptional abilities derived from the
natural world.
The constancy of Hutchinsonian ratios
has been shown for a large number of
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 43
invertebrate and vertebrate groups (reviewed
by Schoener, 1984; 1986a), which is
suspected to be indicative of interspecific
competition. To complicate matters further,
ratios have been shown to be size-
dependent, a function of allometry, and may
thus change with growth (Roth, 1981).
These are also thought to vary
geographically, assemblages in the tropics
show smaller ratios than temperate ones
(Klopfer and Mac Arthur, 1961), suggestive
of greater niche overlap in tropical
assemblages. In the present study, HW,
considered a measure of the trophic
apparatus of frogs, showed negative
ontogenetic allometry, the slopes b of the
regressions of SVL and HW (on log paper)
scaling allometrically in all eight anuran
species that comprise the assemblage under
investigation, indicating differences in the
relative size and shape of the trophic
apparatus among the different size-classes
and sexes within a species may be
influenced by food size.
Acknowledgments
The staff of Madras Crocodile Bank
Trust helped with field work, and provided
laboratory space. In particular, I would like
to thank Romulus Whitaker, Harry Andrew,
Romaine Andrews, Manjula Tiwari and
Aurofilio Schiavina. My research on the
ecology of frogs in South India was
supported by Inlaks Foundation, Madras
Crocodile Bank Trust, Trinity College,
Oxford and an Overseas Research Student
(ORS) Award. I thank R. Avery, M. Coe,
and C. Perrins for comments.
Literature Cited
AUFFENBERG, W. AND T. AUFFENBERG. 1987.
Resource partitioning in a community of Philippine
skinks. Florida State Museum Bulletin 32:151-
219.
DARWIN, C. 1859. On the origins of species by
means of natural selection. Murray, London.
DUELLMAN, W. E. 1978. The biology of an
equatorial herpetofauna in Amazonian Ecuador.
Miscellaneous Publications of the Museum of
Natural History, University of Kansas 65: 1-352.
GANS, C. 1988. Adaptation and the form-function
relation. American Zoologist 28:681-697.
HORN, H. S. AND R. M. MAY. 1977. Limits to
similarity among coexisting species. Nature
270:660-661.
HUTCHINSON, G. E. 1959. Homage to Santa
Rosalia, or why are there so many kinds of animals?
American Naturalist 93:145-159.
KLOPFER, P. H. AND R. H. MACARTHUR. 1961.
On the causes of tropical species diversity: Niche
overlap. American Naturalist 95:223-226.
LOSOS, J. B., S. NAEEM AND R. K. COLWELL.
1989. Hutchinsonian ratios and statistical power.
Evolution 43:1820-1826.
MCALPINE, D. F. AND T. G. DILWORTH. 1989.
Microhabitat and prey size among three species of
Rana (Anura: Ranidae) sympatric in eastern Canada.
Canadian Journal of Zoology 67:2244-2252.
MAIORANA, V. C. 1978. An explanation of
ecological and developmental constants. Nature
273:375-377.
PETERS, R. H. 1983. The ecological implications
of body size. Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge.
PHILLIPSON, J. 1981. Bioenergenetic options and
phylogeny. Pp. 20-45. In C.R. Townsend & P.
Calow (Eds). Physiological ecology: An
evolutionary approach to resource use. Blackwell
Scientific Publishers, Oxford.
ROTH, V. L. 1981. Constancy in the size ratios of
sympatric species. American Zoologist 118:394-
404.
SCHOENER, T. W. 1965. The evolution of bill
size differences among sympatric congeneric species
of birds. Evolution 19:189-213.
SCHOENER, T. W. 1974. Resource partitioning in
ecological communities. Science 185:27-39.
SCHOENER, T. W. 1986a. Kinds of ecological
communities- Ecology becomes pluralisitic. Pp.
467-479. In J. Diamond & T.J. Case (Eds).
Community ecology. Harper & Row, Publishers,
New York.
SCHOENER, T. W. 1986b. Resource partitioning.
Pp. 91-126. In J. Kikkawa & D.J. Anderson (Eds).
Vol. 6, p. 44 Asiatic Herpetological Research June 1995
Community ecology: Patterns and processes.
Blackwell Scientific Publications, Melbourne.
SIMBERLOFF, D. AND W. BOECKLEN. 1981.
Santa Rosalia reconsidered. Evolution 35:1206-
1228.
STRONG, D. R., L. A. SZYSKA, AND D. S.
SIMBERLOFF. 1979. Tests of community-wide
character displacement against null hypothesis.
Evolution 33:897-913.
TOFT, C.A. 1980. Feeding ecology of thirteen
syntopic species of anurans. Oecologiia 45:131-
141.
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetolo^ical Research
Vol. 6, pp. WW
Observations on Arboreality in a Philippine Blind Snake
MAREN Gaulke
Muhliusstrasse 84, 24103 Kiel 1, Germany
Abstract. -Five blind snakes were observed in June 1990 in the rain forests of Sibutu Island in the Sulu
Archipelago, Philippines. Contrary to the usually fossorial habits of typhlopids, Ramphotyphlops suluensis
(Taylor, 1918) shows arboreal habits. It climbed through trees at night using the prehensile tail and
hindbody. When caught they extruded a strong smelling liquid from their cloaca. Relatively long tails are
found in some other rain forest dwelling typhlopids, which may also have arboreal habits.
Key words: Reptilia, Ophidia, Typhlopidae, Ramphotyphlops suluensis, Philippines, ecology.
and the relative humidity between 70 and
Introduction 95%.
Little is known of the behavior of blind
snakes (Typhlopidae). Information is
normally generalized and consists of little
more than that typhlopids are small,
burrowing snakes, which live in decaying
logs, humus and leaf litter, and feed mainly
on ants and termites, especially their grubs,
pupae and eggs (e. g. Taylor, 1922;
Loveridge, 1946; Gruber, 1980).
This gap in observations is certainly due
to a number of different factors. Typhlopids
are very inconspicuous and rather dull
looking, and as such, arouse the interest of
few people, even among herpetologists.
About 168 species are known (Hahn,
1980). Many are found infrequently, and
often are known from one or a few
specimens only. Due to their size,
coloration, and secretive habits, they are
hard to observe. However, observations
reported here on a rain forest dwelling blind
snake in the Philippines, indicate that at least
not all of them are as secretive as generally
assumed.
Methods
In June 1990 a three week field survey
was conducted on Sibutu, a small island in
the Sulu-Archipelago, a few miles off the
northeast coast of Sabah, Borneo (04°
46.4'N, 119° 28.8'E). Observations and
collections of amphibians and reptiles were
made within a forested area (primary and
secondary lowland forest of the molave type
sensu Dickerson, 1928). Short, but heavy,
rains fell every two to three days, the
temperature ranged between 25 and 32°C,
The nomenclatural history and taxonomy
of the typhlopids observed and caught on
Sibutu is discussed in Gaulke (in press),
where the species, previously synonymized
with Ramphotyphlops olivaceus (Gray,
1845), is revalidated. Ramphotyphlops
suluensis reaches a length of approximately
40 cm, the eyes are distinctive, and the tail is
more than twice as long as broad. The
dorsal side is gray, the ventral side is cream,
with bright white scales along the median
row.
Observations
Although a considerable amount of time
was spent turning and splitting decaying
logs, and digging in humus and leaf litter in
search of blind snakes, all efforts were
unsuccessful. However, a few days before
I had to leave Sibutu Island, the luck turned.
While looking for geckos with a flashlight
between 2200 and 0200 hours, the first
blind snake was observed, not on the
ground as expected, but on a tree on an
almost leafless twig approximately 3 m
above the ground. While trying to reach it,
the disturbed animal let itself drop to the
ground, and vanished into the leaf litter.
During the following three nights, four more
specimens were observed, all on branches
and twigs above my head. Being more
careful now, it was quite easy to catch them.
All four reacted to the capture with the
excretion of a pungent musk from their
cloaca, the stench of which adhered to the
skin for some time.
Before capture, the mode of locomotion
of the climbing blind snakes was observed
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 46
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG. 1. Ramphotyphlops suluensis climbing in an avocado tree.
FIG. 2. Ramphotyphlops suluensis making searching movements with its stiffened forepart while climbing.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 47
for some time. While the tail and hindbody
is tightly coiled around a twig, they crawl
forward with the free part of their body.
Depending on the thickness of the twig, they
may use protrusions as resistance and hold,
or make serpentine movements, with parts
of their body hanging loosely down on both
sides of the twig. After the forepart is
secured, the tail/body grip is released and
then dragged forward, and anchored further
along. Compared to typical arboreal snakes,
like whip snakes or flying snakes, they
move very slowly, but are nevertheless
skilled and effective climbers. During their
movements, they stop relatively often and
demonstrate a conspicuous behavior. While
the hind part is coiled in the tree, the
stiffened forepart is stretched into the air,
making slow circular movements. When
they discover another twig or branch within
their reach with this searching movements,
they might climb over to it. All the while
they are tongue flicking. (Fig. 1, 2).
Two of the snakes captured were
preserved and transferred to the
Forschungsinstitut und Naturmuseum
Senckenberg (SMF 74247/8). The stomach
of the larger snake (total length 357 mm,
weight 11.5 g) contained part of an
unidentified earthworm, with a surprisingly
large girth in relation to the tiny mouth of the
snake. The two other specimens were kept
alive for further observation. They are
strictly nocturnal. Larvae of the moth,
Galleria mellonella, were offered as food,
but they were never observed feeding.
Nonetheless, their good condition after
several months in captivity indicated some
food uptake. For video records they were
placed on a small avocado tree during
daytime. Here the same movements could
be observed and recorded, as described
above. When released in the middle of the
avocado stem, they more often climbed up
than down, searching for a resting place
within the branches. However, sometimes
they climbed down and started to burrow
into the soil of the flower pot, proving that
they are as effective in digging as in
climbing.
Discussion
Characteristic features of typhlopid
snakes are: a cylindrical body, smooth
small scales throughout the entire body, a
small narrow head with a solid cranium, a
short broad tail ending in a sharp spine, and
reduced eyes covered by much larger scales.
These adaptations for fossorial life are in
almost complete contrast to the
characteristics of typical arboreal snakes,
such as a laterally compressed or triangular
body, a thin prehensile tail, and medium
sized to large eyes. However, as shown by
R. suluensis, it can be erroneous to interpret
the mode of living from the habitus alone.
Only the relatively longer tail compared to
other typhlopids (in most typhlopids the tail
is about as long as wide) might be
interpreted as an adaptation towards
arboreality.
The question remains, why are they
climbing in trees, as the disadvantage is
obvious. They are more exposed to
predation from nocturnal animals, such as
owls or cat snakes, than their relatives
which only seldomly leave their burrows.
Few blind snakes were observed climbing
on trees before. A Ramphotyphlops
nigrescens was found 5 m above the ground
in a tree (Shine and Webb, 1990),
arboreality is discussed for R. braminus
(Swanson, 1981), and it is reported for
some Leptotyphlopidae (Vanzolini, 1970).
Shine and Webb (1990) discuss arboreality
in scolecophidians as a feeding strategy.
They assume that there may be little
difference for them to follow ant-trails
underground or on trees. However, the
observations on R. suluensis indicate that
this species is not incidentally climbing up
trees, but might be more or less specialized
on an arboreal life. All specimens on Sibutu
were found climbing, and none on the
ground. It can be assumed that R. suluensis
is not the only blind snake specialized on
arboreality. Taylor (1922) collected several
Philippine typhlopids in the root balls of
aerial ferns, on felled trees. He concluded
that they are living and hunting within these
root balls. I assume it is much more likely
that they are using epiphytes, etc., only as
daytime retreats, actively searching for food
Vol. 6, p. 48
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
in the twigs and branches of the tree during
night time. Those blind snakes found in
epiphytes have unusually long tails for
typhlopids, being four to seven times as
long as broad. In view of the skilled way
R. suluensis uses its much shorter tail for
climbing, they should be even better
equipped for an arboreal live.
The function of the cloacal sac
substance, which R. suluensis used as a
defense mechanism against capture, was
investigated in the leptotyphlopid
Leptotyphylops dulcis. Gehlbach et al.
(1968) found that it repelled attacking army
ants, upon which these snakes feed.
Furthermore the substance was found to
repel sympatric ophiophagous and
insectivorous snakes, a much more serious
danger to the blind snakes. On the other
hand, L. dulcis are attracted to their own
colacal sac substance (Watkins et al., 1969),
so it has different functions, as interspecific
repellent, and as intraspecific attraction. It
can be assumed that it has similar complex
functions in R. suluensis.
Acknowledgments
The field study was supported by the
Senckenbergische Naturforschende
Gesellschaft, Frankfurt a. Main. Video
records were done in cooperation with Dr.
A. Altenbach, Kiel University. I thank Dr.
W. R. Branch, Port Elizabeth, for reviewing
the manuscript.
Literature Cited
GEHLBACH, F. R., J. F. WATKINS, AND H. W.
RENO. 1968. Blind snake defensive behavior
elicited by ant attacks. Bioscience 18:784-785.
G RUBER, U. 1980. Blindschlangen,
Wiihlschlangen und Warzenschlangen. Pp. 362-366
In B. Grzimek (Ed), Grzimeks Tierleben. Band 6.
Kriechtiere. Deutscher Taschenbuch Verlag,
Miinchen.
HAHN, D. E. 1980. Liste der rezenten Amphibien
und Reptilien. Anomalepidae, Leptotyphlopidae,
Typhlopidae. Das Tierreich 101:1-93. Walter de
Gruyter, Berlin.
LOVERIDGE, A. 1946. Reptiles of the Pacific
world. Macmillan Co., New York. 259 pp.
SHINE, R., AND J. K. WEBB. 1990. Natural
history of Australian typhlopid snakes. Journal of
Herpetology 24(4):357-363.
SWANSON, S. 1981. Typhlina bramina, an
arboreal blind snake? Northern Territory Naturalist,
Darwin, N.T. 4:13.
TAYLOR, E. H. 1922. The snakes of the
Philippine Islands. Philippine Bureau of Science,
Manila. 312 pp.
VANZOLINI, P. E. 1970. Climbing habits of
Leptotyphlopidae (Serpentes) and Wall's theory of
the evolution of the ophidian eye. Pap. Avul. Zool.
23:13-16.
WATKINS, J. F., F. R. GEHLBACH, AND J. C.
KROLL. 1969. Attractant-repellent secretions of
blind snakes (Leptotyphlops dulcis) and their army
ant pray (Neivamyrmex niggrescens). Ecology
50(6): 1098-1 102.
DICKERSON, R. S. 1928. Distribution of life in
the Philippines. Philippine Bureau of Science,
Manila, Monograph 21:1-322 pp.
GAULKE, M. (in press). Die Herpetofauna von
Sibutu Island (Philippinen), unter Beriicksichtigung
zoogeographischer und okologischer Aspekte.
Senckenbergiana biologica
|Junc 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 49-52
On the Distribution of Emydid Turtles and the Anuran Genus Microhyla in
the Philippines
Maren Gaulke
Muhliusstr. 84, 24103 Kiel, Germany
Abstract. -Cuora amboinensis kamaroma Rummler and Fritz and Microhyla annectens Boulenger are
reported from the Sulu Archipelago in the southwestern Philippines. The Philippines range of Cyclemys
dentata (Gray) is extended to the Sulu Archipelago. The distribution of emydids and the genus Microhyla in
the Philippines is discussed.
Key Words: Reptilia, Testudines, Emydidae, Cuora amboinensis amboinensis, Cuora amboinensis
kamaroma, Cyclemys dentata, Amphibia, Anura, Microhylidae, Microhyla annectens, Philippines,
distribution.
120°E
*
&
MINDANAO
Jolo
^
^
6°N
O
<b
a
<?Osiasi
o ^Bubuan
awitawi
V
Sa*ga ^ A* <DL
Sanga^PV
uBongao
f" Sibutuft ^
' Sitanki D)) ^
<L
^
*
FIG. 1 Generalized map of the Sulu Archipelago.
Introduction
The Philippines are separated into
different faunistic regions (Brown and
Alcala, 1970, 1980; Dickerson, 1928; Inger,
1954; Leviton, 1963). The Sulu
Archipelago, an island chain situated
between Basilan and Mindanao to the east,
and Sabah, Borneo, to the west, is one of
these regions. Faunistically it is more
closely related to Borneo than to the
Philippines. The only comprehensive work
on the herpetofauna of the Sulu Archipelago
is from Taylor (1918). Additions to it's
herpetofaunal record include for example
Gaulke (1993, 1994), Leviton (1963) and
Taylor (1922a, 1922b). Almost nothing is
known of the emydid turtles of the region,
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 50
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
and knowledge on the anurans is also
scarce. This work contributes to both of
these subjects, and discusses the distribution
of taxa in the groups in other parts of the
Philippines.
Material and Methods
The author has conducted field surveys
in different regions of the Philippines since
1984. In the years 1990, 1991 and 1992 the
following islands of the Sulu Archipelago
were visited: Bongao, Sanga Sanga, Siasi,
Sibutu, Tawitawi and Jolo (Fig. 1). Most
of the turtles found were photographed and
released after examination.
Three turtles (one Cuora amboinensis
kamaroma, two Cyclemys dentata) are kept
alive by the author, the microhylid frog
(SMF 74908) and one C. dentata shell
(SMF 74909) are deposited in the
herpetological collection of the
Forschungsinstitut und Naturmusem
Senckenberg, Frankfurt am Main,
Germany. The C. amboinensis subspecies
were identified after Rummler and Fritze
(1991), and the frog after Inger (1966).
Results and Discussion
Emydidae
Cyclemys dentata.- On June 9, 1990, an
adult specimen of C. dentata was caught in
an undisturbed swampy lowland forest at
Languyan on Tawitawi. It's faeces showed
that it had fed on ripe figs before capture.
In 1991 and 1992 several, mainly
juvenile, specimens of C. dentata were
found in swamps and small creeks in
different areas of Tawitawi (Batu Batu,
Magsaggaw), proving that it is not a rare
turtle on the island. It has not yet been
found on any other island of the Sulu
Archipelago.
Previously the known range of C .
dentata in the Philippines included only the
Palawan Province (Balabac, Palawan,
Calamian Islands) and Leyte (Alcala 1986;
Taylor 1921). While it is common
throughout the Palawan Province, records
from Leyte are rare. Palawan and Leyte
belong to different faunistic regions, and
were never connected by a land bridge.
Therefore it is surprising that C. dentata is
known from both regions, but from
nowhere in between. Three explanations
can be offered for this disjunct distribution:
1. C. dentata exists on other Philippine
Islands, but has not been recorded (or
reported) until now. 2. C. dentata
previously occurred on other Philippine
islands, but became extinct subsequently on
most of them, with a relict population
surviving on Leyte. 3. C. dentata never
reached the more eastern Islands of the
Philippines, and the Leyte records rely on
specimens introduced by man. This is not
unlikely, since people often keep turtles as
pets and for medicinal purposes (as rheuma
remedy) leading to their translocation. C.
dentata kept in captivity on Negros and
Cebu were obtained on Palawan (pers.
obs.).
The disjunct Philippine distribution of
C. dentata is remarkably echoed by the third
emydid turtle from the Philippines, the
endemic Heosemys leytensis (Taylor) which
is also reported from Leyte and Palawan,
but no in between island. Since both
distribution records of this rare turtle rely on
single individuals (Timmermann and Auth
1988; Taylor 1921), no assumptions on the
reasons for the disjunct distributions can be
made.
The Sulu Archipelago and Palawan lie in
both Philippine entryways from Borneo,
suggesting that the C. dentata populations
have their origin on Borneo, where this
turtle is widespread.
Cuora amboinensis.- In 1990 the author
found Cuora amboinensis on the islands of
Sanga Sanga and Tawitawi, and in 1992 on
Jolo. During this period C. amboinensis
was reported from Jolo (Rummler and Fritz
1991), who identified two specimens from
Jolo (MNHN 6152:1-2, Musium Nationale
d'Histoire Naturelle Paris) as C. a.
amboinensis, as they did all Philippine
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 51
FIG. 2. Plastral view of three Cuora amboinensis
from Jolo, showing that almost no dark markings
are present on the plastron, as is typical for the
subspecies C. a. kamaroma Rummler and Fritz.
material they studied. However, the
specimens found during my trips on Sanga
Sanga, Tawitawi and Jolo do not belong to
the nominate form, but to the recently
described C. a. kamaroma Rummler and
Fritz. They have none, or very few, dark
patches on their plastron (Fig. 2) and a high
carapace, as is typical for this subspecies.
U. Fritz, who kindly examined photos of
some of the turtles captured on Jolo,
mentioned that they are slightly flatter than
other C. a. kamaroma he had seen, and the
marginal scutes were slightly more visible
from above. Nevertheless he confirms the
determination as C. a. kamaroma, assuming
that some interbreeding with Philippine C.
a. amboinensis may have occurred.
C. a. kamaroma, the most widespread of
the three subspecies of C. amboinensis, is
known from Borneo, the Southeast Asian
mainland, and now the Sulu Archipelago.
C. a. amboinensis has a wide distribution
over the Philippines, being reported from
Bacoo, Cebu, Dinagat, Leyte, Luzon,
Mindanao, Mindoro, Negros, Polillo and
Samar (Boettger 1886; Rummler and Fritz
1991; Taylor 1921), but occurs on other
Philippine Islands as well. The author, for
example, has collected a few specimens on
Masbate (currently being kept alive).
Outside the Philippines, C. a. amboinensis
is known from Sulawesi and the Moluccas.
The Palawan Province is presently the only
known Philippine Province not inhabited by
any subspecies of C. amboinensis.
Rummler and Fritz (1991) consider the
high domed C. a. kamaroma and the flat C.
a. amboinensis as the evolutionary extremes
of C. amboinensis, whilst the third
subspecies C. a. couro (Schweigger), which
occurs on Sumatra and Java, shows
intermediate characteristics. They believe it
possible that in the future high domed and
flat forms of C. amboinensis may be found
sympatric on Borneo, proving that they
belong to different species. The record of
C. a. kamaroma from the Sulu Archipelago
shows that the Bornean form could reach the
outskirts of the Philippines, but does not
resolve the question of their phylogenetic
affinities. It is surprising that within the
Philippines two significantly different forms
are found. C. a. amboinensis must either
have developed from C. a. kamaroma, or
reached the Philippines, via Mindanao, from
the Moluccas or Sulawesi.
Microhylidae
On March 18, 1991, the author collected
one specimen of Microhyla annectens
Boulenger (SMF 74908) in leaf litter beside
a small pond in a lowland forest at
Magsaggaw, Tawitawi. The species has a
wide distribution on Borneo, Malaysia and
Thailand, but was previously unknown
from the Philippines.
Only one other member of the genus
Microhyla has been recorded from the
Philippines. Fischer (1885) reported
Microhyla achatina (Boie) from Southern
Mindanao, based on a single specimen.
Boettger (1886) listed this frog, but
mentioned that the specimen, according to a
comment by G. A. Boulenger, most
probably is not M. achatina but a Kaloula
species. Taylor (1921) listed M. achatina
without questioning the determination.
However, he doubted the accuracy of the
locality record, assuming that it might have
come from another country. He also
assumed that it might be from one of the
high, little explored mountains on Southern
Mindanao and therefore had not
subsequently been found. Inger (1954) and
Alcala (1986) finally do not include M .
Vol. 6, p. 52
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
achatina in the Philippine amphibian fauna
anymore.
Whether the record of M. achatina from
the Philippines is true or not (the specimen
is no longer available) must remain open,
however, the new record shows that the
genus Microhyla has reached the
Philippines.
Acknowledgments
I am grateful to Mr. R. Miller and Mr.
Th. Borromeo, who were helpful in finding
turtles on the Sulu Archipelago, and to the
Provincial Department of Environment and
Natural Resources in Bongao for allowing
me to conduct surveys in their area, and to
collect a few specimens. Dr. W. Branch
kindly revised the manuscript, giving many
helpful comments.
Literature Cited
ALCALA, A. C. 1986. Guide to Philippine flora
and fauna. Vol. X. Amphibians and reptiles. JMC
Press, Quezon City. 195 pp.
BOETTGER, O. 1886. Aufzahlung der von den
Philippincn bekannten Reptilien und Batrachier.
Senckenbergische Naturforschende Gesellschaft
1886:91-134.
BROWN, W. C, AND A. C. ALCALA. 1970. The
zoogeography of the herpetofauna of the Philippine
Islands, a fringing archipelago. Proceedings of the
Californian Academy of Science, fourth series
38(6): 105-130.
BROWN, W. C, AND A. C. ALCALA. 1980.
Philippine lizards of the family Scincidae. Silliman
University Press, Dumaguete City. 264 pp.
DICKERSON, R. S. 1928. Distribution of life in
the Philippines. Philippine Bureau of Science
Monograph 21:1-322.
FISCHER, J. G. 1885. A list of reptiles and
batrachians of Mindanao. Jahrbuch der
WissenschafUichen Anstalt Hamburg 1885(2):80-81.
GAULKE, M. 1993. First record of the polydont
snake Sibynophis geminatus geminatus (Boie,
1826) from the Philippines, with a discussion of
Sibynophis bivittatus (Boulenger, 1894).
Herpetological Journal (3): 151-152.
GAULKE, M. 1994. Contribution to the snake
fauna of the Sulu Archipelago, with the description
of a new subspecies of Dendrelaphis caudolineatus
(Gray, 1834). Herpetological Journal.
INGER, R. F. 1954. Systematic and zoogeography
of Philippine amphibia. Fieldiana: Zoology
33(4):183-531.
INGER, R. F. 1966. The systematics and
zoogeography of the amphibia of Borneo. Fieldiana:
Zoology 52(1966): 1-402.
LEVITON, A. E. 1963. Remarks on the
zoogeography of Philippine terrestrial snakes.
Proceedings of the Californian Academy of Science,
fourth series 31(15):369-416.
RUMMLER, H.-J., AND U. FRITZ. 1991.
Geographische Variabilitat der Amboina-
Scharnierschildkrotc Cuora amboinensis (Daudin,
1802), mit Beschreibung einer neuen Unterart, C. a.
kamaroma subsp. nov. Salamandra 27(1/2): 17-45.
TAYLOR, E. H. 1918. Reptiles of Sulu
Archipelago. Philippine Journal of Science
13(5):233-269.
TAYLOR, E. H. 1921. Amphibians and turtles of
the Philippine Islands. Philippine Bureau of
Science Monograph 15-1-193.
TAYLOR, E. H. 1922a. Additions to the
herpetological fauna of the Philippine Islands, 2.
Philippine Journal of Science 21(2): 161-206.
TAYLOR, E H. 1922b. Additions to the
herpetological fauna of the Philippine Islands, 3.
Philippine Journal of Science 22(5):5 15-557.
TIMMERMANN, W. W. AND D. L. AUTH. 1988.
Geographic distribution. Heosemys leytensis.
Herpetological Review 19(1):21.
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 53-61
Ecology and Conservation of Onychodactylus fischeri (Caudata, Hynobiidae)
in the Russian Far East
Paul C. Griffin1 And Vasili A. Solkin2
1 Department of Forestry and Natural Resource Management, University of California at Berkeley, Berkeley,
California, 94720, USA
^Pacific Institute of Geography, Far East Branch of Russian Academy of Sciences, Vladivostok, 690032,
Russia
Abstract. -Onychodactylus fischeri (Boulenger, 1886) is a lungless salamander with a larval development
time of over four years and lifespan that may extend over 18 years. O. fischeri develops and spawns only in
cold torrential brooks. In the Russian Primorski Krai of the Russian Far East O. fischeri lives in undisturbed
Ussuriland montane taiga forest. Adults migrate annually to breed. In homing experiments adults which were
ready for breeding migrated over 800m of land to breeding sites. Homing experiments showed that sexually
mature adults may demonstrate stream fidelity. Males were more frequently encountered at surface waters than
females. There are seasonal peaks to breeding-adult activity. High-impact forest harvesting is now typical in
headwater forests and river valleys across the range of 0. fischeri, causing disturbance and siltation in
spawning brooks and surrounding forest habitat. Pinus koreansis trees comprised a dominant component of
the forest canopy in spawning drainages.
Key Words: Amphibia, Caudata, Hynobiidae, Onychodactylus fischeri, Russian Far East, Ussuri taiga,
conservation, ecology.
Introduction
This study set out to discover aspects of
Onychodactylus fischeri biology by
collecting standardized morphological and
color pattern data during the course of adult
and juvenile mark-recapture surveys, by
documenting microhabitat location, by
determining ages of adults and larvae, by
moving marked sets of salamanders and
recording their return to home brooks, and
by continuing early attempts at inducing
captive breeding, and to assess movement of
individuals between spawning streams.
Ussuri taiga has been heavily harvested
from plains and river valleys in this century
to the point that headwaters comprise some
of the least disturbed examples of this forest
type. High-impact, wasteful forest
harvesting is now occurring in the
elevational range of O. fischeri range in an
inefficient manner, causing catastrophic
disturbance and siltation to its spawning
brooks and surrounding forest habitat. O.
fischeri is an endangered species in the Red
Data Book of the USSR but is afforded no
protection under current Russian
environmental law.
FIG. 1. Map of Asia and the Russian Far East
showing study location in boxed area.
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 54
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG. 2. Dorsal Color Patterns of 0. fisc fieri.. Percent frequencies out of 351 salamanders in "Chinese"
brook were: A, 1%; B and B2, 36.4%; C, 46.7%;D, 5%; F, 4.8%; L, 0.3%
Methods and Materials
Our studies were within the range of
Onychodactylus fischeri in the Sixote-Alin
Mountain Range of the Primorskii Krai,
Russia. These mountains are forested by
Usuriland taiga. We conducted our surveys
and experiments at elevations between 500
m and 1000 m., at a site 10 km west of the
Pacific Ocean in headwater brooks of the
Mysovka River (Lat. 135°, Long. 41°).
This river flows into the Tinfura River, a
tributary of the Ol'ga Bay (Fig. 1). Climate
is typical of the maritime Russian Far East,
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 55
with humid summer days averaging 25° C in
July and cold winters down to -30° C. The
summer monsoon and winter snows provide
approximately 120 cm
precipitation (Fullard, 1972).
of annual
We surveyed the brook tributaries at the
headwaters of the upper Mysovka watershed
and gave them the following arbitrary
names: "Chinese," "Zapovednik," "Mutnii,"
"Himalayan," "Burned," and "Tetkin." We
characterized the forest canopy cover in the
entire study site in terms of dominant tree
species and also inventoried subdominant
trees of the forest canopy in "Chinese"
drainage. In 1993 we noted changes in soil
and forest structure that resulted from forest
harvest activity taking place in the Mysovka
watershed.
To estimate the sex ratio and age structure in
a breeding population we marked and
recorded data from all individuals
encountered in a one kilometer stream
transect of "Chinese" brook, divided into 20
sections, during measurements from 1990 to
1993. Between one and three people with
headlamps walked the transect once every
night for a two to three hour observation
period in June 1990, May and June 1991,
September 7-14, 1991, and June 3-13 1993.
We began each transect at a downstream
gauging station where we measured relative
humidity, brook depth and temperature.
Each individual yielded data for the
following categories: sex, maturity class,
biotope, transect section, fat condition, skin
pattern, tail wounds, and morphometric
lengths for snout-vent, tail, head length and
head width. We distinguished adult sex and
reproductive stage by the secondary sexual
characters discussed in Serbinova and
Solkin (1992). We assigned salamanders
unique identification numbers by toe-
clipping, and reclipped regenerating toes
only when we were sure of the original
mark. We designated the color pattern for
individuals according to our categorization
of light-colored spot placement on the neck,
back and tail (Fig. 2). To determine exact
ages for some individual salamanders we
sent a random subset of 118 clipped adult
and larval toe bones to Moscow for
FIG. 3. Timber harvest operations in the Mysovka
floodplain downstream from the study site.
skeletochronological analysis (Smirina,
1972).
To examine stream fidelity we released
20 breeding adults from "Zapovednik"
brook into "Chinese" brook in 1991. We
released 100 salamanders with a range of
secondary sexual characters from
"Zapovednik" brook into "Burned" brook.
In 1992 we released 31 breeding males, 43
breeding females, and 52 non-breeding
adults from "Chinese" brook into
"Zapovednik" brook. We searched for
marked individuals in "Zapovednik" and
"Burned" brooks on nights when we were
not surveying the "Chinese" brook transect.
In 1993 we collected three males and
females that were ready for breeding from
"Chinese" brook. We injected synthetic
leutenizing and releasing hormone into them
to induce courtship, egg-laying and
fertilization. Their aquaria were plastic,
with rocks, moss, and 3 to 5 cm of standing
water. Air and water temperature in the
aquaria were dependent on ambient stream
temperature.
Results
Onychodactylus fischeri spawn in "Mutnii",
"Zapovednik", "Himalayan", and "Chinese"
brooks. "Chinese" brook flows over a
substrate of 1.5 meter deep rock cobble
which is covered by moss and shallow
rooted plant growth. "Zapovednik" brook
has much less rock cobble, with smooth
Vol. 6, p. 56
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
45
40
35
30 -|
| 25
d 20
15
10
5
Number of individuals caught
>>
■%
E
3
X
u
OS
0
100
95
90
85 -
80 -
75
70
65
60
55
Oi
I T ? ' T
a
40
50
60
70
80
Daily Relative
0
> ■ i
10
-r'r-i — t—
20
12
1 1 - Daily Water Temperature
10 -
a. 9-
E 8
t 7-
S 6-
£ 5-
4 -
3
30 40 50
count day
60
i — i — i — i — i — i — |
70 80
0 10
May
20
30
i— I — i— i— r— i— I—
40 50
60
<— r-
70
80
June
September
FIG. 4. Daily number of salamanders captured, relative humidity and stream temperature in "Chinese" brook
during May, June and September 1991.
bedrock as the substrate for some sections.
In the study area predaceous fish only
occurred in "Burned" and "Tetkin"
drainages, which were both affected by a
forest canopy-removing wildfire 40 years
ago and by ensuing landslides.
Pinus koreansis accounts for a
significant portion of the dominant canopy
cover in the brook drainages where O.
fischeri does occur. Dominant forest trees
in the drainage of "Chinese" brook reflects a
strong slope effect; Manchurian oak
(Quercus mongolica ) and P. koreansis
dominate the southeast-facing slope while P.
koreansis, fir {Abies sp.), birches (Betula
spp.), maples (Acer spp.), elms (Ulmus
spp.), and linden (J ilia spp.) comprised
much of the canopy of the north-facing
slope.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 57
"i Individuals Caught in Water
SO ?
S 60
3 40
20
0
50 60 70 80 90 100
Rel Humiditv
"*u "1 Individuals caught ai water edge
35 -
30
25
§20
5 15
10
5
0
40 50 60 70 80 90
Rel Humidity
0 -i Individuals caught in waterfall splash zone
6 -
2 -
50 60 70 80 90 100
Rel Humiditv
60 . Individuals caught on land
50 -
S40
o 30 -
°20-
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Rel Humidity
FIG. 5. Histograms divided according to ten-
percent atmospheric relative humidity classes
showing number of salamander captures in water,
water edge, splash zone and land biotopes. Note that
few salamanders were active on land when relative
humidity was below 90%.
A six man work team from the local
forest production ministry harvested timber
downstream in 1993 with one tank- treaded
bulldozer and one rubber-tired loader
servicing a logging truck (Fig. 3). Their
road building often crossed the small river in
the floodplain. The bulldozer skidded logs
down slopes of greater than 35 degrees.
There was severe disturbance to soil
structure caused by these activities. Soils
were brown podbels with an illuvial B
horizons ending less than 50 cm below the
litter surface (Ivanov, 1976). Pinus
koreansis was being harvested from the
river plain and hills despite current
regulations outlawing harvest of that
species. Other harvested species included
Abies sp., Tilia sp. and Populus tremula.
The river channel was widened in 1992,
apparently as a subsequent outcome of
harvest activities.
We first encountered breeding adults at
spawning brooks during snowmelt in late
April and early May. Adult males captured
in surface waters outnumbered adult females
in all seasons. Breeding adult activity was
highest in May and June, when stream
temperatures were low (Serbinova and
Solkin, 1992). In September 1991 the
breeding population rose during a small
peak composed of adults aged 6 to 9 years;
at that time 1 1 out of 20 males and 5 out of 9
females exhibited secondary sexual
characters and juveniles represented 45.3 %
of all captures.
Around spawning brooks we found O.
fischeri in pools and riffles, on dry and wet
rocks in the watercourse, on rocks in the
misty zone near waterfalls, and on the
shore. Salamanders were most active at the
surface during evenings of high relative
humidity (Fig. 4). 535 captures provided
data for biotope location. We found
salamanders most often in the water (54.0 %
of total) and on the stream bank (16.4 % of
total). On nights of low relative humidity
salamanders were often located on rocks in
the misty splash zone near waterfalls (6.0 %
of total). On land salamanders were most
often within 50 cm of the water (11.3 % of
total). Salamanders were rarely active on
land if relative humidity was lower than 90
percent (Fig. 5). Juveniles were active on
land markedly less than adults. In the brook
channel we uncovered 1 gravid female when
we dismantled a 0.5 cubic meter rock matrix
where brook water seeped through moss-
covered rocks. We occasionally observed
O. fischeri on land between streams and on
ridges during times of rainfall and high
relative humidity.
We found abundant larvae in surface
waters during nocturnal transect surveys.
Larvae were also active diurnally. During
two one-hour periods in June 1993 we
observed Onychodactylus fischeri larvae
Vol. 6, p. 58
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
95% Confidence Bands for Tail to Snout-vent Allometry
Males
Females
50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
Lsv
FIG. 6. Allometric relationship showing relatively
longer tail size (L cd) in adult males at given snout-
vent length (L sv). The difference in the slopes is
significant (ANCOVA; F = 18.21; df = 1; p <
0.0001).
hunting on flat rocks under 3 cm of water in
the late afternoon. By means of their limbs
the larvae locomoted to approach aquatic
Gammarid casings and lunged when the
invertebrates exposed their legs and head. It
appeared that larvae used their forelimbs in
conjunction with a gape-and-suck feeding
technique to apprehend the prey.
The number of transect captures was an
index of active adult population size,
generally decreasing over the course of the
summer except for a small increase in early
fall. Analysis of our mark-recapture data by
the Jolly-Seber stochastic method (Donnely
and Guyer, 1994) yielded standard errors
too large for individual population estimates
of males, females, and juveniles.
Males had significantly longer tails than
did females once the effect of snout to vent
length was accounted for (ANCOVA; F =
8.99; df = 1; P - 0.003). Also, tail length
increased more rapidly with body size in
males than in females (ANCOVA; F =
18.21; df = 1; p < 0.0001) (Fig. 6). We
observed tail wounds on 23 out of 350
males and 19 out of 166 females. It
appeared that females in "Chinese" brook
had a thinner fat layer than females in
"Mutnii" brook, where the brook substrate
includes more bedrock. According to our
10
! 6-
u
4 -
Distribution of Captured Male Age. 1993
jfh.
!5 5 7.5 It)
15 17 5 20
6 -
i -
Distribution of Captured Female Age. 1991
xp.
, m, , n,
0 2.5 5 7 5 10 12 5 15 17 5 20 22.5
Age
FIG. 7. Histogram showing relative abundance of
ages in a subset of captured males and females.
designation of color pattern 351 individuals
in "Chinese" brook, the dominant patterns
of bright flecking on grey to brown
backgrounds were C (46.7 % of total) and B
(36.4% of total).
Our data on age and development times
support the hypothesis that Onychodactylus
fischeri is a slow developing, long-lived
salamander. Cross sections of larval bones
indicate that larvae may develop up to four
years before metamorphosis to terrestrial
juveniles. The mean age of breeding males
in 1991 was 8.65 years (Std Dev. 2.87);
mean breeding female age was 8.75 years
(Std. Dev. 2.34) . Maximum ages were at
least 16 years for males, and 18 years for
females (Fig. 7). Ages approximated by
counting winter rings may underestimate
true age because of endosteal resorption
(Leclair 1990).
In 1991 at "Zapovednik" brook we
recaptured one of the 20 salamanders that
we had taken from there for release into
"Chinese" brook; we recaptured none of
these in "Chinese" brook. In 1991 we
recaptured none of the 100 salamanders
which we had released into "Burned" brook
from "Zapovednik" brook. We also
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 59
FIG. 8. Onychodactylus fischeri female lays eggs
in two gelatinous sacs.
recaptured none of these in their original
stream. In 1992 at "Chinese" brook we
recaptured 8 of 31 breeding males, 15 of 43
breeding females and none of the 52 non-
breeding adults out of the total 126
salamanders which we moved in 1991 from
"Chinese" brook to "Zapovednik" brook.
The breeding adults which we caught had
returned within a month to "Chinese" brook
over 1 km of land or by a longer route along
the Mysovka river.
Hormone injection in captives
successfully induced courtship, egg-laying
(Fig. 8) and fertilization (Fig. 9). One
female produced a clutch of two egg sacs in
1993. Eggs were 6 to 8 mm in diameter,
with 5-10 eggs in each sac. We observed
deflation of female cloacal labia in the six
days after egg-laying. Egg death probably
resulted from a severe rise in pH of available
water.
Discussion
Onychodactylus fischeri is limited by the
availability of suitable torrential streams for
FIG. 9. Onychodactylus fischeri male grasps and
fertilizes egg sacs with hind limbs.
reproduction and development. The
seasonal activity pattern which we observed
in adults seems limited by water
temperatures over 10° C. The burst of
breeding activity observable in late spring
may signify the most strategic time for egg-
laying in view of the short warm season in
the Russian Far East; it is logical that eggs
laid in the late spring develop faster than
eggs laid in early fall because water
temperatures drop below 5° C in the winter.
The higher proportion of males caught in
our surveys suggests that males may wait on
the surface rocks and waters to seek
females. Egg sacs and larvae seem to be
located most often in intersticial rock habitat,
sheltered from surface predators in areas of
continuous water flow (Regel and Epshtein,
1975). Iwasawa and Kira observed that O.
japonicus eggs developed slowly for 143
days in water of 10° C (1980). Longer
winters may cause the larval stage in O.
fischeri occasionally to extend longer than
the three years observed in O. japonicus
(Hayase and Yamane 1982).
Lunglessness is a synapomorphy of
salamanders in the Onychodactylus clade,
which have a long larval period in torrential
streams as a requisite portion of their
ontology. Bruce et al. (1992) supported the
hypothesis that lunglessness in amphibians
is a larval adaptation to torrential streams by
showing that experimentally lungless
salamander larvae were displaced
Vol. 6, p. 60
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
downstream less when released in fast-
flowing water than were control larvae with
lungs.
The reproductive potential of an
individual Onychodactylus fischeri seems
low, despite their long lifespan, considering
that a female living 12 years may only
produce 140 eggs. Additionally, many of
the adults we found did not have secondary
sexual traits indicative of reproduction.
Akita (1989) notes that not all adult O.
japonicus breed every year. The low clutch
size and large egg mass suggest that each
egg is a significant reproductive investment
relative to other hynobiids. Kuzmin showed
that the sympatric hynobiid Salamandrella
keyserlingii is more general in its feeding
and breeding habitat preferences (1990).
Our 1992 experiments suggest that
successful homing was only by adults
which were ready for breeding, indicating
that adults may have a preference for
particular spawning brooks. It is also
possible that non-breeding adults may also
have returned to their original brooks and
not been recaptured, or that the breeding
adults that did not return may have spawned
in a different stream. Onychodactylus
fischeri may migrate over land through
forested corridors. We speculate that the
connectedness of suitable habitat between
large watersheds is important for dispersal
after landscape level disturbances.
The pressure to harvest trees in the
fragile taiga is promoted by an international
wood and fiber market that devalues natural
capital by not factoring in negative
externalities such as anthropogenic fire,
landslides and species loss. Repeated
highgrading is the most widespread harvest
method in the Russian Far East and has
lasting effects on forest ecology. Forested
slopes and floodplains are exposed to
catastrophic erosion for years after tractors
are used to skid out widely spaced trees.
Reduction of canopy cover to levels to
below 40% alters the evapotranspiration
regime in a way which allows catastrophic
wildfire. The hard currency that goes to the
Primorskii krai in return for the Ussuri taiga
logs does not compensate for the permanent
loss of seasonal employment in fur,
mushroom, honey, berry, ginseng, and
game meat gathering and preparation
(Schumacher, 1973). The best conservation
strategy for Onychodactylus fischeri appears
to be exclusion of high-impact timber
harvest activity from key spawning
watersheds, given that regional timber
harvesters, Hyundai and other multinational
timber interests generally ignore existing
rules of the Russian Federation's Ministry
of Forests. It would be informative to
delineate metapopulation boundaries in order
to assess the adequacy of existing preserves.
Onychodactylus fischeri is an indicator
species of high-quality old growth forest
habitat in upper slopes of Ussuri taiga.
Because eggs and larvae develop in cold
running water year round under the cover of
rocks, undisturbed stream substrate and a
specific hydrological regime are critical for
quality spawning habitat. Long-term
stability of stream hydrology, which is
needed to support O. fischeri breeding and
development, is dependent on undisturbed
complex forest structure. Shade and large
woody debris affect stream temperature and
riffle-pool ratio. Extensive root systems
retain soil structure and decaying logs on the
forest floor regulate soil moisture. The deep
roots of conifers provide more soil stability
on slopes than shallow-rooted deciduous
trees. Acid soils locally associated with
Pinus koreansis litter may regulate stream
pH and nutrient availability. We observed
that catastrophic disturbance to spawning
brooks occurred through natural processes
of wildfire and landslides and through
anthropogenic road building and logging in
the watercourse, upslope, and downstream.
Tree harvest on slopes above watercourses
causes stream sedimentation of fine
materials and organics. Such increased
sediment loads associated with logging have
negative effects on aquatic amphibians
(Corn and Bury, 1989). As is the case on
"Burned" creek, siltation eliminates the
spaces between rocks which are critical for
egg deposition and larval development.
Disturbed brooks may be suitable to O.
fischeri spawning only after adequate forest
structure regenerates and interstitial spaces
filled with silt and sand are cleared.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 61
Acknowledgments
The authors would like to thank
Vladimir Aramilev for his invaluable
assistance in Vladivostok and in the field;
Dmitri Pikunov for support from the
Laboratory of Wild Animals of the Pacific
Institute of Geography; Irina Olenicheva for
her assistance with the skeletochronological
work; and David Wake and Mario Garcia-
Paris for their constructive criticism of the
manuscript.
Literature Cited
AKITA, Y. 1989. Breeding Cycle of
Onychodactylus japonicus on Mt. Hodatsu, with
Special Reference to Biannual Spawning. P. 305.
In M. Matsui, T. Hikida and R. C. Goris (Eds),
Current Herpetology in East Asia. Herpetological
Society of Japan, Kyoto.
BRUCE, R. C, C. K. BEACHY, P. G. LENZO, S. P.
PRONYCH AND R. J. WASSERZUG. 1994. Effects
of Lung Reduction on Rheotactic Performance in
Amphibian Larvae. The Journal of Experimental
Zoology 268:377-380.
CORN, P. S. AND R. B. BURY. 1989. Logging in
Western Oregon: Responses of Headwater Habitats
and Stream Amphibians. Forest Ecology and
Management 29:39-57.
DONNELLEY, M. A. AND C. GUYER. 1994.
Estimating Population Size: Mark Recapture. In
Heyer, W.R. et al. (Eds.), Measuring and
Monitoring Biological Diversity: Standard Methods
for Amphibians. Smithsonion Institution Press,
Washington and London.
FULLARD, H. (ED.). 1972. Soviet Union In Maps.
George Philip and Son, Ltd., London.
HAYASE, N. AND S. YAMANE. 1982. [Life
History During the Aquatic Life Period of a
Salamander, Onychodactylus japonicus (Houttuyn),
at Mts. Tsukuba, Ibaraki, Japan]. Japanese Journal
of Ecology 32(3):395^03. (In Japanese).
IVANOV, G. I. 1976.
south of the Far East],
pages. (In Russian).
[Soil Formations in the
Moscow. Science. 200
IWASAWA, I. AND Y. KIRA. 1980. [Normal
Stages of Development of he Japanese Lungless
Salamander, Onychodactylus japonicus (Houttuyn)].
Japanese Journal of Herpetology 8(3):73-89. (In
Japanese).
KUZMIN, S. L. 1990. [Feeding of Sympatric
Species of Hynobiidae in the Primorye]. Zoological
Journal 69(5):7 1-75. (In Russian).
LECLAIR, R. 1990. Relationships between relative
mass of the skeleton, endosteal resorption, habitat
and precision of age determination in ranid
Amphibians. Annales des Sciences Naturelles
Zoologie et Biologie Animale 1 1:205-208.
REGEL, E. D., AND S. M. EPSHTEIN. 1975.
[Some Patterns of Biology in Onychodayctulus
fischeri]. Zoological Journal 63(7): 1515-1524. (In
Russian).
SCHUMACHER, E. F. 1975. Small is Beautiful:
Economics as if People Mattered. Harper and Row.
New York. 305 pages.
SERBINOVA, I. A. AND SOLKIN V. A. 1992.
Reproduction of the Ussuri Lungless Triton
(Onychodactylus fischeri)]. Zoological Journal
71(7):68-74. (In Russian).
SMIRINA, E. M. 1972. [Annual Layers in bones
of R ana temporaria}. Zoological Journal 51:1529-
1534. (In Russian).
I June 1995'
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 62-68
Studies on the Distribution of Trace Elements in
Agkistrodon blomhoffii brevicaudus Stejneger
JIN LIN1, KE-MIN XU> AND DONG-GEN LIU2
1 Department of Biology, Liaoning Normal University, Dalian, Liaoning, 116022 China
^Kunshan Snake Museum, Suzhou, Jiangsu, 215334 China
Abstract: -The distribution of trace elements in various organs and tissues of Agkistrodon blomhoffii
brevicaudus Stejneger was studied by ICP-AES. The results show that there are more than 17 kinds of trace
elements in the snake, namely, Cu, Zn, Fe, Mn, Se, Sr, Al, Si, Al, Ni, Ba, Co, Pb, Ge, Cd, Mo, La, etc.
The amount of each kind of trace element is quite different in the various organs and tissues. The contents of
Zn, Fe, Al and Cr have the highest value; Cu and Mn have the medium value; Se, Sr, Si, Ba, Pb, Ge and Mo
have the lower value; and Ni, Cd, Co and La have the lowest value. The results suggested that the
distributional characteristics of trace elements in Agkistrodon blomhoffii brevicaudus Stejneger correspond
with the snake's physiological and biochemical functions.
Key words: Reptilia, Serpentes, Agkistrodon blomhoffii brevicaudus Stejneger, China, trace elements.
Introduction
According to recent literature, there are
four species which belong to the genus
Agkistrodon in northeast China. They are
A. blomhoffii brevicaudus Stejneger, A.
saxatilis Emelianov, A. shedaoensis Zhao,
and A. ussuriensis Emelianov (Zhao and
Adler, 1993). Xii et al. (1993) reported the
distribution of trace elements in A .
shedaoensis Zhao and A. ussuriensis
Emelianov and the results showed that there
existed interspecific differences. This paper
reports the quality and quantity observations
of trace elements in the various organs and
tissues of A. b. brevicaudus Stejneger. It
will provide experimental data for
comparative physiology and contribute also
to the classification of pit- vipers.
Materials and Methods
Four specimens of Agkistrodon
blomhoffii brevicaudus were provided by
Kunshan Snake Museum at Kunshan
County, Jiangsu Province, China in
December, 1993. The snakes were
decapitated and various organs and tissues
were freshly removed. All samples, except
serum, plasma and bile, were stored in an
incubator at 105°C for 5 hrs., cooled down
and weighted after incubation. Then, the
samples were immersed in mixed acid
(HN03 : HC1=4 : 1) for 24 hrs, then heated
continuously until clear and transparent, and
transferred into a 10 ml graduated tube by
adding double distilled water.
The trace elements of all samples were
measured through ICP-AES (Leeman Co.,
USA). The data was analyzed with a micro-
computer, then they were randomly
arranged as a trace elements graph.
Results
The results show that there are more
than 17 kinds of trace elements, such as Cu,
Zn, Fe, Mn, Se, Sr, Al, Si, Ni, Ge, Cd,
Ba, Mo, Co, Pb, Cr and La in various
organs and tissues of A. b. brevicaudus.
The contents of each kind of trace elements
in the various organs and tissues are as
follows:
Skin, Muscle and Skeleton.
The trace element graphs of the skin,
muscle and skeleton are very similar, but
they still have their own characteristics. The
contents of Zn, Fe and Al are higher in skin,
the order is Al > Fe > Zn, and the Al content
in skin is the highest among all organs and
tissues. The contents of Cr, Mn, Cu, Pb
and Ba have a medium value, and Se, Sr,
Ni, Ge, Cd, Mo and La have a lower value
in the skin. The trace elements showed
different contents in the different segments
of the skin (Figs, la, lb, and lc).
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 63
The skeletal muscle has more Fe and Zn
and less Al, compared with those of the
skin. Other elements have no more
differences. Ge can not be tested out (Fig.
2).
There are more Zn, Sr and Ba and less
Fe, Al and Cr found in the skeleton than in
the skin and skeletal muscle. The skeleton
has more Sr than in other organs and
tissues. But, Ge and La can not be tested
out in the vertebrae (Figs. 3 and 4).
Cardio-Vessel System, Lung and Trachea.
The similarity of elements distribution in
the cardio-vessel system, lung and trachea is
the presence of more Zn, Fe, Al and Cr,
then Cu and Mn, and less Ni, Ge, Cd, Mo,
Co, and La (Figs. 5-10).
There are more contents of Cu, Zn, Fe
and Al found in the heart, vessel and lung
than in the blood and trachea. But, the
contents of Ge and Se are the opposite. The
Cu content in the heart is ahead of the other
organs, and La and Ge can not be tested out
in the lung and trachea.
It reveals that most trace elements are
found in bile, e.g., Cu, Mn, Se, Sr, Al, Ge,
Ba, Mo, Pb, Cr, especially Cu, Ba, Mo,
Pb, and Cr are much more than those in the
serum. The Cr content is the highest among
all samples. The La and Cd can not be
tested out in the serum (Figs. 6 and 10).
Digestive Tract, Liver, and Pancreas.
The contents of Zn, Fe, Al, Mo and Cr
found in the digestive tract and mesentery
have a medium value, then the Cu, Mn, Se,
Sr, Ba, and the other elements are very
small (Figs. 16-21). The Al content is
obviously less than that of the skin.
The liver, spleen and gall-bladder have
similar contents of trace elements. They
contain considerable amounts of Zn and Fe.
The other elements, like Se, Sr, Si and Ge,
are more than those of the digestive tract,
mesentery and other organs. There are no
difference of Cu, Mn, Se, Ni, Ba, Co, Pb
and La among them (Figs. 11-15).
Besides, the contents of Fe and Mo in
the liver and Zn in the pancreas are the
highest among all the samples. It suggests
that the liver is the important place to store
Fe.
Kidney and Reproductive Organs.
There is a large amount of Mn, Se, Ba
and Cr in these organs, but very little of Si,
Ni, Cd, Mo and Co (Figs. 22-25).
Furthermore, there are more Zn, Fe, Al, Cu
and Pb in the oviduct, Fallopian tube and
uterus than in the kidney.
The Al content of the kidney is similar to
that of the digestive tract, but clearly less
than that of the skin.
Brain, Spinal Cord and Poisonous Gland.
The graph of the brain resembles that of
the spinal cord; both contain abundant
elements in the order of Zn > Fe > Cr > Cu
> Al > Mn > Se > Sr > Ni > Ba. The Fe
content of the brain is just lower than that of
the liver, but the Ge and La in the brain can
not be tested out (Figs. 26 and 27).
The Zn content in the poisonous gland is
higher than that of the brain and spinal cord,
and the La content is the highest among all
samples. Se, Ge and Mo can not be
examined (Fig. 28).
Discussion
There are 17 kinds of trace elements
found in Agkistrodon blomhoffii
brevicaudus through ICP-AES. The
contents of each element are quite different
in the various organs and tissues. The
results showed that the trace elements are the
important parts of life substances in the
snake. And, the distribution characteristics
of trace elements correspond with the
animal's physiological and biochemical
functions.
There are abundant amounts of Zn, Fe,
Al and Cr, then Cu, Mn, Se and Sr found in
the organs and tissues, especially in the
cardio-vessel system, lung, liver, spleen,
brain, oviduct, etc. It suggests that these
Vol. 6, p. 64
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
ng'g
200-
150-
100
50
0
Fig. la Skin of Neck
Fig. lb Skin of Thorax
Hgg
200-
L50-
100-
50-
0
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La ( u Zn Fc Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr U
Hg g Fig. lc. Skin of Abdomen ug g Fig. 2 Skeletal Muscle
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr lj& ( u Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr I .a
Fig 4 Rib
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La
Fig. 6. Serum
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr I.a Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr I.a
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 65
Hg 8
200-
150
100
50 H
0
Pig 7. Plasma
Fig. 8. Vessel
u n " * \
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr la Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La
Fig. 9. Lung u.g g Fig. 10 Trachea
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr la Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La
Fig 11 Spleen ug g Fig. 12 Bile
( u Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo ( "o Pb Cr la
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni (}c Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La
Fig 14 Gall Bladder
( 'u Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo ( o Pb Cr La Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Cie Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La
Vol. 6, p. 66
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
(2058) Fig 15 Liver
Fig. 16. Oesophagus
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Or La Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si N*i Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr la
Fig. 17. Stomach
Fig. 18. Duodenum
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La
Hg g Fig. 19. Ileum ng g Fig. 20. 1-arge Intestine
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr la
Fig. 21 Mesentery
Hgg
Fig 22. Iterus
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La
Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 67
Fig 24 Oviduct
( 'u Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La
Hg g
200-
150-
100
50 H
0
Fig. 25. Kidney
Fig 26 Spinal Cord
^\
( u Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr \ja Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La
Fig 28. Poisonous Gland
( u Zn Fc Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr U Cu Zn Fe Mn Se Sr Al Si Ni Ge Cd Ba Mo Co Pb Cr La
Vol. 6, p. 68
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
elements have a close relationship to the
growth and development, the metabolic
process, the enzyme synthesis and
reproduction. But, how the trace elements
take part in the regulation of physiological
and biochemical functions and which is the
essential or non-essential element needs to
be further studied.
There contains much more Al (just less
than Zn and Fe) in most organs and tissues,
especially in the skin; and the Al contents in
the heart, lung, spleen etc. are higher than
those in the kidney and digestive tract. It
show that the skin can collect Al. The
authors thought that the skin of A. b.
brevicaudus may be the place to store and
excrete Al. It is known that Al is harmful to
humans and mammals, but what is the
reason for the high Al content in the body of
the snake is still a question to be solved.
The characteristics of element graphs in
bile is the balanced content of most
elements, and there contain more Cu, Cr,
Ge, Pb, Sr, Cd and Mo than those in other
the organs and tissues. The ratio of Cu/Zn
(2.00) is the highest among the organs. The
results may be due to the concentrating
mechanism of bile.
Literature Cited
XU, K. M., Y. K. ZHAO, J. LIN, AND J. L. LI.
1993. Studies on the interspecific differences in the
distribution of trace elements in various organs
between Agkistrodon shedaoensis Zhao and
Agkistrodon saxatilis Emelianov. Pp. 68-74. In
Proceedings of the First Asian Herpetological
Meeting (eds. Zhao, E. M., B. H. Chen, and T. J.
Papenfuss). China Forestry Press, Beijing. [In
Chinese].
ZHAO, E. M. AND K. ADLER. 1993. Herpetology
of China. SSAR in cooperation with CSSAR,
Contributions to Herpetology 10. 522 pp.
In addition to morphological differences,
there are also changes in metabolic activity
between species due to the divergence of the
genetic constitution, ecological surroundings
and living habits. So, the authors suggest
that trace element detecting is a way to help
classify the pit-vipers.
I June 1995
Asiatic Hcrpctological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 69-72
A Study on Morphological Similarity between the Genera Nanorana and
Altirana (Amphibia, Anura, Ranidae)
Shun-qing Lu and da-tong Yang
Kunming Institute of Zoology, Accidentia Sinica, Kunming, China
Abstract. -Through Wilk's stepwise discriminant analysis, 16 of 18 indices of Nanorana ventripunctata, N.
pleskei, and Altirana parkeri were selected and used in a numerical taxonomy study with their weights given as
the following formula: W=Cxl/U. The result of clustering analysis of the Euclidean Distances between the
three species reveals that N. ventripunctata is more similar to A. parkeri than to N. pleskei in morphology.
Key words: Amphibia, Anura, Ranidae, Nanorana, Altirana, China, Transhimalaya Mountains, stepwise
discriminant analysis, numerical taxonomy.
TABLE 1 . Number, locality, and altitude of species used.
Species Groups Number
N. ventripunctata 1 10 M, 10 F
N. pleskei 2 10 M, 10 F
A. parkeri 3 10 M, 10 F
Zhongdian, Yunnan
Kangding, Sichuan
Bashu, Xizang
Altitude
3350 m
3260 m
4100m
Introduction
Nanorana ventripunctata, N. pleskei,
and Altirana parkeri are three species of
frogs in two genera that are distributed in the
Transhimalaya Mountains of China. Except
for morphological identification and
chromosome research, we know of no other
studies on these frogs that has been
published.
Nanorana and Altirana have a close
relationship (Su et al, 1985: Hu et al,
1986), and some distinguishing characters
between them are vague since the discovery
of N. ventripunctata (Fei and Huang, 1985).
It is necessary to reexamine the two genera.
In this paper, based on 18 external
morphological indices, the authors use
stepwise discriminant analysis and
numerical taxonomy to compare the three
species.
Materials and Methods
The number, locality, and altitude of the
specimens used are shown in Table 1.
Nineteen external morphological
characters were measured from each
specimen, and changed to eighteen ratios,
i.e. 18 indices: HEL (head length)/SVL
(snout vent length), HEW (head
width)/SVL, SNL (snout length)/HEW,
BND (distance between noses)/HEL, BED
(distances between eyes)/HEL, ELW (eyelid
width)/HEL, EYD (eye diameter)/HEL,
FED (distance between front angles of
eyes)/HEL, AHL (hand and front arm
length)/SVL, ARW (front arm width )/HEL,
HAL (hand length)/SVL, SVL/LFL (leg
length, TIL (tibia length)/HEL, TIW (tibia
width)/HEL, TFL (tarsalia and foot
length)ATSVL, FOL (foot length)/SVL, NSL
(length from nose to the top of snout)/HEL,
and SPN (snout process length)/HEL.
Results
After stepwise discriminant analysis,
sixteen of the 1 8 indices were selected, their
Wilk's statistic measure U (from the first
step of the stepwise discriminant analysis)
are shown in Table 2.
The weights of the 16 indices are given
by the following formula:
W=Cxl
U
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 70
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 2. Selected indices and their U after discriminant analysis.
Indices
FED
HAL
HEL
HEW
SVL
0.7937
EYD
HEL
0.9677
TABLE 3. The weights of the 16 indices.
HAL
SVL
0.2381
TFL
SVL
0.1724
HEL
SVL
0.1332
BED
HEL
0.2986
HEW
SVL
0.1260
EYD
HEL
0.1033
SPN
HEL
0.1807
AHL
SVL
0.1987
TABLE 4. The matrix of weighted measures of the 16 indices.
TABLE 5. The Euclidean Distances among the three species. Unit: 10"^
1
2
3
Natwrana ventripunctata
0
0.8868
0.1707
Nanorana pleskei
0.8868
0
0.8787
Altirana parkeri
0.1707
0.8787
0
Here C is a coefficient used to regulate
the size of weight, which is given according
to the condition, and U is the Wilk's statistic
measure. Its calculating formula is: U =
IWI/TI = IWI/(IWI + IBI), where W is the
variance in group, B is the variance between
groups, T is the total variance. This formula
reveals that the smaller the U, the more
important the index. So the weighting
formula used in this paper is agreeable with
the weighting principles. In addition, it has
some merits when compared to other
weighting formulas used in the literature: 1)
No negative weights appear; 2) As a
measure of the importance of characters, U
has been accepted commonly, and as a
measure of weights, it may be accepted
easily; 3) Convenient for calculation.
The calculated weights of the 16 indices
are shown in Table 3.
Multiplying the measures of the 16
indices with their weights, a numerical
matrix is given as shown in Table 4.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.6, p. 71
1.00 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0
FIG. 1. The UPG MA phonogram of the three species based on Table 5.
. A. parked
N. ventripunctata
_ N. pleskei
Table 6. Some identification characters between the three species.
Nanorana pleskei
tympanum under skin, but visible;
columella exists
nasals separate, not connected with
fTontal-parietal
precoracoid ossified incompletely
clavicle short, not attach epiconicoid
the first low labial teeth of tadpole
shorter than the second obviously
N. ventripunctata and Altirana parked
tympanum and columella absent
nasals connected with each other and connected
with frontal-parietal
precoracoid ossified completely
clavicle long, attach epiconicoid
the first low labial teeth of tadpole slightly shorter
than the second
The Euclidean Distance is selected in this
paper to measure the morphological
differences between the three frogs. The
formula is: Dij= Vx(Xik-Xjk)2. The
calculated Euclidean distances among the
three frogs are shown in Table 5.
Figure 1 detects that the distance
between N. ventripunctata and A . parked is
the shortest. The two frogs meet together at
the distance 0.1703, then they meet with N.
pleskei at the distance of 0.8827. The
morphological similarity of N .
ventripunctata and A parked is closer than
that of N. ventripunctata and N. pleskei.
Discussion
Up to the present, the differences
between the genera Nanorana and Altirana
reported on by Tian and Jiang (1986)
contained the most details. But the genus
Nanorana as they meant, did not contain N.
ventripunctata, so it was just the differences
between N. pleskei and A. parked that they
noted.
The characters of N. ventripunctata
show that this species is more similar to the
genus Altirana than to the genus Nanorana
as shown in Table 6. The numerical
taxonomy research of this paper and the
biochemical systematic study (Lu and Yang,
1994) show the same results. It seems
logical to take ventripunctata out of genus
Nanorana and place it in genus Altirana, but
the biochemical systematic study reveals that
the Nei's (1972) genetic distances between
the three frogs are 0.30, 0.57, 0.57,
respectively, smaller than 1.05 obviously,
but larger than 0.15. We feel that these
differences are at the species level, not the
generic level (Thorpe, 1983). Thinking of
the principle: in order to avoid more
monogenera, the interruption of a genus
with other genera should be anti-relative
Vol. 6, p. 72
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
with the size of the genus, i.e. the number
of species contained in this genus, the
authors suggest that the genus Altirana be
cancelled and the species parkeri be placed
in the genus Nanorana..
Acknowledgments
We are grateful to Mr. Dingqi Rao for
collecting specimens together with one of us
(Lu). Thanks also due to Mr. Ruliang Pan
and Fahong Yu for offering us the computer
program for stepwise discriminant analysis.
Literature Cited
FEI, L. AND Y. Z. HUANG. 1985. A new species
of the genus Nanorana (Amphibia Ranidae) from
northwestern Yunnan, China. Acta Biologica
Plateau Sinica 1985(4):71-75. (In Chinese).
HU, Q. X., Y. M. JIANG, AND E. M. ZHAO. 1985.
Studies on the influence of the Hcngduan Mountains
on the evolution of the amphibians. Acta
Herpetologica Sinica 1985, 4(3):225-233. (In
Chinese).
LU, S. Q. AND D. T. YANG. 1994. A study of
relationships among ranid frogs of the genera
Nanorana and Altirana in the Transhimalaya
Mountains of China. Asiatic Herpetological
Research. (In Press).
SU, C. Y., D. T. YANG, AND S. Q. LI. 1986.
Studies on vertical distribution of Amphibians in
the middle section of the Hengduan Mountains.
Acta Herpetologica Sinica 1986, 5(2):134-144. (In
Chinese).
THORPE, J. P. 1983. Enzyme variation, genetic
distance and evolutionary divergence in relation to
levels of taxonomic separation. Pp. 131-152. In G.
S. Oxford and D. Rollonson (Eds.), Protein
polymorphism: Adaptive and taxonomic
significance. Academic Press, London.
TIAN, W. S. AND Y. M. JIANG (EDITORS),
ASSISTED BY G. F. WU, Q. X. HU, E. M. ZHAO,
AND Q. Y. HUANG. 1986. Identification manual
for Chinese species of amphibians and reptiles.
Science Press, Beijing. 164 pp. (In Chinese).
I June 1995'
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 73-77
A Study of Relationships among Ranid Frogs of the Genera Nanorana and
Altirana in the Transhimalaya Mountains of China
Shun-qing Lu and Da-tong Yang
Department of Vertebrate Zoology, Kunming Institute of Zoology, Academia Sinica,
Kunming, Yunnan, China
Abstract. -Nanorana ventripunctata,N. pleskei and Altirana parkeri were examined electrophoretically to
investigate the intraspecific genetic relationships. Twelve isozyme loci were assayed and their allele
frequencies were calculated. The result of UPGMA clustering, when corrected by the Present-Day Ancestor
Method and based on the allele frequencies, detected that the genetic relationship between N. ventripunctata and
A. parkeri is closer than that between N. ventripunctata and N. pleskei. The authors suggest that the genus
Altirana should be canceled and that A. parkeri be placed in the genus Nanorana.
Key words:
Mountains.
Anura, Ranidae, Nanorana, Altirana, genetic relationships, isozyme, China, Transhimalaya
TABLE 1 . The location, altitude, date and number of specimens collected.
Introduction
Materials and Methods
The genera Nanorana and Altirana
include three species, which are distributed
in the Transhimalaya Mountains of China.
They are considered to be closely related,
and some identification characters between
the two genera have been vague since the
description of N. ventripunctata (Fei and
Huang, 1985). Except for some
morphological identification and
chromosome studies, there are no other
studies published on these genera. In order
to re-study the two genera, the authors here
use starch gel electrophoresis on extracts
from liver and muscle to determine genetic
distances in order to better understand the
genetic relationships among the three species
of frogs.
For comparison, the species of Rana
shuchinae and R. chensinensis were selected
as out-groups. Part of the distribution of
these two frogs is the same as Nanorana and
Altirana.
The collecting locality, altitude, date and
number of living specimens of the five
species are shown as in Table 1 .
The specimens were killed in the field,
the liver and thigh muscle of each specimen
were taken and placed in 1.5 ml plastic
micro centrifuge tubes with several drops of
physiological saline, then preserved in liquid
nitrogen, and taken back to the laboratory.
Tissues were washed with distilled
water and physiological saline, the volume
ratio is tissue: physiological saline = 1:1.5,
homogenized and centrifuged. These
samples were run in horizontal starch gels
using gel buffers described by Pasteur et al
(1988) as follows: Tris-Borate-EDTA (pH
8.6), Tris-Citrate (pH 6.7). Isozyme stains
used were also described by Pasteur et al
(1988). The following enzyme systems
were stained: alcohol-dehydrogenase
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
ADH-2
GLC-1
MDH-1
a
b
c
d
e
1.0000
0.4333
0.3667
1.0000
0.5000
0.5000
1.0000
0.0333
0.2667
0.3000
0.3333
0.0667
0.0667
0.6000
0.1333
0.1000
0.1000
0.5000
0.5000
0.1667
0.8333
0.3750
0.3333
0.2083
0.0833
0.3125
0.3125
0.3750
MDH-2
a
b
c
d
e
0.0769
0.8077
0.1154
0.2333
0.4333
0.3333
0.3636
0.0808
0.5000
0.0808
0.0808
0.5000
0.5000
0.5000
0.1250
0.3333
0.0417
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 75
TABLE 4. The corrected distances with R. shuchinae as the present-day ancestor.
N. ventripunctata
N. pleskei
A. parkeri
N. ventripunctata
N. pleskei
-1.4498
A. parkeri
-2.0496
-1.4589
. N. ventripunctata
A. parkeri
_ N. pleskei
0 -1.00 -2.00
FIG. 1 . The UPGMA phenogram of corrected distances with R. shuchinae as the present-day ancestor.
(ADH, Ec 1.1.1.1). esterase (EST, Ec
3.1.1.1), NAD-glucose-dehydrogenase
(GLC, Ec 1.1.1.1), lactate-dehydrogenase
(LDH, Ec 1.1.1.27), malate-dehydrogenase
(MDH, Ec 1.1.1.37) malic enzyme (MOD,
Ec 1.1.1.40), sorbitol-dehydrogenase
(SDH, Ec 1.1.1.14).
Results
Twelve isozyme loci were resolved and
scored. Their allele frequencies are shown
as in Table 2.
From Table 2, the Nei's (1972) genetic
distances and similarities among the five
species was calculated and is shown in
Table 3.
It is obvious from Table 3 that the
evolutionary rates of the five species are
unequal, so it is necessary to make a
correction before UPGMA clustering. The
Present-Day Ancestor Method (Li, 1987)
was selected in this paper, the correcting
formula is: D'ij=Dij.DjX) here D'ij is the
corrected distance, the Dij is the original
distance, x represents the supposed present-
day ancestor. At first, with R. shuchinae
from the out-group selected as the present-
day ancestor, the corrected distances among
the three frogs in the genera Nanorana and
Altirana are are shown in Table 4.
The UPGMA clustering phenogram of
the corrected distances among the three
species in Table 4 is shown in Figure 1 .
When R. chensinensis is selected as the
present-day ancestor, the corrected distances
are shown in Table 5.
Vol. 6, p. 76
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 5. The corrected distances with R. chensinensis as the present-day ancestor.
N. ventripunctata
N. pleskei
A. parked
N. ventripunctata
N. pleskei
-1.4332
A. parked
-1.6854
-1.1975
_ N. ventripunctata
.A. parked
N. pleskei
0 -1.00 -2.00
FIG. 2. The UPGMA phenogram of corrected distances with R. chensinensis as the present-day ancestor.
FIG. 3. The genealogical phenogram among the three species.
N. ventripunctata
A. parked
N. pleskei
Based on Table 5, we prepared a
UPGMA phenogram which is shown in
Figure 2.
Not minding the difference of distances
among the frogs, we find that they are
similar in both Figure 1 and Figure 2,
though they are based on the different
present-day ancestors, so we synthesized
and simplified them as shown as in Figure
3.
Figure 3 shows that the genetic
relationship between N. ventripunctata and
A. parkeri is closer than that between N .
ventripunctata and N. pleskei.
Discussion
Up to the present, the differences
between Nanorana and Altirana described by
Tian and Jiang (1986) are the most detailed,
but the genus Nanorana of their meaning
does not contain N. ventripunctata. It is just
/V. ventripunctata that confuses the
distinction between the two genera, and the
study of morphological similarities among
the three species of the two genera shows
the same result that N. ventripunctata and A.
parkeri are more similar than N .
ventripunctata and A', pleskei (Lu and Yang,
1994). Both of the results of biochemical
systematics and morphological similarity
studies do not support the presently
recognized generic assignments and we
suggest that N. ventripunctata should be
taken out of the genus Nanorana and placed
in the genus Altirana.
From Table 3, we know Nei's (1972)
genetic distances among the three species are
0.5709, 0.5693 and 0.2979. This is larger
than 0.15, but much smaller than 1.05.
These differences are at the species level,
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 77
but not the generic level (Thorpe, 1983.
Also, we know that there is a principle: in
order to avoid more mongenera, the
interruption of a genus with other genera
should be anti-relative with the number of
species in this genus. Thinking of these and
the vague line between Nanorana and
Altirana, according to the principle of
priority of the International Code of
Zoological Nomenclature, the authors
suggest that it is perfect to cancel the genus
Altirana, and that the species parkeri should
be placed in the genus Nanorana.
Acknowledgments
We thank Mr. Dingqien Rao for
collecting specimens with one of us (Lu)
and his help in the laboratory. Thanks also
are given to Professor Jingyan Li for his
suggestions concerning the Present-Day
Ancestor Method.
Literature Cited
FEI, L. AND Y. Z. HUANG. 1985. A new species
of the genus Nanorana (Amphibia Ranidae) from
northwestern Yunnan, China. Acta Biologica
Plateau Sinica 1985(4):71-75. (In Chinese).
HU, Q. X, Y. M. JIANG, AND E. M. ZHAO. 1985.
Studies on the influence of the Hcngduan Mountains
on the evolution of the amphibians. Acta
Herpetologica Sinica 1985, 4(3):225-233. (In
Chinese).
LI, J. Y. 1987. The essence of the Present-Day
Ancestor Method for constructing evolutionary trees
from sequence data and the puzzle encountered in
applying this method. Zoological Research
9(2): 141-150. (In Chinese).
LU, S. Q. AND D. T. YANG. 1994. A study on
morphological similarity between the genera
Nanorana and Atltirana (Amphibia, Anura, Ranidae).
Asiatic Herpetological Research. In Press.
PASTEUR, N. 1988. Manual technique de
genetrique par electrophorese des proteines.
Lavoisier TEC & DOC., Paris. 215pp.
THORPE, J. P. 1983. Enzyme variation, genetic
distance and evolutionary divergence in relation to
levels of tax onomic separation. Pp. 131-152. InG.
S. Oxford and D. Rollonson (eds.), Protein
polymorphism: Adaptive and taxonomic
significance. Academic Press, London.
TIAN, W. S. AND Y. M. JIANG (EDITORS),
ASSISTED BY G. F. WU, Q. X. HU, E. M. ZHAO,
AND Q. Y. HUANG. 1986. Identification manual
for Chinese species of amphibians and reptiles.
Science Press, Beijing. 164 pp. (In Chinese).
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 78-84
Fibrinogenase from the Venom of Trimeresurus mucrosquamatus
JIAN-PING MAO1, WAN-YU WANG1, YU-LlANG XlONG1 AND LIANG LU2
'Kunming Institute of Zoology, Academia Sinica, Kunming, 650223 China
2 Yunnan Provincial Hospital, Kunming, 650021, China
Abstract. -A new fibrin(ogen)olytic protease (FP) was purified from the venom of Trimeresurus
mucrosquamatus by DEAE-Sephadex A50, Sephadex-G75, CM-Sepharose CL-6B and mono-s (FPLC)
column chromatography. The molecular weight was 22,000 Da and the isoelectric point was 9.2. It was a
glycoprotein composed of 194 amino acid residues. FP could hydrolyze casine, finbrin, fibrinogen and also
showed hemorrhagic subcutaneously, no phospholipase A activity, arginine esterase activity which existed in
the crude venom. The enzyme could be inhibited by ethylenediamine tetra-acetate (EDTA) and cysteine, but
not by phenylmethyl sulfonyl fluoride (PMSF). FP cleaved the BB-chain of fibrinogen first following the
Aa-chain. In vivo, thrombolytic activity was tested on artificial thrombus placed in the cerebral artery of
rabbits. Thrombolysis was then characterized by angiographic techniques over several intervals. The
fibrinolytic activity resulted in thrombolytic recanalization of two dosage groups. Of four rabbits of 0.2
mg/kg, one achieved recanalization in 12 hrs. and three in 24 hrs. Of another four under the dosage of 0.4
mg/kg, three recanalized successfully in 5 hrs. and one in 9 hrs.
Keywords: Venom, Fibrin(ogen)olytic Protease, Thrombolysis.
Introduction
Fibrinolytic and fibrinogenolytic activity
had been described in the venoms of a
number of snake species, including
members of the Crotalinae, Viperinae, and
Elapidae families (Ouyang and Teng, 1976;
Willis et al., 1988; Daoud et al., 1987;
Evans and Barrett, 1988). The
fuibrin(ogen)olytic enzymes in snake
venoms had also been reviewed previously
(Seegers and Ouyang, 1979; Hellmann,
1968; Markland, 1988; Markland, 1991).
Several fibrin(ogen)olytic enzymes were
isolated from the venom of Trimeresurus
mucrosquamatus: two fibrinogenases
(Ouyang and Teng, 1976), two hemorrhagic
principals HT-a and HT-b (Nikai et al.,
1985) and three proteinases (Sugihara and
Mori, 1985). Willis, et al. (1989) evaluated
the thrombolytic potential of anticoagulant
proteases in Crotalus atrox venom using
rats. In the present study, we purified a
new fibrinogenase from the venom of
Chinese habu snake and studied its
characteristics.
Materials And Methods
Lyophilysed Trimeresurus mucro-
squamatus venom was obtained from
Yuanlin Farm (Hunan, China) and stored at
-20°C. Human thrombin was purchased
from Shanghai Hospital. Fibrinogen,
BAEE (N- benzoyl- L- arginine ethyl ester),
PMSF were from the Shanghai Institute of
Biochemistry, Academia Sinica. Urokinase
(UK) came from Nanjing University.
DEAE-Sephadex A50, Sephadex-G75, CM-
Sepharose CL-6B and mono-s HR5/5
(FPLC) were purchased from Phrmacia Fine
Chemicals (made in Uppsala, Sweden).
The other chemicals used were analytical
grade from commercial sources.
Isolation Procedure: Isolation of FP
was achieved by a combination of gel
filtration and ion-exchange chromatography
at 4°C (Fig. 1). One gram of crude venom
was dissolved in 5 ml of 50 mM Tris, pH
8.8. The insoluble material was removed by
centrifugation (2000 g) for 10 min. The
supernatant was fractionated thus: first, on
DEAE-A50 (3 X 100 cm), 50 mM Tris-HCl
pH 8.5; second, Sephadex -G75 (2 X 100
cm), 20 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5; third, CM-
Sepharose CL-6B (2 X 30 cm), 10 mM
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 79
Vsc C i
III !0 JO 40
*M FPLC Mono-S
10 !0 30 40 50 lak, Nui
10 40
Tubr Nuaber
FIG. 1. Fractionation of Trimeresurus mucrosquamatus venom. 1st, DEAE-A50 (3X100 cm) anion
exchanging, 50mM Tris-HCL pH 8.5; 2nd, Sephadex G-75 gel filtration (2X100 cm), lOmM ammonium
acetate pH 7.0; 4th, mono-s cation exchanging, lOmM sodium acetate pH 5.8.
ammonium acetate pH 7.0; and fourth, on
mono-s HR 5/5, 10 mM sodium acetate pH
5.8.
Characterization of FP: Assay for
hemorrhagic activity assay for gross
observation was performed as reported
previously (Bjarnason and Fox, 1983).
Proteolytic activity was assayed by a method
using casine of Kunitz (1947). The
inhibition of EDTA, Cysteine, and PMSF
was also tested with this method..
Fibrinogenase activity was measured by the
method of Ouyang and Huang (1979).
Fibrinolytic activity was tested with the
fibrin plate method of Astrup and Mullertz
(1952), and also with fibrin clot from
fibrinogen with thrombin. Arginine ester
hydrolytic activity was assayed using BAEE
as a substrate. BAEE 50 mM (containing 1
mM CaC12) was prepared with 50 mM Tris-
HC1 (pH 8.0) buffer. Trypsin was taken as
the control. The phospholipase activity was
qualitatively assayed with the substrate of
yolk. The pH of the substrate was
modulated to 8.0; after the fraction was
added, the pH decreased by the
phospholipase activity, and was adjusted to
that of the original by 10 mM NaOH. The
values of sodium hydroxide was taken to
present the activity. Amino acid
compositions were carried on a Model 835-
50 Hitachi high speed automatic analyzer by
the method of Simpson et al. (1976).
Twenty-four h, 48 h hydrolysates were
used. Phanolanaline was used as the
minimum residue to calculate the number of
amino acid residues.
Thrombosis assay by angio-
graphy: For FP dosage determination, 0.2
ml rabbit plasma made clot with 3U
thrombin, 50(lg FP was used to test in vitro
activity. In 4.5-5.5 hours, the milky white
Vol. 6, p. 80
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 1 . Summary of purified FP from T. mucrosquamatus venom (n=6).
Recovered protein (mg)
Hemorrhage (mm X mm)
(25±3 gm mice 100 ug sample)
Caseinolytic activity
Units/mg.min
Fibrinolytic activity
(Fibrin heated plate mm2)
Arginie esterase activity
Phospholipase A activity
• *»
W tffl
ft
12 3 4 5 6 7
FIG. 2. SDS-PAGE of reduced fibrinogen after
incubation with FP (lOug) lane 1; fibrinogen; lane
2-7; fibrinogen with FP for 5, 10, 20, 30; 45; and
60 min. respectively.
clot could become clear. Thrombolytic
activity by FP was tested on artificial
thrombus catheterized in the rabbit. Sixteen
rabbits, ranging from 2.2 to 2.7 kg, were
used. 0.5 ml of blood was drawn from the
ear vein of the rabbits and made thrombus as
20 mm (long) X 1.00 mm (diameter). The
rabbits were then anesthetized with an
intravenous injection of a ketamine at a
dosage of 2 mg/kg weight. The left
common carotid artery was isolated, and a
polythylene catheter (1.00 ID X 1.40 OD)
was inserted into the artery. By digital
subtraction angiology (DSA, Angiotran
cmp, Siemens, Germany), normal
angiographic was recorded with angiografin
solution (meglucamine diatrizoate 65% 30
ml X "Schering AG", made in Germany) of
3 ml. The thrombus was catheterized into
the artery, then the thrombosis graph was
recorded. Thirty minute after the thrombus
induction, the 16 rabbits, separated into four
groups, were injected with saline, U.K.
1,000 IU/kg weight, 0.2 mg FP/kg weight,
0.4 mg FP/kg weight transcatheterically
respectively, then the four angiogrames
were taken after 5, 9, 12 and 24 hours.
Results
Fourteen fractions were achieved after
DEAE-Sephadex A50 chromatography, and
three fractions, which contained fibrinolytic
activity, were further fractionated. Fraction
3 was equilibrated with 20 mM Tris-HCl
buffer (pH 7.5) by dialysis and loaded onto
the Sephadex-G75 column. Fraction 2
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.6, p. 81
f i
u-nai
FIG. 3. Aniographs of in vivo thrombolysis (from left). Control group! A, Normal graph. B, Thrombosis
performed (X). C, Treated with saline, 24 hours. FP group: D and G, Normal graphs. E and H, Thrombosis
performed (X). F, Treated with FP at 0.2 mg/kg dosage, recanalization occured in 24 hrs. I, Treated with FP
at 0.4 mg/kg dosage, recanalization occured in 5 hrs. U. K group (positive control): J, Normal graph. K,
Thrombosis performed (X). L, Recanalized within 9 hours of U. K administration (1 ,000 IU/kg).
obtained in this step yielded fibrinolytic
activity. This fraction was dialyzed against
10 mM aminium acetate (pH 7.0) and loaded
on the CM-Sepharose CL-6B column and
was separated into three fractions, the
fibrinolytic activity was located in the 2nd,
this fraction was rechromatographied on
FPLC mono-s column and eluted with three
phases of gradient: 0-30 ml (0 M NaCl);
30-80 ml (0-0.1 M NaCl) and 80-100 ml
Vol.
6, p. 82
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 3. Proteases from the venom of T. mucrosquamatus.
TABLE 4. Proteases from the venom of T. mucrosquamatus.
(1 M NaCl). The fibrinolytic activity was
in the 6th fraction and the principal was
qualified as FP.
Properties of FP: The molecular
weight of the purified FP was determined
to be 22,000 Da by SDS-polyacrylamide
slab gel electrophoresis. The isoelectric
point obtained by isoelectric focusing disc
polyacrylamide gel was 9.2. The enzyme
is a glycoprotein as shown by periodic
acid-Schiff's agent staining after low pH
(pH 4.3) polyacrylamide gel
electrophoresis. The amino acid residues
of FP was 194, the combined number of
Glx and Asx were 49. Yet, the isoelectric
point of the proteinase was basic. This
enzyme possessed proteolytic activity
hydrolyzing casine, fibrin and fibrinogen,
but did not have BAEE hydrolase,
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 83
phospholipase A activity. The enzyme
also had hemorrhagic activity (Table 1).
Heat and pH stability: The
proteinase, at a concentration of 40 |ig/ml
in 10 mM acetate buffer (pH 5.8)
containing 10 mM NaCl, were incubated
for 30 minutes at various temperatures and
then quickly cooled down to room
temperature. The caseinolytic activity was
then determined. The enzyme was fully
active at 37°C, showed little activity at
50°C, and almost lost complete activity at
55°C. Incubation of FP at pH values
below 5.0 and above 10.0 for 30 min lead
to a sudden decrease in proteolytic
activity.
Biological activity: The effects of
some reagents on the proteolytic activity of
FP were examined. This activity was
inhibited by ethylenediamine tetraacetic
acid (EDTA), cysteine but not by PMSF.
The effects of some divalent and trivalent
ions on the proteolytic activity of FP were
also assayed. The enzyme (40 |ig/ml) and
ions at a concentration of 10 mM in 10
mM acetate buffer were first incubated at
37°C for 30 min. before the proteolytic
activity was assayed. The proteolytic
activity increased in the presence of
bivalent ions in the following order: Ca++
< Cu++ < Zn++ < Co++. The increase
by Fe+++ and A1+++ were lower than that
of Zn++ but higher than that of Cu++,
Ca++ (Table 2). When fibrinogen was
incubated with FP, this enzyme cleaved
the Bb-chain of fibrinogen and followed
the Aa-chain as shown in Figure 2. The
degrading of fibrinogen by FP was
measured as 36.5 mg per mg enzyme in
one minute.
Thrombolysis: None of the four
rabbits of saline administration reached
recanalization. Of the FP 0.2 u.g/kg
group, one achieved recanalization in 12
hrs. and three in 24 hrs.; of the other four
of 0.4 mg/kg, three recanalized
successfully in 5 hrs. and one in 9 hrs. Of
the four rabbits treated with 1,000 IU/kg
of U.K., thrombolytic recanalization
occurred in two in 6 hrs. and two in 9 hrs.
(Fig. 3).
Discussion
The venom of the Crotalinae species
contained much proteinases, which had
proteolytic and esterase activities. Several
enzymes were isolated from Trimeresurus
mucrosquamatus venom (Table 3 and 4).
Our results showed that FP is a new
fibrinogenase existing in Trimeresurus
mucrosquamatus venom. Compared with
the others, this enzyme, is a metallo-
proteinase which attacks the Bb-chain of
fibrinogen preferentially. As we know,
the enzymes which had fibrinogenolytic
activity were classified as a-fibrinogenases
and b-fibrinogenases; most of the a-
fibrinogenases can degrade Aa-chain of
fibrinogen and usually are metallo-
proteinases. Of most of the b-
fibrinogenases degrading the Bb-chain of
fibrinogen, little of them could also
degrade the Aa-chain inhibited by DFP or
PMSF. They are serine proteinases. HT-
a, the first example of which hydrolyzed
Bb-chain of fibrinogen and was inhibited
by EDTA. The followed FP was the
second report of these enzymes. Three
proteinases from the Agkistrodon halys
blomhoffii were activated by Ca++ and
Co++ (Satake et al., 1963). Ca++ and
Zn++ were also needed for the proteolytic
activity of protein G from Bothrops asper
(Ortiz and Gubensak, 1987). FP was
activated by Co++ and Zn++. For these
metallo-proteinases, these bivalent cations
were important for their stability and their
activities. FP had marked activity on the
plasma clot in vitro, also 0.4 mg FP/kg
dosage occurred thrombolysis in 3/4 in
vivo. It was a good trial for FP
thrombolytic potential. Hemorrhage was
caused when injected subcutaneously, but
did not occur within the heart, liver,
kidney and lung after FP injection in
rabbits at the dosage of 1 mg/kg in mice.
Vol. 6, p. 84
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Literature Cited
ASTRUP, T. AND S. MULLERTZ. 1952. The
fibrin plate method for estimating fibrinolytic
activity. Archives of Biochemistry and
Biophysics 40:346-349.
BJARNASON, J. B. AND J. W. FOX. 1983.
Proteolytic specificity and cobalt exchange of
hemorrhagic toxin e, a zinc protease isolated from
the venom of the western diamondback ratdesnake
(Crolalus atrox). Biochemistry 22:3770-3778.
DAOUD, E., H. Y. HALIM AND F. M. EL-
ASMAR. 1987. Further characterization of the
anticoagulant proteinases, cerastase F^4, from
Cerastes cerastes (Egyptian sand viper) venom.
Toxicon 25:891-897.
EVANS, J. H., AND A. J. BARRETT. 1988. The
action of protease F 1 from Naja nigricollis
venom on the Aa-chain of human fibrinogen. Pp.
213-222. In Pirkle H. and Markland F. S. (eds.).
Hemostasis and Animal Venoms. Marcel Dekker,
New York.
HELLMANN.K. 1968. Naturally occurring
anticoagulants and fibrinolysis. Pp. 254-265. In
The Scientific Basis of Medicine Annual Reviews.
Oxford University Press, New York.
MARKLAND, F. S. 1988. Fibrin(ogen)olytic
enzymes from snake venoms. Pp. 149-172. In
Pirkle H. and Markland F. S. (eds.). Hemostasis
and Animal Venoms. Marcel Dekker, New York.
MARKLAND, F. S. 1991. Inventory of a and 6-
fibrinogenases from snake venom. In Hemostasis
and Animal Venoms. F. K. Schattauer
Verlagsgesellschaft mbH (Stuttgart), 65(4):438-
443.
NKAI, T., N. MORI AND M. KISHIDA. 1985.
Isolation and characterization of hemorrhagic
factors a and B from the venom of the Chinese
habu snake (Trimeresurus mucrosquamatus).
Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 838:122-131.
ORTIZ, F. A. AND F. GUBENSAK. 1987.
Characterization of a metallo-proteinase from
Bothrops asper (Terciopelo) snake venom.
Toxicon 25:759-763.
OUYANG, C. AND C. M. TENG. 1976.
Fibrinogenolytic enzymes of Trimeresurus
mucrosquamatus venom. Biochimica et
Biophysica Acta 420:298-308.
SEEGERS, W. H. AND C. OUYANG. 1979.
Snake venoms and blood coagulation. Handb.
Exp. Pharm. 52:648-750.
SIMPSON, R. J., M. R. NEUBERGER AND T. Y.
LIU. 1976. Complete amino acid analysis of
proteins from a single hydrolysate. Journal of
Biological Chemistry 25:1936-1940.
SUGIHARA, H. AND N. MORI. 1985.
Comparative study of three proteinases from the
venom of the Chinese habu snake (Trimeresurus
mucrosquamatus). Comparative Biochemistry and
Physiology 82B(l):29-35.
WILLIS, T. D. AND A. T. TU. 1988.
Purification and characterization of Atroxase. A
non-hemorrhagic fibrinolytic protease from
western diamondback rattlesnake venom.
Biochemistry 27:4769-4777.
WILLIS, T. D., A. T. TU AND C. W. MILLER.
1989. Thrombosis with a snake venom protease
in a rat model of venous thrombosis. Thrombosis
Research 53:19-29.
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetolo^ical Research
Vol. 6, pp. 85-96
Digital Pad Morphology in Torrent-living Ranid Frogs
ANNEMARIE OHLER
Laboraloire des Reptiles el Amphibiens, Museum national d'llistoire nalurelle,
25 rue Cuvier, 75005 Paris, France
Abstract. -Digital pads of 24 species of ranoid frogs (Raninae, Dicroglossinae, Ranixalinae, Rhacophorinae,
Hyperoliinae) were studied by scanning electron microscopy. In many species of Raninae the cells of the
adhesive pad are differentiated (elongated and wearing projections). Functional aspects of cell morphology and
digital pad expansion are discussed in relation with sticking condition in aquatic medium.
Key words: Amphibia, Anura, morphology
Introduction
Digital pads occur in most of advanced
anuran families. This organ seems to be of
multiple origin and of difficult use in
systematics (Noble and Jaeckle, 1928;
McAllister and Channing, 1982). Digital
pads occur in arboreal anurans (Hyla), but
they can also be observed in torrent-living
frogs (Amolops), and in some fossorial
species (Kaloula). In Asian and African
frogs of the family Ranidae, several genera
and species groups belonging to different
subfamilies have fingers and toes bearing
digital pads.
There exists no strong hypothesis of
phylogeny of ranids as a whole.
Phylogenetic analyses were undertaken only
for geographic and taxonomic limited
groups (Liem, 1970; Clarke, 1981; Hillis,
1985; Emerson and Berigan, 1993). The
broadly accepted classification (Frost, 1985)
is based on Boulenger's works dating from
the beginning of this century (Boulenger,
1882; 1920). Recently Dubois (1986,
1992) tried to review the entire group and
proposed a tentative classification which he
sees as a working hypothesis. In this
hypothesis ranids are split into several
families, subfamilies and tribes (Dubois,
1992). Species that are enclosed in the
genus "Rana" in Frost (1985) are in Dubois'
classification distributed in several
subfamilies (Table 1).
Results from study of skeleton showed
several major lines in "Rana" (Deckert,
1938; Clarke, 1981). Study of the
morphology of the digital pads (Ohler and
Dubois, 1989) confirmed that two of these
lines could be distinguished by their digit
morphology. Ranines have digital pads
with a latero-ventral groove, often separated
terminally. Dicroglossines have digital pads
showing a dorso-terminal groove.
The histological structures of the digital
pads were first described by Schuberg
(1895) and Siedlecki (1910). Noble and
Jaeckle (1928) undertook a comparative
histological analysis of 47 species of
anurans. The fine structure of the epidermal
cells in the digital pad has been observed by
transmission electron microscope (Komnick
and Stockem, 1969; Ernst, 1973 a-b).
Scanning electron microscopy has been used
to describe morphology of digital pads,
often in view of taxonomic utilisation or
functional interpretation (Welsch, Storch
and Fuchs, 1974; Green, 1979, 1980, 1981;
Emerson and Diehl, 1980; Mc Allister and
Channing, 1983; Green and Simon, 1986;
Green and Carson, 1988).
The epidermis of anurans has a
superficial layer of hexagonal or pentagonal
squamosal cells, which are disposed in a
regular way (Tyler and Miller, 1985).
Differentiation of the pad leads to prismatic
epithelial cells. Their surface is usually
hexagonal or pentagonal, as is that of
generalized cells, but their height is more
important than in the latter. They are
separated in their distal part forming deep
crypts.
In the dermis of amphibians both
mucous and venomous glands are present.
Their aperture is situated between the
epithelial cells of the epidermis. On the pad
1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 86
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 1. Classification of Dicroglossinae and Raninae as proposed by Dubois (1992) and numbers of
species studied here. D: digital pad or expanded digit tip present in some species at least; M: some species at
least in the genus Micrixalus in the classification given by Frost (1985); R: some species at least in the
genus Rana in the classification given by Frost (1985); the number indicates the number of species here
studied by morphometry, external morphology and/or scanning electron microscopy.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 87
FIG. 1 . Generalized plan of digital pad. Left dorsal view; right ventral view, c: cover; df: dorsal fold; tk:
terminal knuckle; eg: circumferential groove; p: pad; bg: basal groove.
FIG. 2. Digital pad of Raninae with latero-ventral groove (Rana (Hylarana) erythraea, MNHN 1987.3343,
Thailand), a: dorsal view of finger III; b: ventral view of finger III; stippled area corresponds to the pad with
prismatic cells.
only openings of mucous glands can be
observed.
The first authors (Schuberg, 1895;
Siedlecki, 1910; Noble and Jaeckle, 1928)
supposed that the products of the mucous
glands were implicated in sticking function.
To complete sticking the epidermal cells
would allow attachement to natural surfaces
that are covered with irregularities (Welsch,
Storck and Fuchs, 1974), somehow close to
the mechanism of clinging in lizards. But
lizards differ substantially from amphibians
in having a dry or setal adhesive system
(Green and Carson, 1988).
Emerson and Diehl (1980) and Green
(1981) independently showed that surface
tension was mechanically responsible for the
adhesive abilities of treefrog digital pads.
As the surfaces of plants have usually a low
surface tension, the structure of the pad cells
assures humidification responsible for
adhesion. The grooves surrounding the pad
Vol. 6, p. 88
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG 3. Digital pad of Dicroglossinae with dorso-tcrminal groove (Limnonectes (Bourretia) doriae, MNHN
1987.3130, Thailand), a: dorsal view of toe IV; b: ventral view of toe IV; stippled area corresponds to the pad
with prismatic cells.
serve as a reservoir for the fluid wetting
agent (McAllister and Channing, 1983).
Numerous frog species with enlarged
digital tips have been studied (Hyperoliinae,
Hylidae, Telmatobiinae, Rhacophorinae,
and others), as well as the digital tips of
some species without enlarged digital tips.
Only some species of the family Ranidae
have been studied in this respect, including
only species without digital pad. Here I will
present the structure of digital pads and
digital pad cells of subfamilies of ranoids
according to Dubois' (1992) classification,
Ranixalinae, Dicroglossinae, Raninae,
Rhacophorinae and Hyperoliinae. They
include arboreal ("Hylarana") and torrent-
living frogs (Amolops) that have digital pads
with grooves and modified cells. For the
torrent-living frogs a mechanism of sticking
is proposed and the correlation of cell
morphology, digit tip enlargement and
biology of these frogs is outlined.
Material and methods
Specimens representing 15 of 34 genera
and subgenera, possessing digital pads, as
recognised by Dubois (1992) were chosen
in the collection of MNHN (see Table 1,
Appendix I). They had been generally
formalin fixed and all had been stored in 70
% alcohol. Finger II or IV or toe III were
cut on the terminal articulation. Cleaned
with ultrasonic sounds, they were
dehydrated in alcohol. After critical point
drying, they were gold covered (2-4 A).
Specimens were observed with the Scanning
electron microscope (JSM-840) of the
MNHN SEM facilities. Photographs were
taken on 120 Ilford FP4 film.
Measurements were taken with a slide
caliper (SVL) or a binocular microscope
(FW): SVL - snout-vent length; FW - third
finger width (maximum width of tip of third
finger). To eliminate size factor, FW is
given as a ratio of SVL (per thousand).
Terminology of digital pad
morphology (Fig. 1, 2, 3)
(1) The circumferential groove (Green and
Simon, 1986) (Fig. 1) surrounds the digit
tip latero-terminally and separating a dorsal
part from a ventral part. The groove may be
complete or open (with a distal zone of
contact between the dorsal and ventral part).
This is the generalized groove that is
modified in various manners according to
the group of frogs observed.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 89
- »i
FIG. 4. Squamosal cells with short spinulae,
ventral view, proximal of pad of finger III
(Batrachylodes vertebralis, MNHN 1970.1407,
Salomon Islands).
FIG. 5. Squamosal cells with microridges, ventral
view, outside the circumferential groove of finger HI
(Amolops marmoratus, MNHN 1988.2787, Nepal).
r "V* '.J* tf"SS
FIG. 6. Squamosal cells with spongious
structures, dorsall view, on subunguis close to the
dorso-tenninal fold of finger III (Ingerana tasanae,
MNHN 1987.2002, Thailand).
(a) The latero-ventral grooves (Ohler
and Dubois, 1989) (Fig. 2) close the pad,
that is of triangular shape, laterally. In some
species they join distally and close to a
unique groove arround an oval or rounded
pad.
(b) The dorso-terminal groove
(Ohler and Dubois, 1989) folds on the
dorsal part of the digit. The pad is of oval
or rounded form. In species where the
groove is more pronounced its lateral parts
can be observed ventrally (Fig. 3).
FIG. 7. Sqamosal cells with hallow tubercles,
ventral viw, proximal of pad of finger III {Ingerana
tasanae, MNHN 1987.2002, Thailand).
(2) The basal groove (Fig. 1) is the basal
limit of the digital pad. Fusion of this with
the circumferential groove results in a
circumplantar groove. The latter is not
present in all digital pad types.
(3) The ventral part is the proper
adhesive organ, the pad (Savage, 1987)
(Fig. 1). Its latero-terminal limits are
usually distinct formed by the groove. Its
basal limit is intergrading, and the basal
groove, if present, is not the limit of the
functional part as indicated by presence of
modified cells still beyond this limit distally.
Vol. 6, p. 90
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 2. Distribution of prismatic cell types and relative width of tip of third finger in ranoid frogs. - Cell
differentiation: L: elongated prismatic cells; R: regularly outshaped prismatic cells; H: cells of heterogeneous
shape; P: projections on proximal border of prismatic cellls; S: small projections on proximal border of
prismatic cells; N - no projections on prismatic cells; -: no prismatic cells in the digit tip. - Relative width of
tip of third finger, measured by FW/SVL: x: mean; s: standard deviation; n: number of specimens measured;
EV: extreme values of ratio FW/SVL in group.
(4) The dorsal part, the cover (Savage,
1987) (Fig. 1), does not show histological
specialisation.
(5) Proximally the cover is limited by the
dorsal fold (Fig. 1).
(6) Dorsally on fingers and toes a
terminal knuckle (Lynch, 1979) (Fig. 1) is
present in the area of distal articulations.
(7) The pad is generally entirely masked
by the cover, but in some cases it projects
distally. The part of the pad that is then
visible dorsally is called the subungis
(Lynch, 1979).
Results
The study of digital pads in Ranidae
gave interesting results concerning gross
morphology and its use for phylogeny
already published (Ohler and Dubois, 1989)
as well as new results concerning the type of
prismatic cells observed in the digital pad.
These microstructural results are exposed
below and a functional hypothesis is
proposed.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.6, p. 91
FIG. 8. Regular outshaped prismatic cells with
mucous gland pore on pad of finger III (Hyperolius
viridiflavus karissimbiensis, MNHN 1988.1055,
Rwanda).
FIG. 9. Elongated prismatic cells with disatal
projections on pad of finger III {Amolops sp. 1,
MNHN 1987.2163, Thailand).
FIG. 10. Elongated prismatic cells with distal
projections on pad of finger III {Amolops sp. 3,
MNHN 1987.2140, Thailand).
FIG. 1 1. Elongated prismatic cells with small
distal projections on pad of finger III {Amolops
marmoratus, MNHN 1988.2787, Nepal).
FIG. 12. Orientation and distribution of prismatic
cells on distal part of the digital pad of finger III of
Rana (Odorrana) andersoni (MNHN 1938.57,
Vietnam).
FIG. 1 3. Distribution of prismatic and sqamosal
cells on the extreme distal part of the digital pad of
finger III of Rana (Sylvirana) sp. (MNHN
1987.3471, Thailand).
Vol. 6, p. 92
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
The epidermal cells
On the tips of the digits one observes
two major cell types (squamosal cells and
prismatic cells) with intermediary cells that
occur in high numbers in the proximal pad
zone.
(1) Squamosal cells. This is the
generalized cell type, covering the body of
amphibians (Tyler and Miller, 1985). The
cells often show short spinulae (Fig. 4) or
structures called microridges (Fig. 5). In
Ingerana tasanae the surface of the
squamosal cells is extremely rough and can
show spongious structures (Fig. 6). On
other parts of the epiderm the surface of the
squamosal cells of Ingerana tasanae shows
hallow tubercles (Fig. 7). The squamosal
cells cover fingers and toes outside the pad.
The groove is generally the border, but
sometimes the squamosal cells are present
on the border of the pad {Rhacophorus
leucomystax) or in the contrary they are
pushed back by the prismatic cells even
outside the groove (Amolops).
(2) Prismatic cells. The prismatic cells
are present on the pad. They are of regular
outline in all the species already studied
(Green, 1979; Green and Simon, 1986;
McAllister and Channing, 1982; Richards et
al., 1977; Welsch, Strock, and Fuchs,
1974). Among the species studied here,
Hyperolius vividiflavus karissimbiensis and
Rhacophorus leucomystax have prismatic
cells of regular outline (Fig. 8) like those
found by previous authors. Also some
other species of ranids (Limnonectes
(Bourretia) doriae, Batrachylodes
vertebralis) have this kind of prismatic cells.
However, in most of the ranid species
investigated (Table 2) in this study, the
prismatic cells are not of regular outline but
elongated. Their long axis is oriented in the
proximo-distal direction on the digital pad.
The ratio of the width to the length of these
cells is smaller than 60%, while in normal
prismatic cells this ratio is over 80%, often
close to 100%. On their narrow distal side,
the elongated cells have more or less
developed projections.
In the species of the genus Amolops,
this kind of cells is present with well
developed projections (Fig. 9, 10). These
were also observed in different "subgenera"
of the genus Rana (Odorrana, Amnirana,
Hylarana, Chalcorana) and in Indirana
gundia (Ranixalinae). The prismatic cells of
these species vary in their elongation, in the
size of the projection, and in the degree of
regularity. They are often rather regularly
hexagonal, rounded proximally, with small
distal projections, as in Rana (Chalcorana)
chalconota and in Ingerana tasanae. In some
species the prismatic cells are elongated,
rounded proximally without projections
{Rana (Hylarana) erythraea). In other
species outlines are very variable among
neigbouring cells; the cells are elongated
forming a somehow triangular outshape
wearing a single or two distal projections
(Fig. 11). In all species of Amolops of this
study, this kind of elongated cells with
heterogeneous outlines was observed.
The prismatic cells are present outside
the latero-ventral grooves in Rana
(Odorrana) andersoni and in Amolops sp. 3.
Observation of direction of the channels
formed by the prismatic cells shows a
generalized alignement in the direction of the
space between the pair of lateral grooves
(Fig. 12). In other species the border of pad
is formed by squamosal cells, but a contact
between the ventral and dorsal part of digital
tip remains (ex. Rana (Sylvirana) sp., Fig.
13).
The development of the toe pad
The measurements of the digital width
(Table 2) show an important variation that
can be divided in several units. The species
Amolops formosus and Amolops
marmoratus show the most enlarged finger
pads (FW/SVL = 68 p.m.). Other species
of Amolops, but also Rana (Chalcorana),
Ingerana tasanae and Rhacophorus
leucomystax have very well developed
digital pads (FW/SVL = 47-57 p.m.). The
frogs of the subgenera Rana (Amnirana) and
Rana (Odorrana) show moderately enlarged
digital pads (FW/SVL = 35-43 p.m.). The
species of Rana (Sylvirana) and Rana
(Hylarana), as the species of the subgenus
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 93
FIG. 14. Scheme of liquid fluid on a digital pad with regular outshaped cells (left) and with elongated cells
(right).
Limnonectes (Bourretia) have very little
enlarged finger pads (FW/SVL = 22-28
p.m.). The species studied that show no
digital pad formation have the lowest ratios
(FW/SVL = 17-20 p.m.).
Discussion
The elongated cells here described in
some species of Ranidae have not been
described in other anuran families. In fact
the species that have been studied until now
are "treefrogs", and no torrent-living frogs
have yet been investigated. Considering the
ecology of the studied species, five types
can be distinguished: (1) torrent-living frogs
of the genus Amolops, Rana (Odorrana) (the
possible sister-group of Amolops) and Rana
(Amnirana); Ingerana tasanae should be
placed in this group; (2) aquatic frogs, like
Limnonectes (Limnonectes) kuhlii and
Phrynoglossus laevis; (3) terrestrial frogs of
the genus Limnonectes (Bourretia) and Rana
(Hydrophylax); (4) ground/vegetation living
frogs of the genera Rana (Hylarana), Rana
(Sylvirana), and Rana (Chalcorana); (5)
arboreal frogs (Hyperolius, Rhacophorus).
Actually the Raninae, the Dicroglossinae
and the Ranixalinae do not include strictly
arboreal species. The closest group of
treefrogs are the Rhacophorinae, an other
subfamily of Ranidae. Hyperolius
viridiflavus karissimbiensis is another
ranoid treefrog studied. Rhacophorus
leucomystax, Hyperolius viridiflavus
karissimbiensis and the species studies by
the previous authors (Green, 1979; Green
and Simon, 1986; Richards et al., 1977;
McAllister and Channing, 1982; Welsch,
Strock, and Fuchs, 1974) have prismatic
cells of regular outshape. This kind of
regular cells was here also observed in
Limnonectes (Bourretia) doriae and
Limnonectes (Bourretia) pileata, two
terrestial species. Elongation of digital pad
cells in Amolops, Rana (Odorrana), and
Rana (Amnirana) might be in relationship
with their mode of life. The presence of
elongated cells in Rana (Hylarana) and in
Rana (Sylvirana) might indicate
Vol. 6, p. 94
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
phylogenetic relationship to Amolops. The
heterogeneous cells in some of these species
might indicate a regression in comparison to
the elongated cells with projections in
Amolops. The functional analysis of cell
morphology underlines this interpretation.
The major sticking force of tree frogs is
surface tension (Emerson and Diehl, 1980;
Green, 1981). It is a kind of wet adhesion,
where two surfaces are hold together by an
interlaying liquid. The prismatic cells, the
channels and the mucous glands are required
in the humidification mechanism necessary
for sticking. For torrent-living frogs the
surfaces to stick to are already humid or in a
liquid medium. In liquid the force is no
more proportional to the surface, but to the
squared surface which reduces the sticking
force to its square root (Emerson and Diehl,
1980). When sticking to glass at an angle of
90 to 180 , a treefrog is inmerged in water,
it will separate almost immediately (Emerson
and Diehl, 1980). The force of attachment
in liquid medium is inversely proportional to
the distance of the two surfaces, separated
by the liquid.
To provide a good sticking in water, the
surface of the pads should be enlarged.
Some of the species of Amolops, as
Amolops formosus or Amolops marmoratus
have in fact very much enlarged digital pads
(Table 2). A correlation between the digital
pad development, as defined by the groups
A, B, C, D and E see Table 2), and the
ecology of the species may be found. The
terrestial species and the aquatic frogs
belong to the group A. The group B
includes ground/vegetation-living frogs.
The torrent-living frogs are distributed in
three groups: C {O dorr ana, Amnirana and
Huia), D (Amolops, Ingerana), E (Amolops
formosus and Amolops marmoratus). The
treefrogs (Rhacophorus, Hyperolius) are all
members of the group D, thus not the
species with the largest digital pads.
Elimination of the distance between the
pad and the surface to stick to will increase
attachment force equally and more distinctly.
In treefrogs the regular cells guide the fluids
in all directions, thus humidifying the whole
pad in a regular manner and optimizing the
use of liquid (Fig. 14). The elongated cells
of Amolops guide the liquid in the disto-
proximal direction. The digital pad is not
closed posteriorly and often also anteriorly
by a groove, and prismatic cells are not
restricted to the pad surface, but are also
present in the groove and outside to it.
Water can flow out of the pad and distance
from pad to sticking surface is minimized,
thus increasing the sticking force inversely.
It would be interesting to compare the
cell morphology of torrent-living frogs of
other anuran families, like Ansonia
(Bufonidae), Petropedetes
(Phrynobatrachidae), some Litoria and Hyla
(Hylidae) and Heleophryne
(Heleophrynidae) to what is here described
in Raninae. A more detailed morphological
analysis of surface of digital pads should be
undertaken to compare sticking surface in
tree and torrent-living frogs.
Acknowledgments
The photos of this work were realized
with the precious help of Jean Menier in the
facilities of the "Service Commun de
Microscopie electronique" of the Museum
national d'Histoire naturelle of Paris. I
express my gratitude to Alain Dubois for
advice and discussion.
Literature Cited
BOULENGER, G. A. 1882. Catalogue of the
Batrachia Salientia s.Ecaudata in the collection of
the British Museum. London, Taylor and Francis: i-
xvi+ 1-503, pi. I-XXX.
BOULENGER, G. A. 1920. A monograph of the
South Asian, Papuan, Melanesian, and Australian
frogs of the genus Rana. Rec. Indian Mus. 20:1-
126.
CLARKE, B. T. 1981. Comparative osteology and
evolutionary relationship in the African Raninae
(Anura Ranidae). Monit. zool. ital. (n. s. ) 15
suppl. :285-331.
DECKERT, K. 1938. Beitrage zur Osteologie und
Systematic ranider Froschlurche. Sber. Ges. naturf.
FreundeBerl. 1938:127-184.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 95
DUBOIS, A. 1987. Miscellanea taxinomica
batrachologica (I). Alytes 5:7-95.
DUBOIS, A. 1992. Notes sur la classification des
Ranidae (Amphibiens Anoures). Bull. mens. Soc.
linn. Lyon 61:305-352.
EMERSON, S. B. AND D BERRIGAN. 1993.
Systematics of southeast Asian ranids: multiple
origins of voicelessness in the subgenus
Limnonectes (Fitzinger). Herpctologica 49:22-3 1 .
EMERSON, S. B. AND D DIEHL. 1980. Toe pad
morphology and mechanisms of sticking in frogs.
Biol. J. Linn. Soc. 13:199-216
ERNST, V. V. 1973 a. The digital pads of the
treefrog Hyla cinerea. I. The epidermis. Tissue Cell
5:83-96.
ERNST, V. V. 1973 b. The digital pads of the
treefrog Hyla cinerea. II. The mucous glands.
Tissue Cell 5:97-104.
FROST, D. R. (ed. ) 1985. Amphibian species of
the world. Lawrence, Allen Press and Assoc. Syst.
Coll.: (i- iv) + i - v + 1 - 732.
GREEN, D. M. 1979. Treefrog toe pads:
comparative surface morphology using scanning
electron microscopy. Canadian J. Zool. 57:2033-
2046.
GREEN, D. M. 1980. Size differences in adhesive
toe-pad cells of treefrogs of the diploid-polyploid
Hyla versicolor complex. J. Herpet. 14:15-19.
GREEN, D. M. 1981. Adhesion and the toe-pads of
treefrogs. Copeia 1981:790 - 796.
GREEN, D. M. AND J. CARSON. 1988. The
adhesion of treefrog toe-pads to glass: cryogenic
examination of a capillary adhesion system. Austr.
J. nat. Hist. 22:131-135.
GREEN, D. M. AND M. P. SIMON. 1986. Digital
microstructure in ecologically diverse sympatric
microhylid frogs, genera Cophixalus and
Sphenophryne (Amphibia: Anura), from Papua New
Guinea. Austr. J. Zoo. 34:135-145.
HILLIS, D. M. 1985. Evolutionary genetics and
systematics of New World frogs of the genus Rana:
an analysis of ribosomal DNA, allozymes, and
morphology. Thesis, The University of Kansas, i-
vi+ 1-304.
KOMNICK, H. AND W. STOCKEM. 1969.
Oberflache und Verankerung des Stratum comeum an
mechanisch stark beanspruchten Korperstelllen beim
Grasfrosch. Cytobiologie 1:1-16.
LIEM, S. S. 1970. The morphology, systematics,
and evolution of the Old World treefrogs
(Rhacophoridae and Hyperoliidae). Fieldiana: Zool.
57: i-vii + 1-145.
LYNCH, J. D. 1979. A new genus for Elosia
duidensis Rivero (Amphibia, Leptodactylidae) from
Southern Venezuela. Amer. Mus. Novit. 2680:1-8.
MCALLISTER, W. AND A. CHANNING. 1983.
Comparison of toe-pads of some southern African
climbing frogs. S. Afr. J. Zool. 18:110-114.
NOBLE, G. K. AND M. E. JAECKLE. 1928. The
digital pads of the tree frogs. A study of the
phylogenesis of an adaptive structure. J. Morphol.
Physiol. 45:259-292.
OHLER, A. AND A. DUBOIS. 1989.
Demonstration de l'origine independante des
ventouses digitales dans deux lignees
phylogenetiques de Ranidae (Amphibiens, Anoures).
C. r. Acad. Sci. Paris 309 (3):4 19-422.
RICHARDS, C. M., B. M. CARLSON, T. G.
NONNELLY, S. L. ROGERS AND E. ASHCROFT.
1977. A scanning electron microscopic study of
differentiation of the digital pad in the Kenyan reed
frog Hyperolius viridiflavus ferniquei. J. Morphol.
153:387-396.
SAVAGE, J. M. 1987. Systematics and distribution
of the Mexican and central American rainfrogs of the
Eleutherodactylus gollmeri group (Amphibia:
Leptodactylidae). Fieldiana: Zool. (n. s) 33:i-iv + 1-
57.
SCHUBERG, A. 1895. Uber den Bau und die
Funkuon der Haftapparate des Laubfrosches. Arb.
zool. zootom. Inst. Wiirzburg 10:57-118.
SIEDLECKI, M. 1910. Die Haftballen des
javanischen Flugfrosches (Polypedates reinwardtii).
Bull. Anat. Rec. 185:253-257.
TYLER, M. J. AND C. A. MILLER. 1985. Surface
architecture of the dorsal epidermis in Australian
frogs. Trans. Roy. Soc. South Austr. 109 (2):45-
48.
WELSCH, U., V. F. STORCH, AND W. FUCHS.
1974. The fine structure of the digital pads of
rhacophorid treefrogs. Cell Tissue Res. 148:407-
416.
Vol. 6, p. 96
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
APPENDIX I
Specimens studied by scanning electronmicroscopy (origin and reference in the
catalogue of the Museum national d'Histoire naturelle of Paris).
Species studied
Origin
Collection Number
Amolops (Amolops) formosus
Amolops (Amolops) marmoratus
Amolops (Amolops) sp. 1
Amolops (Amolops) sp. 2
Amolops (Amolops) sp. 3
Amolops (Huia) kinabaluensis
Amolops (Huia) nasicus
Batrachylodes vertebralis
Rana (Amnirana) albolabris
Rana (Amnirana) lepus
Rana (Chalcorana) chalconota
Rana (Hydrophylax) galamensis
Rana (Hylarana) erythraea
Rana (Odorrana) andersoni
Rana (Sylvirana) sp.
Ingerana tasanae
Limnonectes (Limnonectes) kuhlii
Limnonectes (Bourretia) doriae
Limnonectes (Bourretia) pileatus
Phrynoglossus laevis
Platymantis corrugatus
Rhacophorus leucomystax
Hyperolius viridiflavus karissimbiensis
Indirana gundia
Namdu Khola, Nepal MNHN 1994.5559
Timal, Nepal MNHN 1988.2787
Khao Chong, Thailand MNHN 1987.2163
Doi Inthanon, Thailand MNHN 1987.2082
Phu Kradung, Thailand MNHN 1987.2140
Kina Balu, Borneo MNHN 1889.240
Hanoi region, Vietnam MNHN 1938.70
Bougainville, Solomon MNHN 1970.1407
Islands
Liberia MNHN 1989.3456
Central African Republic MNHN 1968.247
Khao Chong, Thailand MNHN 1987.3490
"Afrique Orientale Francaise" MNHN 1920.145
Chiangmai, Thailand MNHN 1987.3343
Vietnam MNHN 1938.57
Doi Pui, Thailand MNHN 1987.3471
Khao Phra Tiu, Thailand MNHN 1987.2002
Phu Kradung, Thailand MNHN 1987.3332
Khao Chong, Thailand MNHN 1987.3130
Phu Kradung, Thailand MNHN 1987.3140
Khao Chong, Thailand MNHN 1987.2944
New Guinea MNHN 1989.3461
Khao Chong, Thailand MNHN 1987.3544
Gihirwa river, Rwanda MNHN 1988.1055
Gundia, India MNHN 1985.607
1. Formerly Amolops afghanus: see Dubois (1992: 340).
I June 1<W5
Asiatic HerpetoloRical Research
Vol. 6, pp. 97-110
Social Organization and Demography in the Rock Agama, Stellio caucasius
EUGENY N. PANOV AND LARISA Y. ZYKOVA
Severtsov Institute of Animal Evolutionary Morphology and Ecology, Russian Academy of Sciences,
Leninsky Prospect 33, Moscow 117071 , Russia
Abstract. -We studied the social organization and demography of the rock agama Stellio caucasius in a
natural population, located in Gobustan (eastern Azerbaijan, approximately 60 km south of Baku) and in an
introduced population in the small Karadag Range near Krasnovodsk (western Turkmenistan). We found that
these populations are highly stable with low turnover. This appears to be the result of delayed reproduction,
longevity and a sedentary life style. Population growth is relatively slow due to high juvenile mortality and
low immigration rates from adjacent subpopulations. The age structure of all subpopulations studied was
dominated by older age classes. Rock agamas exhibit those natural history and population characteristic of a
K selected species.
Key words: Agamidae, age, Azerbaijan, density dependence, K-strategy, Lacertilia, ontogenetic trajectories,
polygyny, population dynamics, social behavior, spacing, Stellio caucasius, survivorship, mortality,
territoriality, translocation, Turkmenistan.
FIG. 1. Adult (10+ years old) male Stellio caucasius perched on basking site (left); adult female S.
caucasius (right).
Introduction
Long-term mark and recapture studies of
natural populations have become important
in recent decades due to their great power in
demonstrating population parameters.
These investigations permit the testing of
hypotheses concerning the mechanisms
governing population parameters. The
ability to follow particular individuals
through time reveals the scale of behavioral
heterogeneity within the local population. It
also allows the examination of these
population parameters as a function of age
or changing social status.
This approach has already gained firm
position in the population studies of birds
and mammals, but it has only recently been
broadly employed in reptile studies.
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 98
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG. 2. Regional distribution (cross hatched area)
of Stellio caucasius (upper plate). Specific study
sites in Azerbaijan and the Turkmen Republic: 1)
Gobustan; 2) Krasnovodsk; 3) Bol'shoi Balkhan
Range; 4) Kyurendag Range; 5) lower Sumbar
River; 6) Parkhai Gorge; 7) Kalaligez; 8) Aidere
(lower plate).
Although this method is used in modern
herpetology rather frequently, it is oriented
mainly toward answering the questions of
traditional population ecology (dynamics of
numbers and sex-age composition of local
populations, modes of spacing in the context
of resource utilization by communities and
species, etc.). In behavioral ecology, and
particularly with respect to the fates of
particular individuals and their social
relationships, the reptiles in general and
lizards in particular remain poorly studied
(for review see Semenov, 1989).
The rock agama, Stellio caucasius, is an
ideal subject for the study of behavioral
aspects of population organization in reptiles
that are K strategists. This is a long-lived
lizard attaining an age of ten or more years
(Zykova and Panov, 1991). Many
populations are characterized by high and
very high density. Most individuals
demonstrate strong home area fidelity.
Adults live in small social groups in which
the lizards form long lasting pair bonds
(Panov and Zykova, 1985; 1989).
This paper examines the social
interactions within local settlements of rock
agamas and analyzes the role of social
behavior as a regulator of demographic
processes.
Methods and Materials
Rock agamas are large lizards with an
overall length of up to 30 cm. and weighing
up to 160 gm. Males are on average larger
than females and have a heavier build.
General background color is a mixture of
gray, brown and olive with a darker, dull
spotted pattern on the back and sides.
During the breeding season males differ
from females by having black on the breast,
contrasting with pale or pinkish-gray on the
throat (Fig. 1). In males, there is light gray
epidermal holocrine gland in the center of
the blackish-gray belly. These lizards are
typical inhabitants of stony landscapes,
although some populations have become
adapted to the life on the steep slopes of clay
canyons or even at the margins of the sandy
desert (Ananyeva and Ataev 1984; Panov,
Zykova, Glauzer and Vasil'ev, 1987).
The bulk of data presented here was
obtained during a comparative study of two
populations of rock agama: a natural
population, located in Gobustan (eastern
Azerbaijan, approximately 60 km south of
Baku) and in an introduced population in the
small Karadag Range near Krasnovodsk
(western Turkmenia) where rock agamas
were known to be absent earlier (Fig. 2). In
the second area, on 17 May 1985, we
introduced into an abandoned quarry 13
adult males, 19 adult females, 13 two year
old lizards and 25 juveniles born in the
preceding year. All these animals were
caught in the Blocky Balkan Range situated
some 160 km from the introduction site.
The latter lies in view of Krasnovodsk
Plateau known to be a part of rock agama
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 99
1 «"2 c'3 94
FIG. 3. Territory structure in Gobustan (A) and Aidere (B): 1) territory boundaries; 2) breeding males; 3)
subordinate males; 4) females.
breeding range (Ataev, 1985). The
introduction site is similar to the dry
semidesert habitats of rock agamas found in
Gobustan. The predominately stony surface
is covered by very sparse grasses, but trees
and bushes, in contrast with Gobustan, are
wholly absent. The experimental plot was
situated in a broad, dry valley with steep
slopes broken by narrow ravines and rifts.
The numerous cavities and cracks under and
between the stones provided abundant
temporary and permanent shelters for the
lizards. Prior to release all introduced
agamas were marked by toe clipping.
In Gobustan, on the natural plot of 0.65
hectares, capturing, marking and
observations were conducted in April 1987
and 1988; in spring of 1986 and 1989 we
performed censuses and selective capture of
lizards. In Krasnovodsk, on the introduced
population, field work was carried out 24
April - 6 May 1986, 22 - 25 March and 30
April - 18 May 1987, 26 April - 17 May
1988, 5 - 10 April and 28 April - 23 May
1989, 15-25 May and 10-11 September
1990 (total of 103 days). Some
observations were made during short visits
in the summer and fall from 1985 to 1989.
Important additional data were obtained
during the course of field studies conducted
on two marked populations in western
Kopetdag near Kara-Kala settlement (Sjunt-
Khasardag State Reserve). An
observational plot in Parkhai Gorge was
inspected in the spring months of 1986 and
1989 and in September - October 1986 -
1988; a population in the Kalaligez area was
investigated in the fall of 1984 - 1987 (total
of 25 days).
In all of the above study plots we carried
out total censuses of lizards in the areas
under study. Most of the agamas observed
on the plots were captured. They were
measured with a ruler and calipers according
to standard procedures, weighed and
Vol. 6, p. 100
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
0115
ES3! S2 E33 \^4 S5
• 6 07 38 -9 ^10 [2311
FIG. 4. Krasnovodsk experimental study plot. A. Map of study site. B. Cross-section of the study . C.
Distribution of rock agamas in 1985. D. Distribution of rock agamas in 1986. E. Distribution of rock
agamas in 1988. F. Distribution of rock agamas in 1989. 1. Dry creek bed. 2. Large rocks and boulders.
3. Cross-section illustrated in Fig. 4B. 4. Talus. 5. Communal winter shelter. 6. Adult male. 7. Adult
female. 8. Second-year lizard. 9. Yearling. 10. Territory boundary. 11. Subordinate male home range
boundary. Numbers refer to individual lizards.
photographed. Animals caught for the first
time were marked by toe clipping. Prior to
release all agamas received individual color
marks made with dye. The locations of all
individuals on the plots were mapped.
The ages of agamas were estimated
using standardized size criteria (Zykova and
Panov, 1991). We assumed that the age of
individuals corresponds to the number of
winter hibernations. So, the ages of agamas
captured in spring will be slightly over-
estimated. Our "yearlings" in May are
actually about 10 months old; "two year old"
lizards in May are approximately a year and
10 months old, etc.
Altogether 426 agamas were captured
and marked, 144 of them were observed a
total of 273 times during subsequent years.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 101
Results and Discussion
Spacing Patterns in Rock Agama
Settlements
The baseline of spacing pattern of a
whole social organization in Rock Agama is
a mosaic of mutually exclusive territories
owned by mature adult males. Mature
females have either mutually exclusive or
overlapping home ranges situated within
territories of those males with which the
given female is tied by the family bonds.
The adult female, as a rule, does not leave
the territory of "her" male. Therefore, the
territory of adult breeding male, if there is
female(s) living in it (which is not
necessarily the case) in the same time the
territory of pair or a family group defended
as a whole by the breeding male only.
The home ranges of immature lizards
one and two years of age may lie both
within the territory of the family group or
outside in the neutral zones separating such
territories. The home range of an immature
male during the first years of life within an
adult male territory, shifts to the periphery
of this territory as the immature male
becomes older. In contrast, the home range
of an immature female adjacent to that of an
adult male shifts with time toward the male's
territory.
In saturated habitats all suitable space is
shared among adult males, so that
neighboring territories have common
boundaries. The size of territories in such
saturated habitats depends on the substrate
and local food abundance (Fig. 3). In
barren habitats of Gobustan with low
microrelief (absence of talus mounds, in
particular) the size of adult male territories
was found to vary from 100 to 210 m2
(140.0 15.8 m2 on average). In the middle
altitudes of the Western Kopetdag
Mountains (Canyon Ai-Dere, see Fig. 3B)
where the climate is more humid and the
vegetation is rich and diverse and the
substrate includes jumbles of fallen rocks
and boulders, the size of territories was
found to range from 28 to 136 m2 (94.0 ±
16.3 m2 on average), for details see Panov
and Zykova (1985).
Formation of Territorial Structure
We followed the establishment of
territorial structure in the course of our long-
term observations on the Krasnovodsk
introduced population. Here 13 male
"founders" were released into an area that
would have supported a population of a
density comparable to that in natural
colonies of rock agamas. Males were
released into deep holes and crevices which
seemed to us to be similar to hollows
normally used by rock agamas as their
permanent dens.
However, contrary to our expectations,
the majority of introduced males left the area
where they had been released, and moved
away at distances ranging from 60 to 500
m. Only three males remained in proximity
to the release site by the next spring. At that
time the territory of only one male (N 56)
overlapped the release site. The boundaries
of two other males (NN 36 and 31)
territories were 60 and 100 m respectively
from the release site (Fig. 4 c, d).
The process of territory establishment
adjacent to the release site is shown in Fig. 4
c-f. During 1986, the year following
introduction, adult male territories were
large and had no common boundaries (Fig.
4d). Since male rock agamas do not patrol
the borders of their territories (as, for
example, males of steppe agama, Trapelus
sanguinolentus, do (see Panov and Zykova,
1986), it is difficult to locate precisely the
boundary between territories and, therefore
to estimate exactly the real territory size.
The greatest territory diameter was estimated
in 1986 on the experimental plot as 140 m,
with the width of the neutral zones
separating neighboring territories as some
20-60m. The small, indistinctly demarcated
home ranges of three immature lizards
(males NN 30 and 61, and female N 41, all
less than two years old) were situated in
these neutral zones (Fig. 4e). Other
immatures approximately two years old
established their home ranges within the
territories of mature males, as well as four
Vol. 6, p. 102
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
lizards born already in place of introduction
in preceding year.
In 1988, the third year after
introduction, most of the area that in 1987
was neutral zone was shared among
relatively young males of about four years
of age (NN 30 and 61) and three years of
age (N 1 15 already born on the introduction
site). Although these males apparently had
attained maturity, they seemed to be
bachelors at that time. Three year old male
N 1 15 and four year old female N 74 were
repeatedly seen in 1988 in close proximity
(10-15 m) to each other, but we did not
witness immediate contacts between them.
In 1989, the fourth year after
introduction, slight changes in territorial
structure were observed (Fig. 4e). There
was some tendency toward clumping of
territories toward each other, possibly
because of the increasing density of lizards.
Male N 61 (about five years old) left his
adolescent bachelor home range and
occupied the territory of deceased male N 31
and established a bond with his former
mate, a female of eight or nine years of age.
The corpse of male N 31 indicated that he
had died between June 1988 and April
1989. Relatively young male N 115
occupied the territory of five to six year old
male N 4a after he disappeared. Female N
74 moved into the territory of 10 to 11 year
old male N 3.
Dynamics of Space Utilization Within a
Home Area
During the hot periods of the year, each
individual had at least one permanent den
and one to several observational posts (used
also as basking sites) where it spent
considerable time, except during periods of
foraging. In individuals about one year old
or younger the den and basking site were the
same or immediately adjacent. Usually the
shelter was situated under a boulder or rock
on which the lizard basked. Foraging
activities of juveniles and yearlings take
place within a radius of several meters of the
individual dens. Many subadults of both
sexes and some adult females behave in a
similar way, although during foraging they
often move greater distances from the den,
up to several tens of meters.
During the day adult males range more
widely. The several posts of a male are
connected by a network of relatively
permanent pathways. The territory is
utilized unevenly with some points located
along the pathways receiving regular use
while others, situated at some distance from
the pathways being visited only occasionally
or not used at all during a given season.
This pattern of territorial use can result
in changes in territorial boundaries. For
example, by comparing the positions "c",
"d", and "e" in Fig. 4, one can see that in
1988 the border of the territory of male N 36
shifted 30-40 m eastward from its position
in 1986. Such shifts are possible in non-
saturated habitats only. In established rock
agama settlements with dense populations
the boundaries remain constant from year to
year.
In relatively sparse Krasnovodsk
population the cases of mutual intrusions by
neighboring males into neutral zones
separated their territories and even into
peripheral parts of these territories
themselves are possible. The above said
does not hold in respect to male-
"pretenders", or "satellites". Their home
ranges may broadly overlap the peripheral
parts of two or more territories of adult
"resident" males (see, for example, home
ranges of male-pretenders NN 30 and 61 in
Fig. 4). In saturated habitats home ranges
of satellites are practically always situated
within the territories of resident males.
By the winter the agamas leave their
summer home areas and migrate to
communal hibernation shelters. Migrations
begin when air temperatures are relatively
high (25° C and above). Communal winter
dens may be situated up to 500 m from an
individual's home area. On 23 March 1987
on the Krasnovodsk experimental plot,
when only a few agamas had returned to
their summer areas from the communal
hibernation shelter (daily temperatures
ranged from 2° C to 16.5° C) we found in
that shelter males NN 21, 27, 36, 61,
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 103
females NN 22 and 58 (ages from two to
seven years) and subadult male N 105.
Summer residences of these lizards are
shown in Fig. 4, home areas of others were
located 100 - 500 m from the communal
winter den.
Individual Ontogenetic Trajectories
An ontogenetic trajectory is defined as a
sequence of changes in social status and of
social roles of an individual during its life
(Wiley 1981). In rock agamas social
behavior and social status of individuals of
both sexes appear to be similar during the
first two years of their lives. But thereafter
ontogenetic trajectories of males and females
become progressively divergent.
It is not known if lizards remain in the
vicinity of their birth place during their lives.
Among those juveniles (n=61) that were
captured on the two plots in the western
Kopetdag at the end of September and the
beginning of October (i.e. at the age of two
to three months), only five (8.2%) were
observed near the places of their first capture
(within a radius of 25 m) in next year. The
proportion of such recaptures on one of the
two plots was as high as 25%, while on
another plot none of 41 juveniles caught
during preceding fall was observed later on.
Unfortunately of all those juveniles that
were captured during the first months of
their lives, it remains unknown whether they
remained near their birthplaces or if they
dispersed by the time of capturing
(dispersion of juveniles just after hatching
has been described for Anolis aeneus ;
Stamps, 1988).
More definitive results were obtained
from recaptures of those first year lizards
that were initially captured soon after their
first winter hibernation, in April and May.
Of those lizards 64.5% (20 of 31) were
observed regularly within a radius of 10 to
50 m from the place of their first capture, in
some cases over a period of several years.
First year animals initially occupy small
home ranges of about 10 m in diameter both
outside the territories of adult males (5 males
and 5 females in Krasnovodsk population
in 1985) and within such territories (4 males
and 5 females). When the home ranges of
first year lizards were immediately adjacent
their interactions appeared to be agonistic.
In some cases between adjacent home
ranges a well defined boundary was
established and both neighbors displayed
pronounced territorial behavior toward each
other. In other cases the home ranges
overlapped and a stable rank order was
formed so that one lizard appeared to
dominate the other in the overlap zone.
Generally, the mature members of the
settlement behave indifferently toward
yearlings. However, in periods of high
sexual activity adults may chase the
yearlings short distances.
After the second winter the young
agamas returned from communal den to their
original summer home area where they
knew the topography of the place and their
foraging routes became longer and
pioneering of new feeding places and new
temporary shelters began. Apparent
differences between social behaviors of
young males and females began to emerge
only after their third winter, at an age of
more than 30 months.
Male Ontogenetic Trajectories
Males participate in reproduction only
after they have acquired a territory. Males
continue to reproduce until the end of their
lives. For example, on the Krasnovodsk
plot male N 3 in 1989 at an age of
approximately 12 years had a large territory
that included four adult females of different
ages and two immature females. In addition
the same year we observed interactions
between this male and immature female N
161 in the border zone between his territory
and that of male N 6 1 .
If, on the given territory, the only one
female lives, in the case of her
disappearance a holder of territory becomes
a widower. He however, subsequently
does not try to search for females outside his
territory. In Gobustan, such case of
widowhood was observed in about 6 years
old male. A more young male, evidently,
may also turn out to be a widower.
Vol. 6, p. 104
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 1. Composition and age structure of family groups of the experimental introduced
population at Krasnovodsk and the natural population at Gobustan.
Krasnovodsk
Gobustan
Year
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1986
1987
1988
minimum estimated age.
Female Ontogenetic Trajectories
Female rock agamas are able to reproduce at
about three years of age. By this age to be a
successful breeder, a female should
establish a stable bond with a male territory
holder and obtain constant shelters within
his territory. For a female that had a
juvenile home area within a male's territory
the process of assimilation into a family
group and establishment of a bond with the
male is very direct. An example of this was
female N103 who was observed for the first
time in 1986 as a first year juvenile living on
the territory of male N 56 where she
continued to stay at least until 1989 (see Fig.
4d-f and Table 1A).
Females that had juvenile home areas on the
periphery of an adult male's territory, in the
home range of a non-territorial satellite male,
or in a neutral zones where sexually active
males were totally absent usually left and
attempted to establish a bond with a territory
holding male. This process of selection of a
male and territory may take several years
and involve short stays in the areas of
several males. For example, female N 101,
originally having frequented the territory of
male N 56,
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 105
1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990
Cl J* „
B
Jj
1987 1988
D
. I
1986 1989
1987 1988 1989
1985 1986 1987
mmi CZI2 EE33 VHZ34
FIG. 5. Population structure of study populations.
A. Krasnovodsk. B. Gobustan. C,. Parkhai
Gorge (spring). Cr Parkhai Gorge (fall). D.
.Kalaligez. 1. Yearlings. 2. Second-year lizards.
3. Adult males. 4. Adult females.
subsequently over a period of 3 years
(1988-1990) was resident of the neutral area
visited at different time by two adult
territorial males (NN 56 and 36). Female N
74 resided at ages of a little less than 4 years
temporal home range of 3 year old male N
115 in next year moved on to territory of
male N 3 (Fig. 4 e,f) who
became a permanent target for her courtship
displays.
It is useful to describe shortly a peculiar
courtship behavior of females addressed by
them towards males, which we regard as a
very important mechanism contributing to
establishment and maintenance of personal
bonds between mating partners. At sight of
a male young female moves to him and at
once tries to climb onto his back. A male,
as a rule, during first minutes of contact
tolerates these actions of female who is
crawling over him in different directions and
makes insistent attempts to crawl under him.
After that male behaves as if he is inclined to
retire, while a female pursues him and
repeats her actions. Such a behavior is quite
characteristic of females younger age
classes, even of those lesser than 2 years
old. The behavior retains in older puberal
females, although, contrary to expectation, it
almost never occurs prior to actual sexual
interactions, i.e. copulations. Once a female
has selected a male she begins to co-habit
his shelters. Where there are several
females on a territory usually the oldest
female cohabits with the male.
The home ranges of adult females
overlap broadly, especially if the territory is
large. However, some older females exhibit
territorial behavior in the vicinity of their
shelters, basking sites and foraging areas
when approached by other older female.
Females leave the territory of their
family groups only for egg laying and to
migrate to communal winter shelters. We
did not observe emigration or dispersal of
females. Over the five year study of the
Krasnovodsk population the time of
residence of adult females introduced in
1985 ranged from one to five years (mean =
2.5 ± 0.6, n=6).
Family Groups
The mode of sexual relations in rock
agama settlement may be defined as a
territorial facultative polygyny. As many as
four females may establish bonds with a
territorial male. In the natural Gobustan
population there were 1.73 females per male
on territories. In the introduced
Krasnovodsk population the average
number of females per male was increasing
as population structure matured. Over the
duration of our study the average number of
females within the family groups was 1.33
(1988), 1.86 (1989) and 2.43 (1990).
The term "family group" is not quite
precise since each female enters into such a
unit independently from other females. Any
personal or functional bonds between female
members appear to be absent. Only
relations between the territorial male and
each of the females may be regarded as
bonds.
The stability of such breeding units is
determined primarily by an association its
Vol. 6, p. 106
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 3. Survival of rock agamas introduced as adults in the Krasnovodsk experimental plot in
May 1985. The number of lizards alive is presented; the number is parentheses is the per cent
surviving since the previous year.
TABLE 2. Life table of a cohort of rock agama yearlings introduced into the experimental
population at Krasnovodsk.
1 =
_ f
_X1_
xl
dx = 1xi
lxi+1; qx=£x; px=l-qx(Caughley, 1977)
TABLE 5. Sex ratios in different rock agama populations (n).
Location
1985
1986
Year
1987
1988
1989
1990
Gobustan (spring)
1:1.1(31) 1:0.9(33)
Western Kopetdag
Parkhai Gorge
spring
fall
Kalaligez (fall)
1:0.9(21)
1:1(12) 1:0.8(18)
1:0.7(10)
1:1.2(11)
1:0.8(16)
1:1.6(13)
1:0.7(10)
Krasnovodsk (spring)
1:0.8(20) 1.1(30) 1.1(40) 1:0.9(47) 1:1.2(41)
Grand sex ratio for all localities summed = 1:0.98 (393).
member to certain shelters and to its home
range (or territory) as a whole. All this
seemingly explains why females accept so
readily a new male partner after the death
of a previous mate. For example, male N
36 established bonds with a single adult
female and two immature females (all from
the initial cohort of lizards simultaneously
introduced to the study plot) immediately
upon introduction (Table 1).
Subsequently, upon the deaths of these
females replacement females were
recruited from those subsequently born in
the colony.
Population Dynamics
Rock agamas are long lived and
predominately sedentary. Populations are
characterized by stable membership with
recruitment as the primary source of new
members. Emigration and immigration are
of minor importance. Each of these
factors were examined in the Krasnovodsk
population.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 107
The general picture of changes in the
relative proportions of immatures, matures
and sex ratio is shown in Fig. 5. It is
necessary to repeat that in 1985 the
original colonizing cohort was composed
primarily of immatures, this may have
resulted from capture sampling error. In
1986 the proportion of immatures to adults
was similar but in 1987 and 1988 the ratio
of immatures to adults was nearly equal.
Since 1988 adults have predominated.
Comparison with natural populations (Fig.
5) shows that adults predominate though
relative proportions may vary significantly
among areas and years. Sex ratio, males
to females, is generally equal (Fig. 5;
Table 5).
Recruitment
Surveys of juveniles were conducted
during the spring (Fig. 5) since few
lizards were active during the hottest
weather in summer and early fall.
Differences in the numbers of over
wintering juveniles may be attributable to
embryonic mortality or hatchling mortality
in the first months after emergence or over
the first winter.
Post Hatching Mortality and Survivorship
The survivorship of 25 juveniles
introduced into the Krasnovodsk
experimental plot are presented in Table 2.
We assumed that those lizards that
disappeared, that is, those not recaptured,
had died. Of the initial 25 hatchlings, 15
(10 females, five males) survived to
sexual maturity (three years) and of this
cohort four males (80%) and four females
(40%) survived six years, to the end of the
study. The annual survival rate (px)
ranged from 0.72 to 0.83.
We believe the high survivorship of
lizards in the Krasnovodsk experimental
plot during the first three years of life are
comparable to natural populations. We
tested this by comparing survivorship in a
cohort of 20 hatchlings, hatched in 1986,
1987, and 1988, that were first captured in
1987, 1988 and 1989 as yearlings.
Among these lizards 15 (75%) survived to
two years and 13 (65%) to three years of
age. Of those surviving to three years
were three males and 10 females.
Since the duration of this study was
approximately half the life span of a rock
agama, survivorship in animals older than
six years is based on indirect evidence.
We estimated the age, based on
standardized size criteria (Zykova and
Panov 1991) of adult lizards captured for
introduction onto the Krasnovodsk
experimental plot. Such age estimates are
at best imprecise but the adults in this
group ranged from three to 1 1 years with
78% being four to six years old (Table 3).
The maximum rate of disappearance
(which we attribute to mortality, not
emigration) occurs in the first year (Table
3) after introduction. From the second
year after introduction adult male
survivorship is nearly constant and
comparable to survivorship during the first
six years of life (Table 2). The more
variable mortality rates for females may be
due to small sample size.
We combined cohorts of lizards of
four, five and six years of age and
calculated survivorship and estimated
survivorship to the 9-11 year age class
(Table 4).
In general, survivorship in rock
agamas after the first winter following
hatching is relatively constant until the
eighth year. After the eighth year
mortality increases. The maximum
estimated age of for males was 12-14
years (n=4) and for females it was 9-10
years (n=2).
Sex Ratio
Although the rock agama social system
is territorial polygyny, the sex ratio among
adults does not differ significantly from
even one (Table 5). This relationship was
found at several localities throughout the
range and for all localities taken together.
Vol. 6, p.
108
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG. 6. Expansion of the introduced colony at
Krasnovodsk from 1985 to 1990. 1. Unsuitable
habitat. 2. Boundary of unsuitable habitat. 3.
Principal ridges. 4. Initial introduction site. 5.
Principal study area under regular observation. 6.
Subpopulation established by an introduced adult
male. 7. Subpopulation established by an
introduced immature male. 8. Subpopulation
established by offspring of introduced lizards. 9.
Single sighting of rock agama. 10. Boundary of
populated area in 1990.
Movement and Dispersion
Rock agamas display a high level of home
area fidelity. Juveniles that were marked
after their first winter were found to
remain within 50 m of that location up to
two years or until sexually mature (at two
to three years of age). Some data on the
capture of juveniles before their first
winter suggests that home site fidelity may
extend from the age of three or four
months to the end of life. Four of six
juveniles (66%) marked in October 1988
in the Parkhai Gorge (Western Kopetdag)
were found in the same place the next
spring. The maximum movement of
immature lizards was not greater than 300
m. A juvenile male first captured in
October 1985 before his first winter was
recaptured in 1987, 200 m from the first
capture location. He was recaptured in the
spring of 1988 as a mature male with a
territory 250 m from the previous capture
location and 100 m from the initial capture
point 3 1 months before.
As the population increases, new areas
will be pioneered, mainly by young
dispersing lizards. Given the sedentary
habits of these agamas we would expect
such expansion to be relatively slow.
Such an expansion occurred in the
introduced population at Krasnovodsk
(Fig. 6). From 1985 to 1990 the initial
introduced population occupying an area
of approximately 300 m2 dispersed into
adjacent areas of approximately 25 ha. Of
the seven subpopulations formed during
this period two (Fig. 6, points 1 and 2)
were founded by introduced mature adult
lizards after the initial introduction. Two
other subpopulations (Fig. 6, points 3 and
6) were founded by lizards that were
immature when introduced. Finally, three
subpopulations were established by the
offspring of the original introduced
lizards. In 1988 (the fourth year after
introduction) there were 33 individuals (13
adult males, 14 mature females and 10
immatures) in these seven subpopulations.
Individual lizards were observed to
leave their home areas only for collective
winter shelter. Females may leave their
home areas looking for places appropriate
for egg laying (Danieljan and Grigorjan
1975; Ananyeva and Danieljan 1987).
Conclusions
As it can be seen, the characteristic
features of Rock Agama social
organization and demography are high
stability of breeding individuals'
contingent and low population turnover.
This is evident consequence of sedentary
way of life characteristic for males of all
age classes, longevity of these lizards, and
postponed onset of breeding in early
lifetime of young agamas.
The latter may be especially applied to
males. Although they are capable to
reproduce already at the age of a little
under three years (after their third
wintering), most of them begin to breed,
actually, only at the age of four or five
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 109
years. How it may be seen, a male attains
the status of a breeder only after he had
taken possession of territory of his own.
So each maturing male faces with obvious
difficulties since many features of species'
social organization of settlement (high
density together with strong territoriality
of males retaining control over his home
area until his death) lead to deficiency of
vacancies which might be used by young
male-recruits. Temporary exclusion of
part of mature (non-territorial) males from
process of reproduction may, in principle,
decrease the whole reproductive potential
of the local population.
Besides such social regulators of
population growth, rapid increase of
population size is retarded also by rather
slow recruitment of new deme members.
Although breeding productivity of Rock
Agama is relatively high (from seven to
ten eggs per mature female during
breeding season- see Ataev, 1985), only
a small number of new-born agamas die.
Even if these losses (especially the latter
figure) is overestimated, the analysis of
demographic structure of all demes under
study shows the numerical preponderance
of mature individuals over immature ones.
This is in good agreement with the general
conclusion about the low rate of
population growth in Rock Agama.
Another argument in favor of this
conclusion is a quite slow expansion of
growing population into new, early
unoccupied areas.
To conclude, it may be stated that
Rock Agama give us a good example of
lizard species practicing a typical K-
strategy. It was to be expected providing
large size of individuals and the ecological
peculiarity of the species- in particular, its
pronounced omnivorousness with
prevalence in diet (at least in respect to
biomass) of diverse plant objects. It is
noteworthy that in Rock Agama, like in
many species of higher vertebrates (birds
and mammals) practicing K-strategy,
among deme members there are
considerable number of mature male being
excluded from reproduction by density-
dependent social factors.
Acknowledgments
We are indebted to Drs. Mira E.
Gauzer, Vladislav I. Vasiljev
(Krasnovodsk State Reserve) and Nikolaj
Andreev (Sunt Khasardag State Reserve)
for their help in organization of field work
and for participation in catching lizards.
We also wish to express our sincere
thanks to Prof. Ilya S. Darevsky, Drs.
Natalia B. Ananjeva (Zoological Institute,
Russian Academy of Sciences, St.
Petersburg) and Valentina F. Orlova
(Zoological Museum, Moscow
University) for their assistance and help
during our work with museum collections.
The final stage of our research was
supported by the Soros Foundation.
Literature Cited
ANANYEVA, N. B. AND C. ATAEV. 1984.
[Stellio caucasius triannulatus ssp. nov. - a new
subspecies of the Caucasian agama from
southwestern Turkmenia]. Trudy
Zoologicheskogo Instkuta Akademii Nauk SSR
124:4-11. (In Russian).
ANANYEVA, N. B. AND F. D. DANIELJAN.
1987. [Seasonal migrations of rock agama,
Stellio caucasius Eichwald, 1981, in Armenia.].
Trudy Zoologitcheskogo Institute Akademii Nauk
SSR 158:33-38. (In Russian).
ATAEV, C. 1985. [Reptiles of the mountains of
Turkmenistan!. Ylym Publishing House,
Ashkabad. 343 pp. (In Russian).
DANIELJAN, F. D. AND E. S. GRIGORJAN.
1975. [On the population number and migrations
of the rock agama Stellio caucasius Eichwald in
Armenia]. Pp. 62-63 In [Fauna and its protection
in the Transcaucasian republics].. Erevan. (In
Russian).
PANOV, E. N. AND L. Y. ZYKOVA. 1985.
[Comparative biology the steppe and rock agamas
{Agama sanguinolenla, A. caucasica) in the
Sumbar River basin (Western Kopetdag)]. Pp.
185-204 In [Vegetation and animal world of the
western Kopetdag]. Ashkhabad. (In Russian).
PANOV, E. N. AND L. Y. ZYKOVA. 1986.
[Notes on the behavior of the steppe agama,
Agama sanguinolenta. I. General features of the
biology, spatial structure of the population and
Vol.6, p. 110
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
social behavior]. Zoologichesky Zhurnal,
Moscow 65:99-109. (In Russian).
PANOV, E. N. AND L. Y. ZYKOVA. 1989.
[Dynamics of social relations in a population of
rock agamas, Stellio caucasius Eich.]. Pp. 184-
185 In [Questions of Herpetology. Abstracts of
the Reports at the Seventh All Union Conference
of Herpetology, Naukova Dumka, Kiev]. (In
Russian).
PANOV, E. N., L. Y. ZYKOVA, M. E. GLAUZER
AND V. I. VASIL'ER. 1987. [Zone of
intergradation of different forms of Stellio
caucasius compex in South-western Turkmenia].
Zoologichesky Zhurnal, Moscow 66: 402-411.
(In Russian).
SEMENOV, D. V. 1989. [Spatial organization in
populations of reptiles. Achievements of science
and technology, ser. Vertebrate Zoology]. VINITI
17: 101-134. (In Russian).
STAMPS, J. 1988. Conspecific attraction in
territorial species. American Naturalist 131:329-
347.
WILEY, R. H. 1981. Social structure and
individual ontogenesis: problem of description,
mechanism and evolution. Perspectives in
ethology 4:105-133. Plenum Press, New York.
ZYKOVA, L. Y. AND E. N. PANOV. 1991.
[Long-term study of growth in the rock agama,
Stellio caucasius ]. Zoologichesky Zhurnal,
Moscow 70: 81-90. (In Russian).
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpctological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 111-113 |
A Study on the Comparative Cytology of Some Endocrine Glands in
Rana plancyi between Hibernation and Post-hibernation
JlQlNG
Department of Biology, Xuzhou Teachers College, Xuzhou, Jiangsu, 221009 China
Abstract: -This paper studies the ultrastructure of the pituitary gland cell and the adrenal cortex cell in Rana
plancyi between hibernation and post-hibernation. The results show that the two kinds of cells mentioned above
are much less inactive during hibernation than during post-hibernation. The significance of those results is also
discussed.
Key words: Amphibia, Anura, Rana plancyi, pituitary gland, adrenal cortex, comparative cytology.
Introduction
Hibernation is an adaptive strategy of
frogs for keeping out of the cold during the
winter. Studying the hibernation biology of
frogs is beneficial to protecting the frogs and
making use of frog resource. No paper
related to the comparative cytology of the
endocrine glands in frogs has been reported
in China for many years. This paper reports
the results of studying the comparative
cytology of the pituitary gland cell and the
adrenal cortex cell in Rana plancyi between
hibernation and post-hibernation by using a
transmission electron microscope.
Methods
According to the regular pattern of
hibernation in the locality, many specimens
of Rana plancyi were collected from a little
river in October 1992, in the suburbs of
Xuzhou City, put into a box, and then laid
outdoors during the winter. Some
specimens, which represent the hibernation
group, were fetched from the box and used
for the experiment on January 8, 1993.
Some specimens representing the post-
hibernation group were collected from the
same little river mentioned above and were
used to do the experiment on May 17, 1993.
Four specimens were collected from the
two groups, regardless of their sex. The
specimens were killed and dissected so that
the pituitary gland and the adrenal gland were
obtained. The two glands were fixed with
4% glutraldehyde and embedded in Epon-
812. Ultra-thin sections were doubly stained
with uranyl acetate and lead citrate by the
standard method, and the specimens were
examined with a Hitachi 600-A-II electron
microscope.
Results
Pituitary gland cell
The pituitary gland cell of the hibernation
group has plenty of glycogen particulates (PI.
1:1) but few rough endoplasmic reticulum and
mitochondrium (PI. 1:2), while the pituitary
gland cell of the post-hibernation group has
plenty of rough endoplasmic reticulum and
Golgi bodies but no glycogen particulates
(PI. 1:3). The pituitary gland cell of the post-
hibernation group also has plenty of secretory
granules (PI. 1:4), and some secretory
granules can sometimes be seen moving to
blood capillary (PI. 1:5).
Adrenal cortex cell
According to the result of the examination
of the semi-thin sections, the adrenal cortex
in the adrenal gland was defined. The
adrenal cortex cell has tubular cristate
mitochondrium as its marking. The adrenal
cortex cell has plenty of lipid drops, some
smooth endoplasmic reticulum and few
mitochondrium (PI. 1:6, 7) during
hibernation, but has plenty of mitochondrium
(PI. 1:8), few lipid drops and plenty of
expanded smooth endoplasmic reticulum (PI.
1:9).
Discussion
The pituitary gland is the most important
endocrine gland in the frog and plays an
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 112
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Plate I
1. Pituitary gland cell showing glycogen particulates during hibernation (arrows). X 12 000
2. Pituitary gland cell showing mitochondrium (Mt), rough endoplasmic reticulum (RER), Golgi bodies (GB)
and secretory granules (SG) during hibernation. X 15 000
3. Pituitary gland cell showing Mt, RER and GB during post-hibernation. X 20 000
4. Pituitary gland cell showing SG during post-hibernation. X 17 000
5. Pituitary gland cell showing SG near the blood capillary (BC) during post-hibernation. X 20 000
6. Adrenal cortex cell showing lipid drops (LD) and Mt during hibernation. X 20 000
7. Adrenal cortex cell showing smooth endoplasmic reticulum (SER) during hibernation. X 20 000
8. Adrenal cortex cell showing Mt during post-hibernation. X 20 000
9. Adrenal cortex cell showing expanded SER and LD during post-hibernation. X 20 000
O
GB
Mt
-
?6
»*
SG
Mt"
GB
RER
.--■
£*£$&■ •-■..._•■ ■
■>•■.
fe
N
••
•^SG
fc-
BC
*.
1 SG
■ ••
■
5 f~*t
Mt
SER
Mt
%
SER
jgg
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 113
important role in its hibernation. It can
secrete, releasing hormone which can
regulate the activity of the other endocrine
glands. The studies on frog cytology have
not concerned the pituitary gland for many
years. Previous work (Daguy, 1963; Saint
Girons, 1975) has showed that the pituitary
gland in some reptiles increase in activity
several weeks before the end of hibernation.
This investigation shows that the pituitary
gland cell is inactive during hibernation, but
active during post-hibernation. It also
suggested that the behavior of the pituitary
gland in frogs is similar to the same gland in
reptiles during hibernation and post-
hibernation.
The adrenal cortex can secrete
glucocorticoid and mineralocorticoid. The
two kinds of hormones can regulate
glucometabolism and mineralometabolism.
These two kinds of hormones are both
synthesized in the smooth endoplasmic
reticulum, so that the number of smooth
endoplasmic reticulum can indicate the
secreting level of the two kinds of hormones.
Previous work (Robertson et al., 1959; Chan
et al., 1971) have shown that the adrenal
cortex is inactive during the winter and active
in the summer. This investigation also
shows that the adrenal cortex cell is active
during post-hibernation and inactive during
hibernation. According to this investigation,
it is considered that the activity of the adrenal
may begin from the end of hibernation.
Acknowledgments
The author is deeply indebted to
Professor Shou-chang Zou for having
supplied the materials and for his helpful
advice throughout the research. The author
also wishes to thank Professor She-chao
Chen for his excellent technical assistance.
Literature Cited
CHAN, S. W. C. AND J. G. PHILIPS. 1971.
Seasonal variations in production in vitro of
corticosteroids by frog (Rana rugulosa) adrenal.
Journal of Endocrinology 5:1-17.
DAGUY, R. 1963. Biologie de la latence hibernale
chez Vipera aspis. Vie Milieu 1963 14:311-443.
ROBERTSON, O. H. AND B. C. WEXLER. 1959.
Histological changes in the organs and tissues of
migration and spawning Pacific salmon (Genus
Oncorhynchus). Endocrinology 66:222-239.
SAINT GIRONS, H. 1975. Le cycle annuel des
glandes endocrines chez les serpents des regions
temperas. Bulletin Zoology of France 100:654-655.
I June 1995'
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 114-119
Reproductive Behavior in the Long-tailed Salamander (Onychodactylus
fischeri Boulenger).
I. A. Serbinova1 and V. A. Solkin2
'Moscow Zoo, B. Gruzinskaya 1 , Moscow 12342 Russia
2Pacific Ocean Institute of Geography, Far East Branch of Russian Academy of Sciences, Vladivostok,
690032, Russia
Abstract. - We studied reproductive behavior in wild and captive Onychodactylus fischeri. Reproductive
behavior and physiology is triggered by warming water temperatures in the spring. Pair formation begins at
7° C and spawning at 9° C water temperature. Fertilization is external. The development of distinctive
femoral musculature and skin on the posterior surface of the hindlimbs in the male is for grasping the eggs
during fertilization. Pairs of salamander experimentally injected with a synthetic analogue of gonadotropin
releasing hormone exhibited typical mating behavior and produced fertile clutches of eggs.
Key words: Onychodactylus fischeri , salamander, reproduction, external fertilization,
courtship, gonadotropin releasing hormone.
Introduction
The long-tailed salamander,
Onychodactylus fischeri , is one of the most
poorly known amphibians in Russia.
Emeliyanov (1947) noted that spawning
takes place from the time salamanders
appear in the spring until the middle of July.
Regel and Epshtein (1975) concluded that
reproduction in this species is not restricted
to a specific season. The discovery of a
clutch with some hatched larvae indicated
that oviposition probably occurred in the
spring (Kozik, 1991). It is difficult to
establish the precise time of oviposition
since the length of embryonic development
for this species is unknown. The length of
embryonic development for the related
species O. japonicus is 120 days (Hayase
and Oseki, 1983) and it breeds in the winter
(Akita, 1989). The absence of precise
information on the timing and method of
reproduction of the long-tailed salamander
prompted us to undertake this study.
Methods and Materials
This study was conducted from May
through July, 1991 on the Primorsky krai a
tributary of the Mineral'naya River.
Daylight observations of the location and
reproductive state of salamanders in nature
were made along a 1000m transect along
Kitaisky Spring. The search effort was
directed to the time of maximum diurnal
activity. All captured salamanders were
individually numbered by toe-clipping using
standard techniques. A total of 601
salamanders were captured of which 102
were recaptured. All salamanders were
measured and weighed on a triple beam
balance. We noted the degree of
development of such male secondary sexual
characters as the distinctive femoral
musculature and skin development on the
posterior surface of the hind limbs. We
recorded such female characteristics as the
relative size of oocytes observed through the
abdomen, their passage into the oviducts
and the condition of the ventral opening to
the cloaca.
The long-tailed salamander has secretive
habits and we determined that observation of
natural oviposition was unlikely. Therefore,
we stimulated reproductive behavior
hormonally in captive individuals.
Salamanders were housed outdoors in the
shade of an awning in 8 liter aquaria with 3-
5 cm of running water and shelters.
Aquarium water was changed daily. Each
of seven males and seven females were
injected with 1-5 |ig/individual/day of a
synthetic analogue of gonadotropin releasing
hormone for 7-12 days. All individuals
were determined to be ready for breeding
before injection. Males and females were
kept separate until ovulation began; then
they were paired.
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.6, p. 115
number of animals
temperature
1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 31 3 6 9
may June
— — water temperature — B~ non-breeding animals
-*- breeding animals
FIG. 1 . Pattern of Onychodactylus fischeri activity and water temperature during the spring..
number of males
- *- non-breeding — s— breeding
FIG. 2. Frequency occurrence of breeding and non-breeding male Onychodactylus fischeri.
Vol.6, p. 116
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
number of females
21
may
with opened cloaca
oocytes in oviducts
5 8
June
body cavity oocytes
spawned
14
FIG. 3. Frequency occurrence and reproductive state of female Onychodactylus fischeri.
Results and Discussion
The first observations of active
salamanders were made in late April to early
May at a water temperature of approximately
3° C and while sections of the stream were
still covered with ice. The number of
animals active each day increased as
temperatures warmed during the spring
(Fig. 1). The first salamanders observed
did not exhibit readiness for breeding.
Oocytes were not visible through the
abdomen wall of females and males did not
exhibit hindlimb muscle and skin
development. All animals were in a poor
nutritional state. The peak number of non-
reproductively ready salamanders occurred
on 12 May when water temperature reached
6° C. Not all salamanders leave their winter
shelters simultaneously due to differential
warming rates along the slopes and this is
reflected in Fig. 1. After 12 May the
number of non-reproductive salamanders
decreased to a constant level by 20 May.
The peak number of reproductively
ready salamanders was encountered on 17
May when the last stretches of the stream
were ice free. These animals appeared to be
well nourished. From 15 May to 15 June a
majority of the males encountered were in
breeding condition (Fig. 2).
By 20 May post-hibernation
aggregations of salamanders began to
disintegrate and the individuals dispersed
along the stream. This marked the
beginning of the breeding season.
By 10 May we began encountering
females with opened cloacas (Fig. 3). By
the end of May females with ovulated
oocytes in the body cavity were observed
and by 10 June we found salamanders with
oocytes in the oviducts. We first observed a
female that had spawned or oviposited her
eggs on 9 June. In early June we observed
3 male-female pairs of salamanders with at
least one member in reproductive readiness.
These observations agree with previous
accounts (Regel and Epshtein, 1975).
In the hormonally treated females the
caudad displacement of oocytes usually took
April
1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 117
FIG. 4. Courtship behavior of Onychodactylus
fischeri with the male (light salamander)
approaching the female's (dark salamander) vent,
rubbing against the female's abdomen and straddling
the female.
two to four days after injection. In another
day oocytes appeared in the body cavity and
three days later they filled the oviducts.
From hormone injection to readiness for
spawning usually took from six to 10 days.
We observed 6 cases of spawning, two of
which were followed by spermatophore
deposition.
In the hormonally treated animals
approximately one to two days before
spawning the female salamander ceased
most activity and assumed a typical pre-
spawning posture on a stone with the rear
third of the body in the water. At this time
the male moves about the aquarium,
periodically approaches the female touching
his snout to her vent, rubbing his body on
hers and resting beside her (Fig. 4). The
FIG. 5. Comparison of the male Onychodactylus
fischeri hindlimbs and tail in normal posture and in
the pre-fertilization posture with the legs extended.
Note the distinctive heavy femoral musculature and
skin development on the posterior of the hindlimbs.
male then extends his rear legs and holds
this position (Fig. 5).
When spawning begins the female
attaches a mucous cord to the stone with a
pair of egg sacs each containing one to eight
eggs. The eggs are five to six mm in
diameter. The mucous capsule is thick and
strong unlike that of Salamandrella
keyserlingii and Ranodon sibiricus. During
egg deposition (30-40 min.) the male
remains sitting beside and in contact with the
female. When the egg sacs appear the male
enters the water and approaches the female's
vent with his snout. In this position the
male's body begins to undulate. When the
male nudges the egg sac with his snout this
causes a burst of excited thrashing from side
to side by his snout. This dislodges the egg
sac from the female. The male moves
immediately over the egg sac with his legs
extended and grasps the egg sac with his
forelimbs, positioning it between his
hindlimbs. The male then grasps the egg
sac with the hindlimbs and pulls the base of
the sac against his vent and deposits the
spermatophore (Fig. 6).
Vol.6, p. 118
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
F IG. 6. Male Onychodactylus fischeri grasping
the egg sac with the hindlimbs in apposition with
the vent during spermatophore deposition. Note the
distinctive heavy femoral musculature and skin
development on the posterior of the hindlimbs.
Those individuals that are ready for
breeding emerge from hibernation later than
those that are not reproductively ready. We
believe that the triggering mechanism for
breeding is the elevation of the stream
temperature as can be seen in the increased
activity of reproductively ready salamanders
when the water temperature reaches 6 to 7°
C (Fig. 1). At this time females with open
cloacas begin to appear. When water
temperatures have reached 8° C most
females have opened cloacas and many have
oocytes in the body cavity. At 9° C water
temperature some females have oocytes in
the oviducts. By the time water temperature
reaches 10° C most females have oocytes in
the oviducts and some are beginning to
spawn (Fig. 3). We believe increasing
temperature is the primary triggering
mechanism for reproductive readiness,
courtship behavior and spawning.
We found very few post reproductive
females on the surface (n=3 in 1990; n=5 in
1991). Very few males were observed on
the surface with their legs extended in the
reproductive posture. Spawning activity
coincided with the period of optimum
temperature for activity and low water
levels. Salamanders generally remain near
the area of spawning until the next
reproductive season.
These salamanders are sparsely
distributed and do not form breeding
aggregations. Male salamanders seem to
seek out females well before spawning (i.e.
15-20 days), perhaps by olfaction. The
males initiate courtship behavior at this time
and it may continue for up to 10 days thus
assuring that the male is likely to be in
attendance to fertilize the eggs when the
female spawns. This lengthy courtship
period is the longest known of our native
amphibians. This pattern contrasts with that
of Mertensiella caucasica, the Caucasian
salamander, a species with a similar ecology
but different reproductive pattern from that
of O. fischeri. The Caucasian salamander
has internal fertilization that induces
ovulation. Courtship and copulation take
much less time and the pair is together for a
much shorter time than are long-tailed
salamanders. These represent two very
different reproductive strategies for two
distantly related species living in similar
habitats.
Summary
Our studies have demonstrated that
reproduction in O. fischeri is triggered by
warming water temperatures in the spring.
Pair formation begins at 7°C and spawning
at 9°C water temperature. Fertilization is
external. The development of distinctive
femoral musculature and skin is for grasping
and holding the eggs during fertilization.
Pairs of salamander experimentally injected
with a synthetic analogue of gonadotropin
releasing hormone exhibited typical mating
behavior and produced fertile clutches of
eggs.
June 1995 Asiatic Herpetological Research Vol. 6, p. 119
Literature Cited
A KIT A, Y. 1989. Breeding cycle of
Onychodactylus japonicus on Mt. Hodatsu, with
special reference to biannual spawning. Pp. 305 In
Proceedings of the Second Japan-China
Herpetological Symposium, Kyoto, Japan,
Herpetological Society of Japan.
EMELIYANO A. A. 1947. [On the biology of the
long-tailed salamander]. Zoologichesky Zhumal
56(1): 65-70. (In Russian).
HAYASE, N. AND K. OSEKI. 1983. [Spawning and
embryology of the salamander Onychodactylus
japonicus (Houttuyn). Collect, and Breed 45(3): 122-
123. (In Japanese).
KOZIK, S. S. 1991. [The discovery of the long-
tailed salamander clutch]. Zoologichesky Zhurnal
70(5): 159-160. (In Russian).
REGEL, E. D. AND S. M. EPSHTEIN. 1975.
[Some peculiarities of the long-tailed salamander
biology]. Zoologichesky Zhumal 54(10): 1515-
1524. (In Russian).
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 120-131 ::
On the Inheritance of the Mid-dorsal Stripe in the Iranian Wood Frog
(Rana macrocnemis)
DAVID N. TARKHN1SHVILI
Department of Biology, Tbilisi State University, University Str. 2, Tbilisi 380077, Georgia
Abstract. -The frequency of the phenotype Striata (presence of a light mid-dorsal stripe) is often used in
population investigations of anurans. Simple hereditary nature of this character was established
experimentally. Nevertheless, animals with a poorly developed stripe can be found in populations of some
species, together with non-striped specimens and clear Striata, in the frog, Rana macrocnemis, the expression
of the mid-dorsal stripe varies continually. Poorly striped frogs prevail in some populations. We examined
morph distribution among froglets obtained from seven R. macrocnemis pairs whose eggs and larvae
developed at 18, 25, and 29°C. Non-striped froglets predominate in the offspring of non-striped parents and
striped in the offspring of striped frogs. Non the less, all phenotype spectra, from specimens with a clear
stripe to non-striped animals, are represented in almost all groups. The morph distribution is quite continual
and the character varies as a quantitative one. When the developmental temperature increases, the frequency of
the morph predominating in optimal conditions (18°C) declines with the increasing frequency of poorly
striped froglets. Modifications of the character under the influence of thermal conditions shadows genetic
specifics of sibling groups. Similar influence of conditions on the morph distribution in froglets was found
in natural populations. Morph distribution among newly emerged froglets affects morph distribution of adults
in the populations two years later
Key words Amphibia, Anura, Ranidae, Rana macrocnemis, inheritance, Georgia
Introduction
Specimens with a high mid-dorsal stripe
can be found among a lot of anuran species.
This character (phenotype Striata) appears in
representatives of systematically distant
anuran families. Sometimes a light stripe
appears as a specific character (e.g. in the
frog Rana amurensis or among some boreal
toads). In other species, Striata appears as a
morph and within the same population non-
striped as well as striped animals can be
found. Prevalence of this morph is species-
specific. For instance, if among
Discoglossus pictus or some
Eleutherodactylus striped animals
predominate (Duellman and Trueb, 1986),
in Rana temporaria they are sparse
(Istchenko, 1978) and in Occidozyga laevis
only a few striped juveniles could be found
(our unpublished data).
Anuran species among which a mid-
dorsal stripe appears can be divided into two
groups independently of their systematic
position. The first group includes species in
which the mid-dorsal stripe appears as a
very clear and discrete character, and striped
animals can be divided from non-striped
ones easily. There are, for example, some
representatives of the genus Rana:: Rana cf.
esculenta, R. nigromaculata, brown frogs
R. sylvatica, R. arvalis (Istchenko, 1978).
The second group includes species having
often or always softened stripe,
characterized by the absence of a clear
border between the stripe and ground color
of dorsal surface. These include some
brown frogs (/?. temporaria, R. chensinesis,
R. macrocnemis) among others. Specimens
with a clear mid-dorsal stripe, as well as
with a softened stripe, can be found in R.
macrocnemis only (Istchenko, 1978).
Moreover, in populations of these species,
the degree of development of the mid-dorsal
stripe varies continually. If numerous
specimen samples are taken, a range from
quite unstriped to very clear Striata-s may be
constructed. These extreme phenotypes
may be connected by animals with softened
stripe (Pseudostriata phenotype group).
Inheritance of the Striata phenotype was
examined experimentally. It was established
that, in different anuran families, the
hereditary mechanism may be similar and
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 121
dependent on the effect of the fully-
dominant autosomal gene. It was shown,
for instance, on Eleutherodactylus ricordii
(Goin, 1947), Rana nigromaculata (Morya,
1952), R. sylvatica (Browder et al., 1966),
R. arvalis (Stchupak, 1977; Stchupak and
Istchenko, 1981), R. ridibunda (Berger and
Imietowski, 1982). Simple hereditary
nature was established for the coloration of
the mid-dorsal stripe of -4cm crepitans, as
well (Pyburn, 1961). That is the reason of
wide exploitation of the character in
population-genetic investigations, especially
of frogs from the genus Rana (Stugren,
1966; Fishbeck and Underhill, 1971;
Istchenko, 1978; Pikulik, 1985; Gogoleva,
1985; Shibata, 1988; Kubantsev and
Peskova, 1989 etc.). Nonetheless, the
frequency of the Striata morph has been
used as the index of isolation degree
(Stugren, 1966; Pikulik, 1985; Shibata,
1988) or as the instrument of the natural
selection investigations (Fishbeck and
Underhill, 1971; Istchenko, 1978;
Vershinin, 1987 etc.). Presence of a poorly
expressed stripe in some species made us
use mid-dorsal stripe in the phenetical
investigations with care. Inheritance of
Pseudostriata is not clear. For R .
limnocharis, Moriwaki (1953) supposed
polyallelic inheritance; there are no data for
other species. In any case, connections
between characters Pseudostriata and Striata
must be present. Continual connections
between morphs, e.g. in R. macrocnemis
makes possible modifications of stripe
development under environmental
conditions, like most other quantitative
characters. Variations of mid-dorsal stripe
expression during the life span of individual
Rana temporaria specimens was noted
(Heran, 1986). Earlier (Tarkhnishvili and
Mamradze, 1989; Mamradze, 1990) we
showed that Striata and Pseudostriata
phenotypes frequency in R. macrocnemis
sibling groups can be modified as a result of
temperature variability by which larval
development takes place. This present
article describes the results of the more
detailed experiments and field observations
on the Iranian wood frog populations.
Materials and Methods
Experiment. Adults of R. macrocnemis
(7 pairs) were obtained in 1989 from a
hibernation site in Satovle Mountain ridge
(eastern Georgia, surroundings of Tbilisi).
Mid-dorsal stripe expression differs in
different specimens. We divided frogs
conditionally in non-striped ones (Maculata;
M), specimens with poor enlightment in the
middle- or hind part of the dorsal surface
(Pseudo-pseudostriata; PPS), with poorly
developed (Pseudostriata; PS) or clear
(Striata; S) mid-dorsal stripe. The
description of the parents (male
phenotype/female phenotype) is: pair 1-
M/M; 2-M/M; 3-M/PPS; 4-M/PPS; 5-PS/M;
6-M/PS; 7-PS/S. We selected 3 groups of
40 eggs from each of the 7 clutches
obtained. Groups were placed in 40-1
aquaria with aeration and stable temperature
of 18, 25 and 29°C. Tadpoles were fed
boiled spinach. Half of the water volume
was renewed every second day. After
metamorphosis, the complete phenotype of
each froglet (M, PS or S) was described.
Therefore, 20 experimental sites were
elaborated (tadpoles from the 7th clutch
developed under 29°C died before
metamorphosis had begun).
Field Data. During 1989, 1990 and 1991
in a local population of R. macrocnemis
from Borjomi Canyon (central Georgia), the
ratio of phenotypes M, PPS, PS and S were
investigated. We separately analyzed the
distribution of different morphs in adult
frogs, juveniles, and in 16 groups of
froglets emerged from different ponds and
pools (each sample included 20-44 froglets).
There are more than 60 spawning sites in the
population investigated, but every year 2 or
3 water bodies ensure about 90% of the
whole generation. Comparative part of each
water body was established as well as the
number of" clutches deposited in each of
them (Tarkhnishvili, in press).
For the comparison of morph distribution
between different samples, we
Vol. 6, p. 122
Asiatic Herpetological Research
January 1995
TABLE 1 . Significance of the differences in morph distribution between experimental groups (values of X
-test).
used the Kolmogorov-Smirnov A.-test. We
compared the frequency of M, PS
(PPS+PS) and S phenotypes in different
groups using Fisher's F-test (Zaitsev,
1984).
Results
Experimental data. The distribution of
different morphs in the 20 experimental
froglet groups, obtained from 7 clutches and
developed under the different conditions, is
shown in Figure 1. Some main results of
the experiment must be noted. Dominance
of the S-gene excludes clear-striped animals'
appearance among the offspring of non-
striped parents; but independently of
developmental conditions in offspring of the
pair 1 froglets of the S-phenotype present.
Morph PS appears in each sample. There
are a few non-striped froglets among group
7 (male of S-phenotype) but their frequency
is significantly lower than 25 or 50% that
could be expected if, in the genotype of
parents, the recessive gene M is present.
Besides that, the inheritance ability of a mid-
dorsal stripe is obvious. After development
under the optimal thermal conditions (18°C),
differences in the morph distribution
between most of the samples, excluding
froglet groups with the same or very similar
parents' phenotype, are significant (Table
1). Among the offspring of the pairs 1 and
2 (M/M), non-striped specimens
predominated; their frequency was
significantly higher than even the 3rd or 4th
pairs (M/PPS) offspring. Correspondingly,
among group 7 (parents PS/S), non-striped
morph was significantly lower than in other
groups. There is shown the significance of
January 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 123
TABLE 2. Inter-group differences in the frequency of each morph separately (F-test).
inter-sample differences in Table 2. In all,
along the road of 1-7 groups, frequency of
M-phenotype decreases and frequency of S-
phenotype increases significantly but
gradually. Frequency of (PS)-morphs
increases gradually from the 1st to the 5th
group (PS/M) and decreases again among
the 6th and 7th groups.
Developmental conditions of larvae
affect the ratio of different morphs. When
temperature increases, especially from 25 to
29°C, in pair 3-6 offspring (information of
group 7 absent) frequency of S-morph
decreases significantly. These groups are
established by frogs with mid-dorsal stripe,
even very pale or lightened. This time, a
few S-morph froglets among groups 1 and 2
appear independently of the thermal
conditions. On the other hand, frequency of
non-striped morph in group 1 decreases
significantly as a result of high
developmental temperature. Inversely,
among groups 5 and 6 (parents PS/M and
M/PS) part of the non-striped morph
increases, especially between 25 and 29°C.
At least among most of the groups
frequency of PS+PPS morph group slightly
increases under high developmental
temperature (see Fig. 1 and Table 3). Thus
variation of the developmental conditions
during the larval period can affect, but in
different ways, the ratio of the phenotypes
in the froglet groups. We can not conclude
Vol. 6, p. 124
Asiatic Herpetological Research
January 1995
TABLE 3. Significance of the phenotype frequency changes under the thermal conditions.
Sibling
Group
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Difference of thermal conditions between
1 8°C to 25°C 25°C to 29°C 1 8°C to 29°C
M (PS) S M (PS) S M (PS) S
++
++
++
+
Note: -, +, ++ and +++ are significance levels.
1.0l
0.5
M/m M H^pS M/ppS PS/M M/PS PS/S d/9
PARENTS
18°C
.
T)X
29%
1=1 M wmS mm*T>s
FIG. 1. Frequency distribution of morphs in
experimental froglet groups.
that the rise of temperature always increases
or decreases the percentage of striped frogs.
Rather it declines frequency of display of the
genotype predominating. In other words,
the comparative part of heredity in
determining the morphological features of
the group decreases. This is illustrated in
Table 1. Inter- group differences so clear in
optimal conditions, after development in
10
0.5-
A
ia
M
H
12 3 1
D
i 2 3 h
B
N=iVl
%
fa=
1 2 3 k
E
,
1
F^Wrt
12 3k
c
N=77
i
=
LI
1 2 3
□ d1
urn juv.
FIG. 2. Frequency distribution of morphs in
natural populations. A- adults from Borjomi
Canyon in 1989; B- adults from Borjomi Canyon in
1990; C- Adults from Borjomi Canyon in 1991; D-
juveniles from Borjomi Canyon in 1989; E- adults
from Satovle Mountain ridge in 1989. 1- Maculaia;
2- PPS; 3- PS; 4- S.
warm water often became non-significant.
Perhaps the reason for this phenomena is the
changing in expression of the stripe. In
warm water, the part of genetically striped
specimens processes determining the
appearance of stripe are delayed and only
non-clear stripes develop. Inversely, the
January 1995
Asiatic Herpetolo^ical Research
Vol. 6, p. 125
TABLE 4. Significance of the differences in morph distribution between groups emerged from the sites 9,
1 1 (1989) and 12 (1990), and that which emerged from another site (values of the X-test).
Note: Numbers 1-15 are the pond number from which the froglets emerged,
a = generation of 1989
b= generation of 1990
c = generation of 1991
+, ++, and +++ are significance levels
15
K'iO 1 1 1^24
1989
FIG. 3. Frequency distribution of morphs in frogs
that emerged from natural ponds and pools in
•Borjomi Canyon. I-XV- number of the water body;
N- sample size; Phenotypes: 1- M; 2- PPS; 3- PS;
4-S.
part of genetically non-striped frogs can be
turned into the PS -category.
Field data. Morph frequency distribution
among the adult frogs from the natural
population is shown in Fig. 2. The sexual
differences are not significant. The
differences between these samples are the
sample collected in 1991: *.= 1.51 (1989-
1991) - 1.41 (1990-1991) (P<0.05). It
correlates with an increase of non-striped
frogs to 65% in this year (F=10.11xx) and
the disappearance of the froglets with a clear
mid-dorsal stripe (F=13.34xxx) .
Interestingly, morph distribution in the
investigated population became similar to
morph distribution in the population from
the Satovle Mountain ridge (this is a drier
habitat distant from the former by 100-150
km) (Fig. 2e). Note that in both population,
S-morph frequency is lower than in other
populations of R. macrocnemis investigated
earlier (Istchenko, 1978), but the frequency
of the frogs with poorly developed stripes
remain very high. Phenotypic distribution
of sub-adults and juveniles in 1989 (Fig.
2d) is similar to those of adults during 1989-
1990.
A great part of animals in brown frog
populations begins to breed after the 2nd to
3rd hibernation (Istchenko and Ledentsov,
1987; Ledentsov, 1990). We can not
exclude the fact that froglets which emerged
in 1989 could participate in the formation of
the generation that emerged during 1991.
Therefore, analysis of their phenotypic
distribution appears interesting. During
1989, froglet groups that emerged from 11
Vol. 6, p. 126
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
small water bodies were described. Results
are shown on Fig. 3. Because of the small
volume of sample differences between them,
it appears non-significant in most cases.
Only froglets from the water bodies 9 and
11, moreover from 12 (1990) are
significantly different from most other
groups (Table 4). Spawning sites 9 and 12
are well warmed pools, filled with
vegetation. Daily temperature during the
developmental period often exceeds 30°C.
Among the froglets that emerged from these
pools, the non-striped morph predominates.
The percent of the S-morph (in site 9, this
morph is absent), as well as PS and even
PPS, is low. Inversely, site 2 is self-
flowing and shadowed. Vegetation is
absent and the water temperature do not
exceed 20°C, even during the warmest days.
PS and PPS morphs predominate here, and
the percent of the S-morph exceeds 20.
There is the question of whether the
differences noted above can reflect non-
random distribution of the parent's morphs
along the different spawning sites. On the
one hand, the displacement of warmed and
shadowed sites are irregular in the habitat
examined, and striped frogs have equal
possibility of spawning in different water
bodies. On the other hand, only a few
clutches (4 and 7 correspondingly) were
deposited in sites 9 and 11 during 1989.
Morph distribution in the froglets could be
the consequence of random processes as a
result. But, as many as 93 clutches were
deposited in site 12 (1990). It is quite a
representative sample of the population,
numbering 1037 adult females in all (1990).
This time, the frequency of non-striped
froglets emerged from site 12 (68%) is
instantly higher than M-morph frequency
among adult frogs (45%). Moreover,
during 1991 in site 2, already 37 clutches
were deposited, but the frequency of S-
morph among froglets even slightly
increased. Therefore, we can suppose non-
random reasons of the morph distribution in
the groups of froglets emerged from
different spawning sites. The frequency of
one or another morph depends on the
physical conditions under which larval
development takes place. This is argued by
the significant differences in phenotypic
structure between froglets that emerged from
different water bodies as well as between the
young generation and adult animals. The
stability of the morph composition of groups
emerging from the same site, but in different
waters, is additional evidence.
Above, we told about the increase of the
non-striped morph in 1991 to 65%. It may
be connected with the increasing of the
comparative part of warmed pools during
previous years. For instance, spawning site
5 produced at least 45% of the total number
of the 1989 generation (about 20,000). In
that time, the frequency of M-morph
approached 55% and not one froglet with a
clear stripe was found. Most of the other
sites producing metamorphosis in 1989
were warmed. Shadowed site 2 (17% M
and 23% S) produced not more than 25% of
the generation. In 1990, the situation
changed in Maculata's favor still more.
There were 68% of froglets of this
phenotype that emerged from site 12 (site 12
produced about 70% of the generation
numbering 44,000 froglets). Perhaps in the
future, we can suppose still more increase of
non-striped morph's comparative part and a
decline of the striped animals' frequency in
the investigated population.
Discussion
Two directions of the S-morph
frequency investigations in amphibian
population can be noted. The first is the
analysis of geographic variations of morph
frequency in populations of different
species. The second one is to study the
dynamics of polymorphism of separate
populations including age-dependent
changes of morph distribution. The
summarizing bibliography following must
be noted.
Geographic variation. There is no good
evidence of clear clinal variations of
frequency of the morph Striata in a single
species. Stugren's conclusion (1966) about
increasing of frequency of striped frogs in
Rana arvalis toward the east was refuted by
Istchenko (1978). In some cases (i.e. R.
arvalis and R. temporaria in Belorussia), the
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 127
percent of striped frogs increase toward the
north (Istchenko, 1978; Pikulik, 1985), but
in the populations of R. arvalis from the
Urals or of R. semiplicata from the Russian
Far East, the inverse situation was noted
(Toporkova, 1965; Istchenko, 1978). On
the other hand, irregular but clear
interpopulational differences in S-morph
frequency are common in different species'
populations (Masalikin, 1985; Panchenko,
1985; Shibata, 1988 etc.). The frequency of
the S-morph in R. arvalis may increase
under the hardening of antropogenous
pressing (Vershinin, 1987). Therefore,
frequency distribution of phenotypes in the
separate populations of some species depend
highly on the climatic or microhabitat
conditions but not on historical reasons.
Interestingly, when the coexistence of R.
temporaria and R. arvalis populations takes
place (in the Middle Volga) the same
environmental conditions ensure parallel
variations in population morphology
(Lebedinski et al., 1989)
Intrapopulation dynamics.
Comparative frequency of different morphs
may vary between years and separate
generations (Istchenko, 1978). Influence of
the pond conditions on the morph
distribution in R. macrocnemis froglet
groups was described by this author.
Besides, morph distribution in the
generation could be changed in relation to
animal age. For some R. arvalis
populations, decreasing of S-morph
frequency in adult animals was established
in comparison to juveniles (Pikulik, 1985;
Vershinin, 1987). Inversely, in the same
species, increasing of the comparative part
of striped animals was recorded for the older
age groups (Istchenko, 1978). Therefore,
the morphological features of the population
may be changed rapidly and instantly by
environmental conditions. There is the
mean adaptation on the population level.
Istchenko (1978) supposes that rapid
reactions of morph distribution on the
environmental conditions take place because
of the elective elimination of animals. Rapid
modifications of the genotypes' distribution
is the result of this process. Selection may
be connected not only with preferences of
striped or non-striped frogs but also with
elective elimination of larvae accordingly to
their genotypes. For instance, larvae of
Striata genotype are more vulnerable to the
high density and shortage of the oxygen
because of the abnormally high metabolic
rates (Schvarz and Istchenko, 1968). On
the other hand, the adult Striata-s are less
susceptible than other frogs to drying and
are characterized by high migration ability.
Correspondingly, in some ecosystems with
unfavorable conditions, striped specimens
predominate (Istchenko, 1978; Vershinin,
1987).
Therefore, the influence of the
developmental conditions on the ratio of
striped and non-striped morphs in the
generation may be considered well-
grounded. The role of the developmental
sites' type is obvious and our data are in
accordance with this fact. All the
researchers agree that the phenomena
depends on the elective elimination.
It is not possible in practice to only
conduct field investigations. What is the
part of individual modifications in the
process of morph distribution changing?
High natural mortality, especially during the
larval stages, does not allow us to exclude
the effect of natural selection. Thus, each
explanation depends on a prior opinion of
the concrete researcher. For instance, in
field conditions, information principally
similar to our experimental data was
obtained by Stchupak (1975). Increasing
the frequency of genotype S or M has
inverse reaction of larval grouping as the
result: the comparative part of the dominant
phenotype decreases by the completion of
metamorphosis. The author explains this
fact as the result of frequency-dependent
selection.
Part of the phenotypic modification
during the early development can be
established only in experiments where larval
mortality can be neglected. The experiment
described above illustrates the main part of
modifications taking place during larval
development. We conclude that in some
specimens displacement of the characters in
the road of alternative variants could be
changes as a result of temperature changes.
Vol. 6, p. 128
Asiatic Herpetological Research
January 1995
M
PS
S
^;-
lw ** 4rS fj
£
v 9
1 -400
FIG. 4. Distribution of the pigmental cells in the mid-dorsal area of froglets that have different phenotypes.
Magnification is X400.
It brings us to suppose that morphological
specifics of froglet groups is provided not
only by elective elimination but by
phenotypic modifications as well. What is
the comparative part of this latter could be
shown by further investigations.
Experimental results described here and
evidence in favor of the main part of
phenotypic modifications are obtained
namely for R. macrocnemis, not
surprisingly. This is the only boreal brown
frog in which non-striped and striped
morphs are connected by continual inter-
gradations (Istchenko, 1978) and practically
the character "presence of the mid-dorsal
stripe" varies as the quantitative one. On the
one hand, it may be connected with the
specific nature of the character inheritance in
this species; but it is less possible. More
realistic is taking in our opinion that every
character, both quantitative and qualitative,
are determined by quantitative
morphogenetic processes. Thus
development of coloration of the mid-dorsal
stripe in Acris crepitans is determined by the
size of pigmental cells and genetical
specifics of morphs may be shaded (Gray,
1972). We observed the dorsal surface of
R. macrocnemis froglets with different
coloration patterns under a binocular.
Presence of the mid-dorsal stripe depends
on the rate of pigment concentration
declining toward the dorso-medial line (Fig.
4). The lower density of the pigmental cells
along the mid-dorsal line in all froglets can
be observed. But to distinguish the stripe
with the naked eye, the gradient of
pigmental cells concentration must be
expressed enough or exceed a certain
threshold. Morphogenetically, the presence
of the gradient is determined by the kinds of
melanophorisation of the dorsal surface
before metamorphosis: the mid-dorsal
surface is filled in by pigmental cells at the
end. The phenotype of the froglet: S, PS,
PPS or M which appears to correspond with
the degree of filling in the mid-dorsal
surface by melanophores just before
metamorphic climax has begun. The
hereditary mechanisms keep the main part of
this process but regulation of
morphogenesis by the environment is
important, too. Perhaps comparative
significance of the environment increases in
non-optimal conditions.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 129
Perhaps in the base of phenotype
formation in species characterized by severe
alternative variation of the character (e.g. R.
arvalis or R. ridibunda) the same
morphological processes occur. But, in
these species, inter-gradations between S-
and M- morphs are absent. It may depend
either on greater part of hereditary in stripe
determination among these species or on a
more expressed threshold level. It must be
explained. Developmental processes which
form the ground of coloration pattern
formation may finish in some developmental
stage before metamorphosis has began. One
or another phenotype could be formed
depending on if the process exceeds some
threshold level or not. Depending on the
expression of this threshold or prolongation
of final stage of color formation (when basic
processes are completed) takes place either
in continual distribution of morphs (as in R.
macrocnemis) or in bi-modal distribution (as
in R. arvalis).
The scheme described above, as we can
see, does not exclude identity of the
inheritance nature of the Striata in R .
macrocnemis to those in R. arvalis or other
anurans. But, it does not allow us to neglect
the modification ability of this character in
the population investigations, especially in
species with continual distribution of the
stripe expression. Perhaps in some cases,
the quantitative value of pigment cell density
along the mid-dorsal line can be a more
adequate index of the mid-dorsal-strip
development.
We took into consideration the evidence
data of differential survival ability of S- and
M- genotypes (Schvarz and Istchenko,
1968). In part, a higher mortality of
tadpoles with S-genotype was established
when a high density or an oxygen shortage
takes place. Increasing the developmental
temperature could have the same effect.
But, not only the death of S- tadpoles can be
a result of the worsening of environmental
conditions: they can modify their genotype
without lacking of survival ability. Perhaps,
the character Striata correlates with the
intensification of metabolism, not at a
genetical but rather at an epigenetical level.
Processes which take part in the mid-dorsal
stripe formation also affect intensification of
energetic exchange. If intensity of these
processes change, neither their
morphological nor physiological results
appear. There is an interesting example of
the phenomena when modifications during
the separate animal's life results similarly to
a short-term selection at the population level.
It appears as one of the hard moments in
micro-evolutional investigations but would
not be neglected.
Acknowledgments
I greatly appreciate my wife, R.
Mamradze, for her help in the elaboration of
the experiment. I also appreciate J.
Manukjan and S. Tzabadze for their help in
the experimental and field work, and to J.
Ilieva for reading the manuscript.
Literature Cited
BERGER, J. AND J. IMIETOWSKI. 1982.
Inheritance of vertebral stripe in Rana ridibunda Pall.
Amphibia-Repulia 3,(2-3): 145-151.
BROWDER, L. W., J. C. UNDERHILL AND D. J.
MERREL. 1966. Mid-dorsal stripe in the wood
frog. Journal of Heredity 57(2):65-67.
DUELLMAN, W. E. AND L. TRUEB. 1986.
Biology of amphibians. McGraw-Hill Book
Company, i-xvii + 1-670.
FISHBECK, D. W. AND J. D. UNDERHILL. 1971.
Distribution of stripe polymorphism in wood frogs,
Rana sylvalica. Le Contc, from Minnesota. Copeia
1971(2):253-259.
GOGOLEVA, N. P. 1989. [Polymorphism in anuran
populations]. Pp. 26-29. In N.N. Szczerbak (Ed.)
(Proc. 7th Sov. Herpetol. Symp.). Kiev, Naukova
dumka. (In Russian).
GOIN, C. J. 1947. Studies in the life history of
Eleutherodactylus ricordii planirostris (Cope) in
Florida. Univ. Florida publ. Biol. Sci. 4(2):l-56.
GRAY, R. H. 1972. Metachrosis of the vertebral
stripe in the cricket frog Acris crepitans. American
Midland Naturalist 87(2): 549-551.
HER AN, I. 1986. Comments on coloration and
color changes in Rana temporaria L. Pp. 267-270.
Vol.6, p. 130
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
In Z. Rocek (Ed), Proc. Eur. Herpetol. Meet,
Prague.
ISTCHENKO, V. G. 1978. [Dynamic
polymorphism of brown frogs of the USSR fauna].
Moscow, Nauka. 148pp. (In Russian).
ISTCHENKO, V. G. AND A. V. LEDENTSOV. 1987.
[Environmental influence on the age structure
dynamics in the moor frog populations]. Pp. 40-51.
In L. M. Suzumova (Ed), Vlijanie sredi na dinamiku
structuri I chislennosti populacij zhivotnih.
Sverdlovsk, Ural Sci. Cent. Acad. Sci. USSR. (In
Russian).
KUBANTSEV, B. S., T. J. PESKOVA AND I.
GORODNICHEVA. 1989. [On the variation of some
tailless amphibian species' coloration]. Pp. 126-
127. In N.N. Szczerbak (Ed.), Voprosi gerpetologii.
Kiev, Naukova Dumka. (In Russian).
LEBEDINSKI, A. A., T. B. GOLUBEVA AND V. I.
ANISIMOV. 1989. [Polymorphism among brown
and green frogs under the antropogenic pressure].
Pp. 139-140. In N.N. Szczerbak (Ed.), Voprosi
gerpetologii. Kiev, Naukova Dumka. (In Russian).
LEDENTSOV, A. V. 1990. [Dynamics of the age
structure and number of the reproductive part of the
moor frog (Rana arvalis Nilss.) population]. Reph.
Dissertation Cand. Biol. Sci. Sverdlovsk, Ural Sci.
Center Acad. Sci. USSR. 23pp. (In Russian).
MAMRADZE, R. G. 1989. [Effect of the thermal
conditions on the frequency of the phenotype Striata
in Iranian wood frog]. Pp. 151-152. In N.N.
Szczerbak (Ed.), Voprosi gerpetologii. Kiev,
Naukova Dumka. (In Russian).
MASALIKIN, A. I. 1985. [Populational-phenetic
analysis of the fire-bellied toad in the Voronezh
reserve]. P. 169. In Phenetica populacij
(Proceedings of the 3rd Soviet Phenetic meeting,
Saratov). Moscow, Nauka. (In Russian).
MELKUMJAN, L. S. AND K. E. VARDANJAN.
1985. [Polymorphism in the transcaucasian
populations of lake frog]. Biol. Journ. Armenia
38(3):267-270. (In Russian).
MORIWAKI, T. 1953. The inheritance of the dorso-
madian stripe in Rana limnocharis Wiegmann. J.
Sci. Hiroshima Univ., Ser. Biol. 1(14):159-164.
MORIYA, K. 1952. Genetical study of the pond
frog Rana nigromaculata.. 1. Two types of Rana
nigr. nigromaculata found in Tokata district. J. Sci.
Hiroshima Univ., Ser. Biol. 1(13):189.
PANCHENKO, I. M. 1985. [Phenotypic variation
of moor frog coloration in the flood-lands of Oka
River]. Pp. 171-173. In Phenetica populacij
(Proceedings of the 3rd Soviet Phenetic meeting,
Saratov). Moscow, Nauka. (In Russian).
PIKULIK,
Belorussia].
Russian).
M. M. 1985. [Amphibians of
Minsk, Nauka i technica. 192pp. (In
PYBURN, W. F. 1961. The inheritance and the
distribution of vertebral stripe color in the cricket
frog. Pp. 235-261. In Vertebrate speciation.
University of Texas Press, Austin.
SCHVARZ, S. S. AND V. G. ISTCHENKO. 1968.
[Dynamics of the genetic structure of the moor frog
population]. Bull. Mosc. Soc. Nat. Res. Ser. Biol.
73(3)127-134. (In Russian).
SHIBATA, Y. 1988. [Mid-dorsal stripe type of a
frog, Rana limnocharis, in northwestern islands of
Kyushu, Japan (Amphibia: Ranidae)]. Shizenzhi-
Kenkyu. (Proc. Osaka Mus. Nat. Hist.) 2(4):69-71.
(In Japanese).
STCHUPAK, E. L. 1975. Populational mechanisms
of conservation of the genetical structure in the Rana
arvalis Nilss. population. Bull. Acad. Sci. USSR
222(1 ):220-222. (In Russian).
STCHUPAK, E. L. 1977. Inheritance of the mid-
dorsal stripe in moor frog. Pp. 36-37. In Inform.
Materials Inst. Plant and Anim. Ecol. Sverdlovsk.
(In Russian).
STCHUPAK, E. L. AND V. G. ISTCHENKO. 1981.
On the hereditary base of color polymorphism in
moor frog (Rana arvalis Nilss.). 1 : light mid-dorsal
stripe. Pp. 128-132. In Herpetological researches
in Siberia and Far East. Leningrad, Nauka.
STUGREN, B. 1966. Geographic variation and
distribution of the Moor frog, Rana arvalis Nilss.
Ann. Zool. Fenn. 3(l):29-39.
TARKNISHVILI, D. N. In press. Embryonic and
larval mortality of the Caucasian brown frog in the
Borjomi Canyon: peculiarities and the main
reasons. Varan, St. Petersburg.
TARKNISHVILI, D. N. AND R. G. MAMRADZE.
1989. Modification of Caucasian brown frog's
phenotype under the influence of high temperature.
Bull. Acad. Sci. Georgia. 135(2):437-440.
June 1995 Asiatic Hematological Research Vol. 6, p. 131
TOPORKOVA, L. J. 1965. Geographical variation
of the morphological features in amphibians. I.
Rana terrestria Andrz. Nauchnie dokladi visshey
scholi, Ser. Biol. 1:31-36.
VERSHININ, V. L. 1987. Some features of the
phenetical structure of the moor frog groupings in
the industrial city. Pp. 74-79. In L. M. Suziimova
(Ed), Vlijanie sredi na dinamiku structuri I
chislennosti populacij zhivotnih. Sverdlovsk, Ural
Sci. Cent. Acad. Sci. USSR.
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 132-150
A New Genus for the Ramphotyphlops subocularis Species Group
(Serpentes: Typhlopidae), with Description of a New Species
VAN WALLACH
Center for Vertebrate Studies, Department of Biology, Northeastern University, Boston, MA 02115, USA
Abstract. — A new genus, Acutotyphlops, is established for McDowell's Ramphotvphlops subocularis
species group (minus R. willeyi which is transferred to the R.flaviventer group) based on a parietal bone
projection, head shield fragmentation, and a V-shaped lower jaw. Two species are revalidated, A. infralabialis
and A. solomonis, and a new species is described from Bougainville Island, A. kunuaensis. Acutotyphlops
kunuaensis, represented by more than 250 specimens, is distributed throughout Bougainville, both in the
coastal lowlands and the interior highlands. Sexual dimorphism is present in certain scutellation and
proportional characters. At least five species of typhlopids are now known to inhabit Bougainville Island.
Key words: Ramphotyphlops subocularis group, Acutotyphlops, A. kunuaensis, A. subocularis, A.
infralabialis, A. solomonis, Typhlops adamsi, T. bergi, Papua New Guinea, Bougainville
Introduction
McCoy (1970), McDowell (1974), and
Hahn (1980) listed three species of Typhlina
(= Ramphotyphlops) inhabiting
Bougainville Island in the Solomons:
Ramphotyphlops braminus, R.flaviventer
(= R. depressus fide Wallach, in prep.), and
R. subocularis. In his thorough review of
the typhlopids of New Guinea and the
Solomon Islands, McDowell (1974) defined
the Ramphotyphlops subocularis species
group as lacking a rectal caecum and
exhibiting a wedge-shaped lateral snout
profile. He recognized two species in the
group, Ramphotyphlops subocularis (Waite,
1897) and R. willeyi (Boulenger, 1900),
considering the latter to be the most
primitive member, scarcely differing from
R. flaviv enter (Peters, 1864) of the
Ramphotyphlops flaviventer species group
except in the wedge-shaped snout and
absence of a caecum. Ramphotyphlops
subocularis was described as differing from
R. willeyi in the more specialized
fragmentation of the lateral head shields
(multiple preoculars and suboculars vs. a
single preocular and no subocular),
increased number of midbody scale rows
(26-36 vs. 20-22), and the acute mandibular
symphysis (V-shaped vs. U-shaped).
Ramphotyphlops willeyi also differs from
R . subocularis in the presence of a
unicameral right lung (vs. multicameral), a
convoluted and multisegmented liver (vs.
straight and unsegmented), and absence of
frontorostral and paired prefrontals on the
dorsum of the head (pers. obs.).
McDowell (1974) placed five nominal
taxa in the synonymy of Ramphotyphlops
subocularis, stating that the number of valid
species remained to be determined but based
upon published data there was no evidence
to suggest that more than one variable
species was involved. The taxa
synonymized with R. subocularis were
Typhlops infralabialis Waite, 1918,
Typhlops solomonis Parker, 1939,
Typhlops bergi Peters, 1948, Typhlops
keasti Kinghorn, 1948, and Typhlops
adamsi Tanner, 1951 (see McDowell, 1974,
for complete synonymy). An examination
of the types of all of the above taxa, plus the
majority of Ramphotyphlops subocularis
material in museum collections indicates that
the R. subocularis complex consists of at
least four valid species (R. subocularis, R.
infralabialis, R . solomonis, and an
undescribed species that forms the topic of
this paper). A description of the cranial
osteology, internal anatomy, and geographic
variation in the Ramphotyphlops subocularis
group, with emphasis on the new species,
will be the subject of a future paper
(Wallach, Wong and Meszoely, in prep).
Methods
All traceable museum specimens of the
Ramphotyphlops subocularis group (> 325
specimens) were examined, including the
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 133
types of all nominal taxa. Due to
misidentifications in collections, some
specimens may have been overlooked.
Specimens were examined with an Olympus
binocular dissecting microscope and
measurements were made to the nearest 0.5
mm, including total length (LOA), tail length
(TL), midtail diameter (MTD), anterior
(ABD), midbody (MBD) and posterior
(PBD) body diameters, and diameter in the
nuchal region (ND). Total middorsals or
transverse scale rows (TSR) were counted
between the rostral and terminal spine,
dorsocaudals (DC) along the midline in a
perpendicular plane to the anterior
ventrolateral edge of the vent to the apical
spine, and subcaudals (SC) between the
vent and the spine. Five longitudinal scale
row (LSR) counts were made: postcephalic
or anterior (ASR) scale rows were counted
at the level of the 20th scale caudad of the
mental, midbody (MSR) rows at midbody,
and precloacal or posterior (PSR) rows were
counted at the level of the 10th scale craniad
of the anals; two further values were
calculated by adding the midbody and
posterior counts (MPSR) and also the
anterior, midbody and posterior counts
(AMPSR). Relative tail length ratio
(TL/LOA) is the length of the tail from
posterior border of vent to tip of apical spine
divided by overall length, body proportion
ratio (LOA/MBD) is overall length divided
by midbody diameter, and tail proportion
ratio (TL/MTD) is length of tail divided by
the midtail diameter.
Due to state of preservation and injection
of preservative (either lack thereof or
overinjection), not to mention health of the
animal at time of preservation, both body
and tail proportion figures only approximate
the condition in life and were thus rounded
to the nearest integer (except in the case of
type specimens); carrying out the
calculations to one decimal point infers a
precision that is unrealistic. Care must be
taken especially in interpreting the tail
proportion ratios as injection of tail with
preservative probably leads to a distortion of
the true values but the data are presented in
the hope that all tails have been similarly
biased and therefore of comparative value.
Head width (HW) is diameter of head at
midocular level; head length (HL) is distance
from tip of snout to midocular level. All
diameter measurements were made in either
dorsal or ventral view.
Statistics were calculated with the
Macintosh Statview program. Mean values
are presented with their standard errors (SE)
and ranges (r); CV represents the coefficient
of variation. Probability values in the
Tables refer to the student's f-test of sample
means. In Tables 4-5 data are presented by
sex and both sexes combined; when a
statistically significant difference exists
between the means of the male and female
samples, the probability value is given in
place of the data for the sexes combined.
Tables 6-7 summarize only the combined
sex samples as no statistically significant
sexual difference was found to be present.
Due to inconsistencies in the literature,
clarification is given for terminology of the
head shields in the Ramphotyphlops
subocularis group as the fragmentation of
cephalic scutes is a diagnostic character. As
discussed by Parker (1939) and Kinghorn
(1948), the proliferation of head shields in
the R. subocularis group has led to
confusion and uncertainty as to correct
homologies. Kinghorn (1948) proposed the
most logical system of nomenclature for
these shields and his system is followed
here with minor changes. Proliferation of
the lateral head shields is the result of
division of the ocular and preocular shield of
typical typhlopids. The Ramphotyphlops
subocularis group exhibits two patterns of
preocular (PR) arrangement: a single large
preocular (R. infralabialis and new species)
or a longitudinally divided shield with a
large superior preocular and a smaller
inferior preocular (R. subocularis and R.
solomonis). Division of the typical
typhlopid ocular shield has produced an
anterior (AO) and posterior ocular (O) and
suboculars (S). The suboculars are
arranged in one or two horizontal rows
between the oculars and supralabials (L) and
termed superior and inferior, and considered
vertically in one to three columns as
anterior, middle and posterior. Postoculars
(T) are defined as all scales in contact with
Vol. 6, p. 134
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 1 . Variation in the holotypes of the Ramphotyphlops subocularis species group
Character subocularis keasti solomonis infralabialis adamsi bergi kunuaensis
1 MUS = museum, NO = catalogue number, S = sex (M = male, F = female), LOA = total length (mm), TL
= tail length (mm), TSR = transverse scale rows, LSR = longitudinal scale rows, MPSR = midbody and
posterior scale row sum, AMPSR = anterior, midbody and posterior scale row sum, SC = subcaudals, DC =
dorsocaudals, TL/LOA = relative tail length, TL/MTD = tail length/midtail diameter, LOA/MBD = total
length/midbody diameter, PROC = preoculars, OC = oculars, SOC = suboculars (colon separates values from
left/right side of head), PTOC = postoculars (colon separates values from left/right side of head), SNS =
nostril-rostral division by superior nasal suture, INS = supralabial contact of inferior nasal suture, SIP =
supralabial imbrication pattern (colon separates pattern on left/right side of head), SL = supralabials (colon
separates values from left/right side of head), IL = infralabials (colon separates values on left side from right
side), AS = anal shields, ABD = anterior body diameter, ND = nuchal diameter, MBD = midbody diameter,
PBD = posterior body diameter, HW/HL = head width/head length, DOR = dorsum pattern, PRD = pigmented
rows of dorsum, URV = unpigmented rows of venter
the ocular and/or suboculars between the
parietal and fourth supralabial. In addition to
the ocular fragmenting into preoculars and
suboculars, there are three shields (a median
azygous shield bordered laterally by a pair
of larger shields) located on the dorsum of
the snout between the rostral/postnasals and
supraoculars (SO). In reference to the
azygous shield typically known as the
prefrontal in typhlopids, Kinghorn (1948)
termed it the frontonasal while the pair
laterally bordering the frontonasal were
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.6, p. 135
TABLE 2. Qualitative characters of the Ramphotyphlops subocularis species group
Species
DP
LP
RS
SN
IP
cs
AS
1 DP = dorsal snout profile (R = rounded, P = pointed), LP = lateral snout profile (R = rounded, W = wedge-
shaped, P = pointed), SN = supranasals, IP = interparietal, P = parietals (E = enlarged, D = divided), CS =
costal shape (R = rounded, H = subhexagonal), AS = apical spine (T = thornlike, S = spinelike, 0 = absent),
RS = rostral size (N = narrow, M = moderate, B = broad)
called prefrontals (PF). Preference is here
given to the term frontorostral (FR) for the
azygous shield, a term that better describes
its position as it is located between the
rostral (R) and frontal (F). Peters (1948)
erroneously suggested that the prefrontals of
Typhlops bergi were the first of three pairs
of supraoculars. The shields that Kinghorn
(1948) termed the internasals in Typhlops
keasti (also present in R. subocularis) are
here referred to as supranasals (SN),
following Brongersma (1934) and
McDowell (1974). The median shield that
Kinghorn (1948) referred to as a parietal in
T. keasti is here called the postfrontal (FL)
as some species in the R. subocularis group
retain paired, enlarged parietals (P) in
addition to a median postfrontal and
interparietal (IP). See Fig. 1 for
identification of the head shields in the
Ramphotyphlops subocularis species group.
Supralabial imbrication patterns (SIP)
follow Wallach (1993a) with the addition of
the following prefixes for multiple
preocular, ocular, and subocular shields: A
= anterior, M = median, and P = posterior.
In situ hemipenes were observed to
determine the number of coils in the
retracted organ but this was difficult to
objectively evaluate as, in addition to simple
coils, all manner of twists, partial loops, and
zig-zag folds occur. Single folds or zig-
zags and half loops were scored as half
coils. All counts were made on the left
organ. Museum acronyms follow Leviton et
al. (1985). Catalogue entries for
Bougainville localities with different spelling
from those on recent maps include Melilup
(= Melelup), Mutahi (= Mutuhai), Topanas
(= Topanos), and Torakina (= Torokina).
Data from specimens of the new species
from the following localities were combined
and analyzed as single units: Kieta and
North Nasioi (= Kieta); Buin, Malabita and
Turiboiru (= Buin); Torokina, Cape
Torokina, Piva and Empress Augusta Bay
(= Torokina); Mutuhai and Melelup (=
Mutuhai). Elevations determined from
government topo maps with 50 m contour
lines prefaced with "ca."; NSL represents an
elevation near sea level.
Results
Redescription ofholotypes
Comparative data for the types of all
nominal taxa in the Ramphotyphlops
subocularis group are presented in Tables 1-
2. Only those features not listed in Table 1
or previously mentioned in the literature are
discussed below.
Typhlops subocularis. — The holotype of
T. subocularis (AMS R2202; Figs, la-c, 2a-
b) was erroneously reported by Waite
(1897) to have 36 midbody scale rows (34
in the paratype, which is now missing fide
Cogger, 1979, and not available for
examination) but there are 34 rows at
midbody. The apical spine is large with a
Vol. 6, p. 136
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG. 1 . Head shield terminology of the Ramphotyphlops subocularis species group. Head of holotype of T.
subocularis (after Waite, 1897): a) dorsal view, b) lateral view, c) ventral view; head of holotype of T.
infralabialis (after Waite, 1918): d) dorsal view, e) lateral view, 0 ventral view; head of holotype of T.
solomonis (after Parker, 1939): g) dorsal view, h) lateral view; head of holotype of T. bergi (after Peters,
1948): i) dorsal view. AO = anterior ocular, F - frontal, FL = postfrontal, FR = frontorostral, IP -
interparietal, L = supralabial, N = nasal, P = parietal, PF = prefrontal, PR = preocular, PT = postfrontal, R =
rostral, S = subocular, SN = supranasal, SO = supraocular, T = postocular, stippled eye shield = ocular (T.
subocularis) or posterior ocular (T. infralabialis, T. solomonis)
broad base (aptly described as thorn-like by
Waite) and it points upward as the tail is
flexed dorsally. Whether this is an artifact
of preservation (injection with preservative)
or a characteristic of the R. subocularis
group is unknown, but this dorsal flexure of
the tail tip was commonly observed in other
specimens. The nostril is half-moon
shaped, oriented at 45° to the vertical, and
directed laterally. The SIP is T-0 (N1/SL1,
PrOc/SL2, ASOc/SL3, PtOc/SL4). The
first three supralabials are subequal in size
and length while the fourth supralabial is
more than twice as deep and long as any of
the other three. The dorsum is uniformly
dark brown while the venter is golden-
yellow. A sharp demarcation separates the
two colors with only an occasional brown
scale appearing in the uppermost yellow
scale row.
Typhlops keasti. — The status of T.
keasti (AMS R 12856) is uncertain. Other
than the distinctive depression of the head
with its laterally pointed snout and strongly
tapered head in dorsal aspect there is nothing
to separate T. keasti from R. subocularis.
Kinghorn (1948) erroneously reported the
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.6, p. 137
FIG. 2. Head of holotypc of Typhlops subocularis (AMS R2202): a) dorsal view, b) lateral view; head of
holotype of Typhlops solomonis (IRSNB 2029): c) dorsal view, d) lateral view; head of holotype of Typhlops
infralabialis (AMS R4609): e) dorsal view, 0 lateral view; head of holotype of Typhlops adamsi (MVZ
40753): g) lateral view. Bar = 1 mm.
Vol.6, p. 138
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
type of T. keasti to possess 32 midbody
scale rows but it has 34 rows with an
identical formula (40-34-30) to that of the
type of Typhlops subocularis. Also, he
reported an overall length of 285 mm with a
midbody diameter of 5 mm but the specimen
now measures 373 mm overall with a 10.5
mm diameter. The apical spine of the tail
flexes dorsad. On the left side of the head,
the SIP is T-0 (N1/SL1, PrOc/SL2,
MSOc/SL3, PtOc/SL4) with four
supralabials. On the right side the second
supralabial is divided, resulting in five
supralabials, and the third supralabial
overlaps the inferior anterior subocular,
forming a T-III SIP (N1/SL1, PrOc/SL2a,
PrOc/SL2b/ASOc, MSOc/SL3, PtOc/SL4).
This is clearly an anomalous condition: five
supralabials occur only rarely in the R.
subocularis group and the more primitive T-
III SIP is characteristic of the three other
species. The dorsum is reddish-brown and
the venter is gold with occasional scales
pigmented in brown. A wide nuchal collar
(6-10 scales) is confluent with the light color
of the chin and venter. In addition to the
type of Typhlops keasti I have examined
three additional specimens from Papua New
Guinea referrable to this taxon (NMBA
11705-06, 11708). Several specimens of
the undescribed species resemble T. keasti
in the acute depression of the head. It seems
preferable to consider Typhlops keasti a
synonym of Ramphotyphlops subocularis as
suggested by McDowell (1974). Robb
(1966) reported T. keasti to have a
Ramphotyphlops-likt hemipenis but did not
mention the number of coils. If further
material should substantiate other
differences between T. keasti and R.
subocularis, then T. keasti may be regarded
as a separate sympatric species.
Typhlops solomonis. — The type of T.
solomonis (IRSNB 2029; Figs, lg-h, 2c-d)
is in a premolting condition with a milky
appearance and numerous sloughing scales
along various portions of the body, a factor
making an accurate middorsal count
difficult. Prominent gland depressions are
present along the head shield margins. A
large circular nostril is obliquely oriented in
a semidivided nasal and just visible from
above. The eye is dimly visible with a pupil
and the SIP is T-III (N1/SL1, PrOc/SL2,
PrOc/SL3/SOc, PtOc/SL4). The dorsum is
uniformly dark brown (with a grayish
overcast due to premolting condition) while
the venter is gold with a sharp demarcation
between them. Several anals are white and
the terminal spine is directed slightly ventrad
and orange.
Typhlops infralabialis. — The type of T.
infralabialis (AMS R4609; Figs, ld-f, 2e-f)
has a T-III SIP (N2/SL1, PrOc/SL2,
PrOc/SL3/ASOc, PSOc/SL4) and the tail
curves ventrally. The half-moon shaped
nostril is directed laterally and inclined at 45°
to the body axis. The dorsum and venter are
severely faded but a lineate pattern is faintly
visible; the central portions of each scale are
brown with lighter margins. Pigmentation
decreases ventrally so that the lower scale
rows are light with a small dark central spot.
Typhlops adamsi. — The type of T.
adamsi (MVZ 40753; Fig. 2g) is similar to
T . infralabialis except that the suture
dividing the preocular from the anterior
ocular is incomplete (as in two specimens of
the undescribed species) and the dorsal head
profile is bluntly rounded rather than
pointed. The SIP is T-III (N1/SL1,
PrOc/SL2, AOc/SL3/ASOc, PtOc/SL4); the
tail tip is straight and terminates in a soft
protuberance (possibly an apical spine was
present but is missing due to damage). The
color pattern consists of a brown dorsum
with lineate effect (only central half of each
scale pigmented), fading to pink ventrally.
Six specimens of the new species from
Bougainville exhibit a condition similar to
that seen in the type of Typhlops adamsi
with the preocular semifused to the anterior
ocular. The type of Typhlops adamsi
appears to be an anomalous
Ramphotyphlops infralabialis and is placed
in the synonymy of that species.
Typhlops bergi. — The type of T. bergi
(UMMZ 95445; Fig. lh) exhibits a T-III
SIP (N1/SL1, PrOc/SL2, PrOc/SL3/ASOc,
PtOc/SL4). The half-moon shaped nostril is
inclined at 45° and directed laterally. The
inferior nasal suture contacts SL2 near its
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 139
TABLE 3. Variation in the ocular shields of the Ramphotyphlops subocularis species group
1
no. = number or formula, freq. = frequency (each side counted separately), PR = preoculars, O = oculars, S
suboculars, PT = postoculars
TABLE 4. Transverse scale rows of Ac utotyphlops 1
Species
TSR
SC
DC
1 mean 1 SE (range), S = sex (F = female, M = male, B = both sexes combined or p value when significant
difference exists between means of each sex), TSR = transverse scale rows, SC = subcaudals, DC =
dorsocaudals
Vol. 6, p. 140
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 5. Proportional characters of Acutotyphlops
1 mean ± SE (range), S = sex (F = female, M = male, B = both sexes combined or p value when significant
difference exists between means of each sex), TL/LOA = tail length/total length, LOA/MBD = total
length/midbody diameter, TL/MTD = tail length/midtail diameter
TABLE 6. Longitudinal scale rows of Acutotyphlops 1
Species n ASR MSR
PSR
* mean 1 SE (range), ASP = anterior scale rows, MSR = midbody scale rows, PSR = posterior scale
rows
TABLE 7. Miscellaneous characters of Acutotyphlops
Species
MPSR
AMPSR
LOA
* mean 1 SE (range), MPSR = midbody and posterior scale row sum, AMPSR = anterior, midbody and
posterior scale row sum, LOA = total length
junction with SL1 and partially covers an
inferior nasal pit. The dorsum is brown
with light scale margins forming a lineate
pattern. The inferior nasal pit is not unique
to T. bergi as nearly 10% of the sample of
the undescribed Bougainville species
possesses it. The paired supraoculars are
distinctive although aberrantly present in
three individuals (1.2%) of the new species.
Scale counts, body proportions, and color
pattern suggest that the type of T. bergi is an
anomalous T. infralabialis. Should further
material display the paired supraoculars, T.
bergi might be considered subspecifically
distinct.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 141
Revalidation ofTaxa
The summarized data in Tables 1-7
demonstrate the distinctness of the four
species here considered valid (R .
subocularis, R. solomonis, R. infralabialis,
and the new species). The R. subocularis
group is characterized by six uniquely
derived features unknown among other
typhlopids. An osteological synapomorphy
of all species is the presence of an acuminate
parietal projection separating the posterior
frontals. This median middorsal "spike" of
the parietal bone, wedged between the
posterior portions of the frontals, has not
been reported in any other scolecophidian.
Examination of six skulls reveals the parietal
spike to extend for the following distances
along the interfrontal suture: 0.20-0.25 in R.
solomonis, 0.33 in R. subocularis and the
undescribed species, and 0.40 in R.
infralabialis. Multiple preocular, ocular
and/or subocular shields (Table 3), a V-
shaped lower jaw with 5-7 infralabials
(Figs, lc, f), and a frontorostral shield
bordered by a pair of enlarged prefrontals
(Figs, la, d, g, i) are other synapomorphies
of the group as here defined with the
exclusion of Ramphotyphlops willeyi.
Additional derived characters present in the
R. subocularis group (but not exclusively
so) include lack of a rectal caecum, a
uropelud-like nuchal expansion such that the
greatest diameter of the body is behind the
head, a high number of longitudinal scale
rows (> 26 midbody rows present in 27
species of African and Asian Typhlops and
15 species of Rhinotyphlops), sexual
dimorphism in relative tail length and
number of subcaudals and dorsocaudals
(i.e., Perry, 1985, for Typhlops
vermicularis), a multicameral right lung
(present in Rhinotyphlops and some
Typhlops), and a straight unsegmented liver
(present also in Rhinotyphlops).
Ramphotyphlops willeyi is thus transferred
to the R.flaviv enter species group, which
possesses a unicameral right lung. It is
considered a derived member of that group
based upon the wedge-shaped snout and
absence of a rectal caecum (McDowell,
1974).
Due to the uniqueness of the R.
subocularis group, which is distinguished
from all other typhlopids by no fewer than
six synapomorphies and has been
previously suggested as worthy of separate
generic status (Dunn and Tihen, 1944;
McDowell, 1974), a new genus is
established to contain the four species
discussed herein. The removal of these
species, having 26-36 midbody scale rows,
from Ramphotyphlops leaves all members
of that genus but one with 16-24 midbody
scale rows, the sole exception being the
Philippine Rampfiotyphlops cumingii (24-28
rows). The new genus may be known as
Acutotyphlops gen. nov.
Type species. — Acutotyphlops
kunuaensis sp. nov.
Diagnosis. — Distinguished from all
other typhlopid genera by any of the
following characters: a middorsal parietal
spike partially separating the frontal bones, a
V-shaped lower jaw, two or more subocular
shields, a frontorostral shield bordered by a
pair of prefrontals, five or more infralabial
shields, and sum of preocular and ocular
shields three or more.
Etymology. — From the Latin acutus,
meaning pointed, in reference to both the
parietal spike of the skull and the symphysis
of the lower jaw of the four included
species, plus the dorsal and lateral head
profiles of the type species.
Description. — Acuminate projection of
parietal bone separating posterior frontals
along 0.2-0.4 of the interfrontal suture; 4-5
maxillary teeth (4 in A. subocularis and A.
solomonis; 5 in A . infralabialis and
undescribed species); 2-4 dorsal foramina in
nasal bone; cephalic glands confined to
bases of shields beneath sutures; widest part
of body in nuchal region due to expanded
axial musculature, presumably adaptive for
burrowing and similar to condition in the
Uropeltidae fide Gans, 1976, and Gans et
al., 1978; rostral narrow and short,
extending halfway to the level of the eyes;
median azygous frontorostral bordered by
paired prefrontals; superior nasal suture
Vol. 6, p. 142
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
NEW IRELAND
BOUGAINVILLE
GB IRG1 \ <9 ^4^
■ A. subocularis
Q .4. solomonis
0 .4. kunuaensis
A .4. infralabialis
Gl \l'\l < \N\1
FIG. 3. Distribution of Acutotyphlops n. gen.. Solid symbols represent specimens examined, open
symbols denote type localities.
incomplete; caudal border of nasal concave;
inferior nasal suture contacting second
supralabial; preocular single or divided
longitudinally; ocular single or divided
transversely (if divided, small eye with
visible pupil present beneath posterior
ocular); sum of preocular and ocular shields
3-6; 2-7 suboculars; 4 supralabials with
fourth 2-3 times as long as deep and twice
as long as any of the other three; 5-7
infralabials; longitudinal scale rows with
anterior and posterior reductions; 26-36
midbody scale rows; sum of anterior,
midbody and posterior scale rows 88-110;
lower jaw V-shaped; right lung
multicameral; liver straight and unsegmented
(as in Alethinophidia); rectal caecum absent
(as in most Alethinophidia); lateral tongue
papillae absent; Ramphotyphlops-Uke
hemipenis with 3-9 coils in retracted
position; sexual dimorphism in relative tail
length and both subcaudal and dorsocaudal
scale counts; moderate-sized
scolecophidians with maximum length of
400 mm (except A. solomonis at 500 mm)
and moderate length/width ratios of 25-50.
Content. — Four recognized species:
Acutotyphlops subocularis (Waite, 1897),
including its synonym Typhlops keasti
Kinghorn, 1948; Acutotyphlops infralabialis
(Waite, 1918), including its synonyms
Typhlops bergi Peters, 1948, and Typhlops
adamsi Tanner, 1951; Acutotyphlops
solomonis (Parker, 1939); and
Acutotyphlops kunuaensis sp. nov.
Distribution. — Eastern Papua New
Guinea and the Solomon Islands (Fig. 3).
Acutotyphlops subocularis, the northern
form, is known from eastern Papua New
Guinea (one record from Morobe Province)
and the Bismarck Archipelago, NSL-1065
m. The two central forms, recorded from
NSL-915 m, include Acutotyphlops
kunuaensis n. sp., endemic to Bougainville
Island, and A. solomonis, recorded from
eastern Papua New Guinea (one record from
Milne Bay Province) and Bougainville.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 143
Artificial key to the genus Acutotyphlops
la. Preocular single, anterior suboculars paired, dorsal snout
profile rounded
lb. Preocular divided, anterior suboculars single, dorsal snout
profile pointed
2a. Supranasals present, ocular single, supralabial imbrication
pattern T-0
2b. Supranasals absent, ocular divided, supralabial imbrication
pattern T-HI
3a Midbody scale rows 26-28
3b. Midbody scale rows 30-36
2
3
A. subocularis
A. solomonis
A. infralabialis
A. kunuaensis
Acutotyphlops infralabialis, the southern
form, has the widest distribution, being
known from Bougainville, New Georgia,
Malaita, and Guadalcanal in the Solomon
Islands, 15-245 m.
Specimens of Acutotyphlops have not
been reported from some of the large islands
in the Solomons (Choiseul, Florida, San
Cristobal, and Santa Isabel). Thus its
distribution in the southern Solomons is
poorly known. More collecting is urged,
not only in the southern Solomons, but also
in eastern Papua New Guinea as
Acutotyphlops may occur in other localities
along the eastern coast.
Type Species of Acutotyphlops
The species to be designated as the type
of Acutotyphlops has been recognized as a
novel taxon for 25 years and is represented
in the MCZ collection by more than 220
individuals collected by Fred Parker from
August 1960 to May 1966, 180 of them
from the type locality of Kunua. Several
workers have borrowed the MCZ material to
study but it has never been described. This
blind snake was mentioned by Parker
(1970) as being one of 13 new species from
Bougainville that "either have been
described or soon will be," based upon nine
years of collecting by himself and natives.
The new form is finally christened
Acutotyphlops kunuaensis sp. nov.
Figs. 4a-b, 5
Holotype. — MCZ 76964, an adult male
collected by Fred Parker (field no. X-4688)
on 19 August 1963.
Type locality. — Kunua, coastal
northwestern Bougainville Island, North
Solomons Province, extreme eastern Papua
New Guinea, 5°46'S, 154°43'E, elevation
ca. 30 m.
Paratypes (n = 180). — Same locality and
collector as that of the holotype (date of
collection in parentheses following catalogue
number): MCZ 72067-74 (21.vi.62),
72075-77 (22.vi.62), 72078 (27.vi.62),
72080 (22.vii.62), 72130 (25.xii.62),
72131-32 (24.V.62), 72133-36 (13.vi.62),
76714, 76716-26 (24.vii.63), 76926-27,
76929-30 (28.vii.63), 76931-32, 76935-39
(ll.viii.63), 76950, 76955-57, 76959,
124473 (16.viii.63), 76960 (21.viii.63),
76961-65, 76967 (19.viii.63), 76968-74,
76977, 76979-80, 76982-83, 76986-89
(28.viii.63), 76990-96, 76998-7007
(29.viii.63), 77008-13 (31.viii.63), 77016-
22 (5.ix.63), 77023-33, 77036, 77038
(8.ix.63), 77037 (15.ix.63), 77267-79,
77282-90 (l.ix.63), and 77292-306
(12.ix.63). Collection date unknown for the
following paratypes: MCZ 76206, 76682-
87, 76690-700, 76704-12, 76948.
Etymology. — The specific epithet is
derived from the type locality, Kunua,
where the entire type series originated.
Diagnosis. — Distinguished from all
other typhlopids by the following
combination of characters: snout pointed in
dorsal and lateral aspects, mandibles V-
Vol. 6, p. 144
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
FIG. 4. Head of holotype of Acutotyphlops kunuaensis n. sp. (MCZ 76964): a) dorsal view, b) lateral view.
Bar = 1 mm.
FIG. 5. Distribution of Acutotyphlops on
Bougainville showing sympatric localities of A.
kunuaensis, A. solomonis, and A. infralabialis.
view, 30-36 midbody
a T-] supralabial
shaped in ventral
scale rows, and
imbrication pattern. On Bougainville Island,
Acutotyphlops kunuaensis can be identified
by its pointed snout in conjunction with 30
or more midbody scale rows.
Description of holotype. — Total length
221 mm, tail length 10.5 mm, midtail
diameter 4.5 mm, relative tail length 4.75%,
tail length/width ratio 2.3. Postcephalic and
precloacal body diameters 5 mm, midbody
diameter 6 mm, latter contained in overall
length 37 times. Widest portion of body is
expanded nuchal region with diameter of 6.5
mm. Transverse scale rows 385,
subcaudals 21, and dorsocaudals 22.
Longitudinal scale row formula 38-32-28.
Tail tip straight with spine-like apical spine.
Head much narrower than neck and body,
tapering to acute point. Rostral twice as
long as broad in dorsal view, bordered on
either side by pair of postnasals that extend
slightly beyond rostral border. Postnasals
separated on midline by frontorostral,
followed by slightly larger frontal, and then
somewhat smaller postfrontal and
interparietal, subequal in size and broader
than long. Two pairs of larger shields,
lateral to this series, are the anterior
prefrontals and posterior supraoculars,
followed by smaller parietals.
Head obtusely pointed in lateral view
with wedge-shaped rostral. Nasal divided
into small prenasal and much larger
postnasal that extends onto dorsum of head.
Nostril's axis oriented at 45° angle to
vertical. Inferior nasal suture contacts SL2.
Superior nasal suture incomplete, extending
across half the nostril-rostral distance.
Preocular is large and single; ocular
transversely divided into anterior and
posterior shields of subequal size. Eye
small with large pupil, located beneath the
posterior ocular near border of anterior
ocular. Three smaller suboculars present
between oculars and SL4, arranged as
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 145
anterior subocular plus superior and inferior
posterior suboculars. Bordering posterior
ocular and suboculars, between the
supraocular and SL4, are three small
postoculars on left side and four postoculars
on right. Supralabial imbrication pattern T-
III (N1/SL1, APrOc/SL2,
APrOc/SL3/PPrOc, PtOc/SL4). Fourth
supralabial elongated and equal to length of
first three combined. All head shields
possess tiny convex tubercles irregularly
scattered over their surfaces.
In ventral view snout acutely pointed
and slightly trilobate, and mandibles of
lower jaw acutely angled or V-shaped with
slightly bulbous symphysis. Six infralabials
present on each side, separated by median
mental shield.
Overall coloration is dark brown dorsum
and pale yellow venter with strong
demarcation between the two colors. Only
occasionally are there a few lightly
pigmented scales in uppermost yellow row.
Each dorsal scale pigmented centrally with
very narrow light margin around periphery.
Wide yellow nuchal collar 4-5 scales long
middorsally and 8 scales midlaterally.
Middorsal 18 scale rows (17 posteriorly)
heavily pigmented while yellow rows
occupy 20-14-1 1 ventral scale rows.
Distribution. — Endemic to Bougainville
Island, Northern Solomons Province, Papua
New Guinea (Fig. 4). Apparently
widespread over the island as it is known
from the northwestern (Kunua), west-
central (Cape Torokina, Torokina, Torokina
Bay, Empress Augusta Bay), east-central
(North Nasioi, Kieta) and southern (Buin)
coastal regions plus the northern interior
(Melelup, Mutuhai, and Topanos).
Natural history. — The population
structure of Acutotyphlops kunuaensis is
such that juveniles and immature individuals
appear to have total lengths less than 180
-220 mm. The smallest gravid females are
222 mm in length. Adults average 220-300
mm in length. Mean female length is greater
than that for males. Only 3 males (2.7% of
sample) have total lengths greater than 300
mm but 16 females (11.3%) have lengths
between 300 and 380 mm. Females appear
to lay one (n=6) or two (n=5) eggs per
cycle, although one female (MCZ 72136)
has four developing ova on the left side with
a large egg on the right. Females with large
eggs were collected on 24 July, 28-29
August and 5 September 1963, indicating
that egg deposition probably occurs in
August and/or September.
Variation. — Lateral tongue papillae are
absent in nine specimens with protruded
tongues (AMS 121957, 123396, 123402-
03, MCZ 76695-96, 76722, 76972,
76986). An inferior nasal pit, similar to that
in the type of Typhlops bergi, is visible in at
least 21 specimens (8.2% of sample).
The mean number of helical coils in the
retracted hemipenis is 5.9±0. 176 SE in 68
specimens with a range of 3-9 coils and
modal values of 6.5 and 7 (9 specimens
each). There is a positive but weak
correlation between the number of coils and
total length, with regression formula for
number of hemipenis coils = 0.02 LOA +
1.38 (R2 = 0.29, CV = 21.2, F = 27.25
with 67 df, p < 0.0001). The large
intraspecific variation in the number of coils
in the retracted hemipenis is surprising and
urges caution in using the number as a
systematic character (McDowell, 1974;
Wallach, 1993b). Variation in hemipenial
coils should be examined in species of
Ramphotyphlops as it may be more stable in
that genus. If not, then the number of coils
would appear to have little taxonomic value.
The mean number of coils in the hemipenis
of other members of Acutotyphlops is as
follows: A. solomonis - A.l (r = 4.5-5, n =
6, CV = 16.1), A. subocularis - 5.5 (r = 4-
8, n = 8, CV = 24.8), and A. infralabialis -
8.2 (r = 7.5-9, n = 3, CV = 9.4). In
juvenile specimens the hemipenis is folded
in a zig-zag configuration rather than coiled
in loops. One specimen (MCZ 77306), with
a tail length of 9.5 mm, has both hemipenes
fully everted, the right organ measuring 43
mm in length and the left one 30 mm. The
hemipenis is nude, 0.5 mm in diameter, and
exhibits a sulcus spermaticus extending the
length of the organ that is V-shaped in
cross-section with a lateral flange or flap-
like extension. Another specimen (UPNG
Vol. 6, p. 146
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
TABLE 8. Sympatric female A. kunuaensis and A. solomonis scale counts '
Species
locality n
TSR
DC
AMPSR
* mean 1 SE (range), TSR = transverse scale rows, DC = dorsocaudals, AMPSR = anterior, midbody and
posterior scale row sum
TABLE 9. Sympatric male A. kunuaensis and A. solomonis scale counts *
Species locality n TSR DC
AMPSR
' mean 1 SE (range), TSR = transverse scale rows, DC = dorsocaudals, AMPSR = anterior, midbody and
posterior scale row sum, EAB = Empress Augusta Bay
1101), with a tail length of 13 mm, has the
right organ incompletely (?) everted to a
length of 18 mm and a diameter of 0.2 mm
throughout. The partially everted organ of
AMS 121699 shows the terminus of the
hemipenis to be slightly bulbous and
containing a shallow teardrop-shaped
expansion of the sulcus.
Sympatric populations. — Acutotyphlops
kunuaensis is sympatric with A. solomonis
at seven localities throughout the island:
Kunua, Torokina, Empress Augusta Bay,
Kieta, Buin, Melelup, and Mutuhai (Fig. 5).
At each of these localities the two species are
distinctly different in head shape, body
form, and scutellation (Tables 8-9). Since
sexual dimorphism is present in scale counts
and tail proportions, each sex is discussed
separately. At Kunua, the two species have
similar TSR counts, but there are fewer DC
and more AMPSR in A. kunuaensis than in
A. solomonis. At Torokina, Mutuhai and
Melelup, A. kunuaensis has a significantly
higher number of TSR and AMPSR in
conjunction with fewer DC than A .
solomonis. At Kieta A. kunuaensis has
higher TSR and AMPSR counts but lower
DC counts than A. solomonis. In fact, A.
solomonis is more homogeneous with
respect to TSR count throughout its range
than A. kunuaensis, and in all localities
except Kieta, it has fewer TSR than A.
kunuaensis. However, the DC number is
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 147
higher in A.solomonis than in A .
kunuaensis at all sympatric localities. All
three Bougainville species of Acutotyphlops
are sympatric at Buin; unfortunately, the A.
infralabialis sample is composed entirely of
males. Nevertheless, the three species (A.
infralabialis, A. solomonis, and A .
kunuaensis, respectively) are easily
distinguishable on head shape, head
scutellation, coloration, and longitudinal
scale rows (MSR = 28, 32, 30; AMPSR =
90, 92-94, 95), while A. solomonis (x =
364.8) exhibits significantly fewer
middorsals than either A. kunuaensis (525)
or A. infralabialis (x = 508). Because the
three species retain their integrity throughout
their ranges and in areas of* sympatry,
without any evidence of hybridization, they
are justifiably recognized as valid species.
Anomalies of scutellation. — In
Acutotyphlops subocularis, Hediger (1934)
and McDowell (1974) reported a specimen
lacking supranasals (NMBA 11704).
Although they are absent bilaterally, all of
the other characters of this female are within
the range of variation of A. subocularis. In
number of anterior scale rows (40),
subcaudals (14), and suboculars (2 + 2),
plus the presence of a single shield between
nasal and ocular, it differs from A .
solomonis so there can be no doubt about its
identity. NMBA 1 1709 has the supraocular
fused to the ocular on the left side and
NMBA 11707 has the postocular fused to
the superior posterior subocular on the right
side. AMS 41254 has five supralabials on
the right side (resulting from division of
SL3); PNGM 24601 exhibits five
supralabials on both sides of the head (from
division of SL4); and PNGM 24603 has the
frontal divided into two shields plus five
supralabials on each side of the head (from
division of SL3).
In Acutotyphlops solomonis, NMV
10108 has five supralabials on both sides,
with the second to fourth occupying
positions of typical second and third; MCZ
65992, 65998, and 72138-39 have five
supralabials on both sides; and MCZ 72138
has both the nasal and prefrontal
semidivided on the left side.
In Acutotyphlops infralabialis, MCZ
72129 has the prefrontal, preocular and
anterior ocular partially fused into a single
shield; NMBA 10155 has the third and
fourth supralabials fused on the right side
and the supraocular fused to the prefrontal
on the left; and AMS 71360 exhibits one
supranasal on the right side.
In Acutotyphlops kunuaensis, five
supralabials are present in two individuals
(USNM 120936 and both sides of MCZ
65990), a T-V SIP in five specimens (both
sides of MCZ 72067, 77295; right side only
in MCZ 76957, 77003, 77298), and a T-VI
SIP on both sides of MCZ 77036; two
prefrontals are present in MCZ 72133,
76719, two frontals are present in MCZ
76994, a suprarostral in three specimens
(MCZ 76694, 76714, 76994), and paired
supraoculars in three specimens (both sides
of MCZ 76994, 77006; right side only in
MCZ 76697). Fusion of the preocular and
anterior ocular occurs in six individuals
(both sides of MCZ 76693, 76708, 76710,
77038; left side only of MCZ 76969; right
side only in MCZ 76683), fusion of the
preocular and anterior subocular occurs on
the left side of MCZ 76683, and fusion of
the preocular and postnasal occurs on the
right side in MCZ 76686. The prefrontal is
semidivided in three specimens (left side
only in MCZ 72133, 76697; right side only
in MCZ 76719) and the preocular and
anterior ocular are each semidivided on both
sides in MCZ 64236. The preocular is
divided on the right side only in MCZ 76961
while the preocular and anterior ocular are
semifused in two specimens (left side only
in MCZ 77267 and 121909). Due to an
apparent injury, MCZ 175085 exhibits a
concavity and lacks a nostril on the right
side in addition to possessing extra scales in
that region. Based upon a sample of 510
(counting condition on each side of the head
separately), the above cephalic scutellation
anomalies occur in frequencies of 0.2-1.6%
and may therefore be considered of rare
occurrence. However, the increased
aberrations may be related to the conditions
that led to the original fragmentation of head
shields within the group.
Vol. 6, p. 148
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Summary
A new genus, Acutotyphlops , is
proposed to contain four species of highly
derived blind snakes from McDowell's
(1974) Ramphotyphlops subocularis species
group (with the exclusion of/?, willeyi and
its transfer to the Ramphotyphlops
flaviventer species group). In addition to
Acutotyphlops subocularis (with its
synonym T. keasti), two species are revived
from synonymy {Acutotyphlops solomonis
and Acutotyphlops infralabialis, the latter
with its synonyms T. bergi and T. adamsi)
and a new endemic species is described
from Bougainville {Acutotyphlops
kunuaensis). Unique characters for the
group include a parietal spike between the
frontal bones, multiple ocular, preocular
and/or subocular shields, a V-shaped lower
jaw, five or more infralabials, and a
frontorostral shield with paired prefrontals.
Acutotyphlops is also known for its wedge-
shaped or pointed head, a high number of
longitudinal scale rows, a multicameral right
lung, a straight unsegmented liver, lack of a
rectal ceacum, Ramphotyphlops-\ike
hemipenis with 3-9 coils in retracted organ,
and prominent sexual dimorphism in tail
proportions and caudal counts. Five species
of typhlopids are now known from
Bougainville Island: Acutotyphlops
infralabialis, A. kunuaensis, A. solomonis,
Ramphotyphlops braminus, and R .
flaviventer {= R. depressus).
Acknowledgements
Appreciation is due to the curators and
staff of the following institutions who
loaned material for this study: Charles W.
Myers (AMNH), Alan E. Greer (AMS),
Carla H. Kishinami (BPBM), Jack W.
Sites, Jr. (BYU), Harold K. Voris, Robert
F. Inger, and Alan Resetar (FMNH), J.
Govaere and Mathias Lang (IRSNB), Jose
P. Rosado and Ernest E. Williams (MCZ),
Harry W. Greene (MVZ), Eugen Kramer
(NMBA), A. J. Coventry (NMV), Ilaiah
Bigilale (PNGM), Arnold G. Kluge and
Greg Schneider (UMMZ), James I. Menzies
(UPNG), W. Ronald Heyer and Addison
H. Wynn (USNM), Rainer Gunther (ZMB),
and Hans-Wilhelm Koepcke (ZMH).
Laszlo Meszoly illustrated the holotypes of
Typhlops subocularis, T. infralabialis, T.
solomonis, T. adamsi (Fig. 2), and
Acutotyphlops kunuaensis (Fig. 4). Thanks
are due to Roxane Coombs for executing the
illustrations in Fig. 1 and proofreading the
manuscript and to Kevin Wong for
transverse scale counts of A. kunuaensis
and statistical analyses of some of the data.
Charles Meszoely and the Biology
Department of Northeastern University
provided funding for the illustrations of the
type specimens.
Material Examined
Acutotyphlops kunuaensis (excluding
type material listed above). —
BOUGAINVILLE IS.: No specific locality:
USNM 120211; Buin (6°50'S, 155°44'E,
ca. 60 m), MCZ 65990; Cape Torokina
(6°15'S, 155°02'E, NSL), USNM 120949;
Empress Augusta Bay (6°25'S, 155°05'E,
NSL), FMNH 44800-01; Kieta (6°13'S,
155°38'E, NSL), AMNH 87360-62; MCZ
64226-36, 72104-05; NMV 10109; Melelup
(5°37'S, 154°55'E, ca. 915 m), MCZ
175089; Mutuhai (5°38'S, 154°57'E, ca.
820 m), MCZ 87605, 174754-55, 174759;
North Nasioi (ca. 6°10'S, 155°30'E), MCZ
6601014; Topanos (5°38'S, 155°00'E, 150
m), MCZ 87606-07, 88049, 175082-88;
Torokina Bay (6°14'S, 155°03'E, NSL),
USNM 120931, 120933-34, 120935-48;
Torokina: Piva (6°14'S, 155°03'E, NSL),
AMS 121582-84, 121698-700, 121769,
121909, 121956-57, 123393-99, 123402-
03. Skull: MCZ 76699.
Acutotyphlops infralabialis. —
BOUGAINVILLE: Malabita (6°46'S,
155°43'E, ca. 150 m), MCZ 65991, Buin,
MCZ 72129, Turiboiru (6°44'S, 155°41'E,
ca. 50 m), MCZ 92504; GUADALCANAL:
BYU 7040; Visale (9°15'S, 159°42'E),
AMS 71360, Mt. Austen (9°29'S,
159°59'E, 245 m), AMS 77116; Makaruka
(9°30'S, 160°04'E, 60 m), MCZ 110249;
Nalimbu River, 1 mi. inland (ca. 9°24'S,
160°09'E, 15 m), MVZ 40753 (holotype of
T. adamsi); MALAITA: AMS 4609
(holotype of T. infralabialis), vie. of
Mbita'ama (8°24'S, 160°36'E), AMS
87396; Buma (8°56'S, 160°47'E), NMBA
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 149
10155; NEW GEORGIA: Segi Point,
Horseshoe Reservation (8°34'S, 157°55'E),
UMMZ 95445 (holotype of T. bergi).
Skull: MCZ 64226.
Acutotyphlops solomonis . —
BOUGAIN-VILLE: IRSNB 2029 (holotype
of T. solomonis); Buin, AMS 11451-52,
MCZ 65999, 72084; Empress Augusta Bay,
FMNH 44802; Kieta, MCZ 64225, 65992-
98, NMV 10108; Kunua, MCZ 72083,
72085-86, 72138-39, 72938, 73766,
76688, 175099; Melelup, MCZ 175090;
Mutuhai, MCZ 174756-58, 174760;
Torokina, USNM 120932, 120934.
PAPUA NEW GUINEA: Alotau (10°18'S,
150°25'E, NSL), MCZ 145955. Skulls:
MCZ 65597, 65993, 72084.
Acutotyphlops subocularis. — PAPUA
NEW GUINEA: Bismarck Archipelago:
ZMB 38612, 50458; NEW IRELAND:
Fissoa (2°55,S, 151°27'E, NSL), NMBA
11709-10; Lemkamin (3°20'S, 151°55'E),
ZMUC 5269; Medina (2° 54'S, 151° 22'E,
<100 m), UPNG 5652; Radina (? =
Medina), AMS 41253-54; Yalom (4°25'S,
151°45'E, 1000 m), ZMUC 5265-68;
DUKE OF YORK IS. (4°10'S, 152°28'E,
<50 m), AMS 2202 (holotype of T.
subocularis); NEW BRITAIN: Iambon, S
slope Whiteman Range (ca. 5°50'S,
150°00'E, 1065 m), AMNH 82317;
Jacquinot Bay (5°34'S, 15r30'E), AMS
12856 (holotype of T.keasti), NMBA
1 1704; Keravat (4° 21'S, 152° 02'E, ca. 25
m), UPNG 1101; Kokopo (4°21'S,
152°16'E, NSL), ZMH 3968; Mosa, West
Nakanai (5° 38'S, 150° 17'E, ca. 50 m),
PNGM 24600-03; Talasea (5°17'S,
150°02'E, NSL), MCZ 175091; Wunung,
Jacquinot Bay (5°37'S, 151°27'E, NSL),
NMBA 11705-08; UMBOI IS.: Awelkon
(5°38'S, 147°50'E, 600 m), BPBM 5457;
"New Guinea," ZMB 24341. Skull: NMBA
11704. Unexamined literature record:
Toma, NEW IRELAND (4°23'S, 152°10'E,
400 m).
Literature Cited
BOULENGER, G. A. 1900. On a new blind snake
from Lifu, Loyalty Islands. Pp. 603-604. In A.
Willey, Zoological results, based on material from
New Britain, New Guinea, Loyalty Islands and
elsewhere collected during the years 1895, 1896 and
1897. Vol.5. Cambridge University, Cambridge.
BRONGERSMA, L. D. 1934. Contributions to
Indo-Australian herpetology. Zoologische
Mededeelingen 17(34):161-251.
COGGER, H. G. 1979. Type specimens of reptiles
and amphibians in the Australian Museum. Records
of the Australian Museum 32(4): 163-210.
DUNN, E. R., and J. A. TIHEN. 1944. The skeletal
anatomy of Liotyphlops albirostris. Journal of
Morphology 74(2):287-295.
GANS, C. 1976. Aspects of the biology of
uropeltid snakes. Pp. 191-204. In A. d'A.
BELLAIRS and C. B. COX (eds.), Morphology and
biology of reptiles. Linnean Society Symposium
Series No. 3, London.
GANS, C, H. C. DESSAUER, and D. BAIC. 1978.
Axial differences in the musculature of uropeltid
snakes: the freight-train approach to burrowing.
Science 199:189-192.
HAHN, D. E. 1980. Liste der rezenten Amphibien
und Reptilien: Anomalepididae, Leptotyphlopidae,
Typhlopidae. Das Tierreich 101:1-93.
KINGHORN, J. R. 1948. A new species of
Typhlops from New Britain. Records of the
Australian Museum 22(l):67-69.
LEVITON, A. E., R. H. GIBBS, JR., E. HEAL, and
C. E. DAWSON. 1985. Standards in herpetology
and ichthyology: part I. Standard symbolic codes for
institutional resource collections in herpetology and
ichthyology. Copeia 1985(3):802-832.
MCCOY, M. 1970. Reptiles of the Solomon
Islands. Wau Ecology Institute Handbook (7): 1-80.
MCDOWELL, S. B., JR. 1974. A catalogue of the
snakes of New Guinea and the Solomons, with
special reference to those in the Bernice P. Bishop
Museum. Part I. Scolecophidia. Journal of
Herpetology 8(1): 1-57.
PARKER, F. 1970. Collecting reptiles and
amphibians in New Guinea. Australian Natural
History 16(9): 309-3 14.
PARKER, H. W. 1939. Reptiles and amphibians
from Bougainville, Solomon Islands. Bulletin de
Musee royal d'Histoire naturelle de Belgique
15(60): 1-5.
Vol. 6, p. 150
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
PERRY, G. 1985. Sexual dimorphism in Typhlops
vermicularis (Reptilia: Ophidia). Israel Journal of
Zoology 33:11-13.
PETERS, J. A. 1948. A new snake of the genus
Typhlops from the Solomon Islands. Occasional
Papers of the Museum of Zoology, Uiversity of
Michigan (508): 1-5.
PETERS, W. 1864. Uber neue Amphibien
(Typhloscincus, Typhlops, Asthenodipsas,
Ogmodon). Monatsberichte der Koniglich
preussischen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin
1864:271-276.
ROBB, J. B. 1966. The generic status of the
Australasian typhlopids (Reptilia Squamata). Annals
and Magazine of Natural History, series 13, 9:675-
679.
TANNER, V. M. 1951. Pacific Islands herpetology,
no. V. Guadalcanal, Solomon Islands: a check list
of species. The Great Basin Naturalist 1 l(3-4):53-
86.
WAITE, E. R. 1897. A new blind snake from the
Duke of York Island. Records of the Australian
Museum 3(3):69-70.
WAITE, E. R. 1918. Description of a new blind
snake from the Solomon Islands. Records of the
South Australian Museum l(l):35-38.
WALLACH, V. 1993a. The supralabial imbrication
pattern of the Typhlopoidea (Reptilia: Serpentes).
Journal of Herpetology 27(2):214-218.
WALLACH, V. 1993b. A new species of blind
snake, Typhlops marxi, from the Philippines
(Serpentes: Typhlopidae). Raffles Bulletin of
Zoology 4 1(2):263-278.
G
une 1995
Asiatic Hcrpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 151-156
Studies on the Physiological Ecology of Incubation in Chinemys reevesii
Eggs
pei-Chao Wang, Wei Ma, bo lu and wen-Hui you
Department of Biology, East China Normal University, Shanghai 200062, China
Abstract: -The length of incubation period in Chinemys reevesii eggs is 66.91±3.70, 62.29±9.00 and
56.57±2.85 days at 28°C, 30°C and 33°C, respectively. The values of effective accumulative temperature
approximate to a range of constant (1871 to 1903 C-day) during different incubation temperatures. The mass
of eggs buried in wet sand through incubation increased slightly about an average 0.48% to 3.66%. The mass
of turtle hatchlings just after hatching at 28°C, 30°C, and 33°C averaged 59.76±6.85%, 59.12±5.33% and
56.3115.36% of pre-incubation egg mass, respectively. The total lost rate of energy substances increased
with the temperature of incubating and lost 25.9219.67% at 28°C, 32.5616.77% at 30°C, and 34.3515.67%
at 33°C. The metabolic rate of C. reevesii eggs was measured through incubation at 28, 30 and 33°C. The
pattern of metabolic rate of embryonic development in C. reevesii is peaked, similar to the conditions of some
other fresh water turUes. Maximum VO2 occurred when its incubation is 65% to 80% of total incubation
times. Total V02 of C. reevesii eggs was 94.61 mL/g at 28°C, 112.88 mL/g at 30°C and 152.22 mL/g at
33°C.
Key Words: Reptilia, Testudines, Chinemys reevesii, incubation period, hatchlings, effective accumulative
temperature, oxygen consumption.
Introduction
The metabolic rate of developing
embryos in reptiles reflects the energetic
demands of both growth and maintenance
(Wang et al., 1988). The ontogeny of
embryonic metabolic rate in reptiles has been
shown to have three patterns (Thompson,
1989). The metabolic rate during most of
the incubation period has been reported in
seven species of snakes (Clark, 1953;
Dim'el, 1970; Black et al., 1984), ten
chelonians (Lynn and von Brand, 1945;
Ackerman, 1981a; Thompson, 1989;
Gettinger et al., 1984), three crocodilians
(Thompson, 1989; Whitehead 1987), and
one lizard (Wang et al., 1988). So far, that
of the common turtle (Chinemys reevesii)
has not been reported.
Ecological and heat energy metabolic
studies on adult turtles (Chinemys reevesii)
have been reported before (Wang and Lu,
1985; Wang et al, 1988). In this paper, we
will attempt to deal with the length of the
incubation period and the metabolic rate of
embryonic development inside the eggs of
Chinemys reevesii in relation to ambient
temperature from July to September, 1988
and 1989.
Methods and Materials
Fresh eggs of the turtle (Chinemys
reevesii) were collected in the morning, after
being laid in the sandbox of the turtle farm
near our University. When each fresh egg
was removed from the sandbox on the day
of laying, it was marked and weighed with a
torsion balance (±0.01 g) to determine the
fresh egg mass. A total of 350 eggs were
examined and divided into three groups in
which the eggs of each group were buried in
a dish of moist sand and incubated at
temperatures of 28, 30 and 33°C ,
respectively. The relative humidity of sand
in the dish was maintained at a range of 98
to 100%.
The determination of oxygen
consumption of eggs in C. reevesii during
the period of incubation was carried out with
a small, simple and closed system
respirometer that was described by Wang
(1986). During determination, the ambient
temperature also identified with the
incubation temperature of each group. The
experimental period was limited at 8:30 to
10:30 in the morning and each experiment
lasted an hour with recording every five
minutes. The carbon dioxide (CO2) was
absorbed by 10% NaOH solution. The
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 152
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1995
TABLE 1. T-test on differences of mean times from incubation to hatching in C. reevesii eggs at 28°C,
30°C, and 33°C
Tjncub. - C
Different values (days)
28 v. 30
28 v. 33
30 v. 33
4.63
10.34
5.71
TABLE 2. Total temperature-day of requirement for embryonic development inside the egg of C. reevesii.
Tjncub. - C
28°C
30°C
33°C
N
Total temperature-day (C-day)
TABLE 3. T-test on the different values of total temperature-day for embryonic development of C. reevesii at
28, 30, and 33°C.
Tjncub. - C
Different values (days)
t
28 v. 30
28 v. 33
30 v. 33
21.19
11.34
32.53
0.73
0.40
1.27
<0.005
<0.005
<0.005
TABLE 4. The changes of egg masses in C. reevesii throughout incubation period at 28, 30, and 33°C.
April 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 153
TABLE 5. A comparison between the mass of pre-incubation eggs and one of C. reevesii hatchlings during
incubation at 28, 30, and 33°C.
28°C
30°C
33°C
0.29
5.16
5.09
25.64
26.28
29.03
25.92
SD=9.67
N=10
32.56
SD=9.68
N=10
34.35
SD=9.67
N=10
Note: Standard rate (%) shows both eggshell % of and egg contents % of whole egg mass according to the
average value of twenty fresh eggs.
SRes shows standard rate of egg shell.
SRc shows standard rate of egg content.
Total lost rate equals the mass of pre-incubation egg subtracting both masses of eggshell and of
hatchlings just after hatching.
oxygen consumption was expressed as mL
(Vh-'g-1 ormLCyday-V.
Results
Length of Incubation Period
The mean time of incubation to hatching
for C. reevesii eggs was 66.91 days
(SD=3.70, N=98), 62.29 days (SD=9.00,
N=103) and 56.57 days (SD=2.85. N=54)
during 29°C, 30°C and 33°C of incubation
temperature, respectively. These differences
of the mean values were compared by a t-
test and the results indicate the significant
differences (Table 1).
The length of the incubation period in
turtle eggs decreased as the incubation
temperature increased, that is a negative
correlation of linear regression with the
following equation: For Days = 124.2550 -
2.0550 (°C), r = -0.9985 (P>0.05).
Total Temperature-day of Requirement for
Hatching
The total values of temperature-day for
embryonic development in C. reevesii eggs
during 28°C, 30°C and 33°C, is shown in
Table 2. The different values of total
temperature-day for embryonic development
inside egg from Table 2 were compared by a
t-test and the results of those show no
significant differences in Table 3.
Changes of Egg Mass through Incubation
During the incubation of turtle eggs
buried in wet sand, the average mass of
those eggs increased slightly from 0.48% to
3.66% (Table 4).
Mass of Hatchlings
The mass of turtle hatchlings (C. reevesii)
just after hatching at 28°C, 30°C and 33°C
averaged 4.83 g (SD=0.74, N=10), 4.66 g
(SD=0.78, N=10) and 4.12 g (SD=0.83,
N=10) or 59.76% (SD = 5.36,
Vol. 6, p. 154
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1995
TABLE 6. Equations relating VO2 (ml/g-'day"1) to incubation days, total VO2, and VO2 of peak during
incubation to hatching in C. reevesii eggs.
^ 2
•o
bo
s
1 r
0
-1 1 —
60
20 40 50 80 100
Incubation Period (%)
FIG. 1. Relationship between oxygen
consumption of eggs and percentage of incubation
period in Chinemys reevesii.
N=10), 59.12 % (SD=5.33, N=10) and
56.31% (SD=5.36, N=10) of pre-
incubation egg mass, respectively. These
values are 25.64%, 26.28% and 29.03%
less than the standard rates of substance
contents inside eggs during pre-incubation
eggs of C. reevesii (Table 5).
Oxygen Consumption
The pattern of change in oxygen
consumption (V02) of C. reevesii eggs was
similar at 28°C, 30°C and 33°C. The V02
increased approximately exponentially and
peaked to 65% of incubation period at 33°C,
to 70% of that at 30°C, and to 80% of that at
28°C, and then declined to the time of
hatching (Fig. 1). Total amount of 02
consumed was calculated by integration of
the equations (Table 6) over the interval
from the first V02 measurement to the mean
total incubation period at relevant
temperature. The total V02 was 94.61 mL/g
at 28°C, 112.88 mL/g at 30°C, and 152.22
mL/g at 33°C.
Discussion
Length of Incubation Period and Thermal
Constant
Table 1 shows that the results of t-test
for the average lengths of incubation period
in C. reevesii eggs at 28°C, 30°C and 33°C
exhibit the significant differences
(P<0.001). The average lengths of those
decreased with incubation temperature
increased. This may be a characteristic of
embryonic development in oviparous
ectothermic animals. The thermal demands
of embryonic development inside eggs is
provided by the surroundings, so that, the
developing velocity (days) of embryo in C.
reevesii is affected by its surrounding
temperature.
The relationship between length of
incubation period and effective temperature
of ectothermic embryonic development may
be presented in an equation of effective
accumulative temperature as follows: K = D
(ti-to), where K = effective accumulative
temperature , it is a constant or total
temperature-day (C-day), to = developmental
temperature, D= total time (days) of
embryonic development. On developmental
zero (to) of embryos in C. reevesii, it is
supposed by 0°C, so that , the effective
accumulative temperature amounted to
1 882.6 1± 168.99 C-day during incubation to
hatching in the C. reevesii eggs at 28°C,
1903. 80±1 16.62 C-day at 30°C, and
1871.27+94.88 C-day at 33°C (Table 2).
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 155
The average values of those were taken by t-
test and the results of those exhibited no
significant differences (Table 3), in other
words, the values of effective accumulative
temperature for the embryonic developing
inside the egg of C. reevesii are
approximately a range of constant during
different incubation temperature.
Changes of Incubating Egg Mass
During incubation, C. reevesii eggs
buried in wet sand (RH, 98-100%)
increased slightly in mass (Table 4). This
may be due to the intake of water through
the egg shell from the substrate (wet sand)
and egg shell type.
On changes of egg mass (weight) in C.
reevesii during incubation which are
considered due to a net water intake from
surroundings or of export. For an egg to
absorb water, the potential of water in
substrate must exceed the algebraic sum of
the pressure potential and the osmotic
potential of the egg contents (Packard et al.,
1977). So that the viable egg contacting wet
substrates experienced net increases in mass
during incubation, that reflects on net fluxes
of water across its egg shell (Packard et al.,
1977, 1982, 1985; Gutzke and Packard,
1987). The egg shell type of C. reevesii is a
hard shell, so the water contents of intake
from its wet substrates must be controlled or
limited to its egg shell type.
The Ratio between Mass of P re-incubation
Egg and of Hatchlings
The mass of C. reevesii hatchlings just
after hatching at 28°C, 30°C and 33°C
averaged for 59.76%, 59.12% and 56.37%
of pre-incubation egg mass (Table 5),
respectively. The values of those were less
25.64%, 26.28% and 29.03% less than
standard rate of pre-incubation egg mass
(Table 5). However, the algebraic sum for
mass of egg shell and of hatchling just after
hatching in C. reevesii is also less than one
of pre-incubation egg (Table 5). This
suggests that a part of energy substances in
egg is lost or consumed through incubation.
The total lost rate of energy substances
increased with the temperature of
incubation. The losses were 25.92+9.67%
at 28°C, 32.56±6.77% at 30°c and
34.75±5.67% at 33°C (Table 5).
Pattern and Rate of Metabolism
The ontogeny of embryonic metabolic
rate has been reported with three patterns:
peaked, sigmoid and exponential. The eggs
of C. reevesii during incubation at three
different temperatures had an extreme
peaked pattern of oxygen consumption,
similar to the conditions of some fresh water
turtles (Gettinger et al., 1984; Lynn and von
Brand, 1945; Thompson, 1989; Webb et
al., 1986), Crocodylus (Whitehead, 1987),
Alligator (Thompson, 1989), and some
birds (Vleck et al, 1980) but different from
many other reptiles (Ackerman, 1981; Black
et al., 1984; Clark, 1953; Dmei'el, 1970;
Wang et al., 1988).
The patterns of embryonic metabolic
ontogeny appear to be associated with
different patterns of growth, egg shell types
and environmental conditions of incubation
(Thompson, 1989; Whitehead and
Seymour, 1990). However, peaked or
sigmoid pattern of embryonic metabolic
ontogeny may be due to the fact that the
energy expenditure for embryonic growth is
decreased as the growth rate of embryo in
late incubation period declines. This can
possibly facilitate synchronous hatching in
clutches.
Acknowledgments
This work was supported by the
Scientific Fund of the State Educational
Committee of China and East China Normal
University. We would like to thank Dr.
Allan Muth and Dr. Gary C. Packard for
providing some literature, and also thank
Dr. M. B. Thompson for comments on the
manuscript and Professor Ermi Zhao for
helpful discussion and encouragement.
Vol. 6, p. 156
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Literature Cited
ACKERMAN, R. A. 1981. Oxygen consumption
by sea turtle eggs (Chelonia, Caretta) during
devlopment. Physiological Zoology 54:316-24.
BLACK, C. P., G. F. BIRCHARD, G. W. SCHUETT,
AND V .D. BLACK. 1984. Influence of incubation
water content on on oxygen uptake in embryos of
the Burmese Python (Python molurus). Pp. 137-
45. In R. S. Seryour (ed.), Respiration and
metabolism of embryonic vertebrates. Dr. W. Junk
Publishers, Dordrecht
CLARK, H. 1953. Metabolism of the black snake
embryo. II. Respiratory exchange. Journal of
Experimental Biology 30: 502-505.
DMI'EL, R. 1970. Growht and metabolism in
snake embryos. Journal of Embryology and
Experimental Morphhology 23:761-772.
GETTINGER, R. D., G. L. PAUSKTIS, AND W. H.
N. GUTZKE. 1984. Influence of hydric
environment on oxygen consumption by embryonic
turtles, Chelydra serpentina and Trionyx spiniferus.
Physiological Zoology 57:468-473.
GUTZKE, W.H.N. AND G.C. PACKARD. 1987.
Influence of the hydric and environments on eggs
and hatchlings of bull snakes, Pituophis
melanoleucus. Physiological Zoology 60(1):9-17.
LYNN, M. G. AND T. VON BRAND. 1945. Studies
on the oxygen consumption and water metabolism
of turtle embryos. Biological Bulletin of the
Maryland Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole
88:112-125.
PACKARD, G. C, C. R. TRACY AND J. J. ROTH.
1977. The physiological ecology of reptilian eggs
and embryos, and the evolution of viviparity within
the class Reptilia. Biol. Review 52:71-105.
PACKARD, G. C.,. M. J. PACKARD, T. J.
BOARDMAN, K. A. MORRIS, AND R. D. SHUMAN.
1982. Influence of water exchanges by flexible-
shelled eggs of painted turtles Chrysemys picta on
metabolism and growth of embryos. Physiological
Zoology 56(2):2 17-230.
PACKARD, G. C.,. M. J. PACKARD, AND W. H. N.
GUTZKE. 1985. Influence of hydration of the
environment on eggs and embryos of the Terrapene
ornata. Physiological Zoology 58(5):564-575.
THOMPSON, M. B. 1989. Patterns of metabolism
in embryonic reptiles. Respiration Physiology
76:243-256.
VLECK, C. M., D. VLECK, AND D. F.. HOYT.
1980. Patterns of metabolism and growth in avian
embryos. American Zoologist 20:405-416.
WANG, P. C. AND H. LU . 1985.
Thermometabolism and thermoregulation of
Chinemys reevesii (Gray). Acta Herpetologica
Sinica4(l):61-62. (in Chinese).
WANG, P., H. F. XU, W. MA, AND X. JI. 1988.
The influence of ambient temperature on the body
temperature and energy metabolism in Chinemys
reevesii. Acta Herpetologica Sinica 7(2): 122- 127.
(In Chinese with English Abstract).
WANG, P. 1986. A simple, small and closed-
system respirometer. Sichuan Journal of Zoology
5(l):28-20. (In Chinese).
WHITEHEAD, P.J. 1987. Respiration of
Crocodylus johnstoni embryos. Pp. 473-497. In
G. J. W. Webb, S. C. Manolis, and P. J. Whitehead
(eds.), Wildlife Management: Crocodiles and
alligators. Surrey Beatty & Sons Pty Limited,
Australia.
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 157-160
Research on the Sex Sensitive Period During the Incubation of Chinese
Alligator Eggs
ZHENG-DONG ZHANG
Anhui Research Center of Chinese Alligator Reproduction, Xuanzhou, Anhui, China
Abstract. -The sex of Chinese Alligators (Alligator sinensis) is determined by the temperature that
incubating eggs are exposed to. There is a sex sensitive period between the 14th and 27th day of incubation.
Eggs treated at temperatures above 34° C produce males.
Key words: Reptilia, Crocodylia, Alligatoridae, Alligator sinensis, China, incubation, sex sensitive period.
Introduction
It is generally understood that the sex
distinction of the majority of reptiles
(including crocodiles and alligators) is
determined by the environmental
temperature during incubation. We have
conducted several experiments on the
incubation of Chinese Alligator (Alligator
sinensis) eggs at different temperatures.
At present, there has not been a study
which reports the existence of the "sex
sensitive period" in the incubation of
alligator eggs. Ferguson (1982) reported on
the sex exchange during the entire period of
incubation for Alligator mississipiensis eggs
at different temperatures. In regard to the
"sex sensitive period" of Alligator
mississipiensis (Fergusion called it
"temperature sensitive period"), it is
believed that the sex determination occurs in
the period between the second and third
week of incubation. In 1988, we visited the
United States and learned that an approach
had been in progress to jointly study the
"sex sensitive period" of Alligator
mississipiensis by American and British
scientists in London using more accurate
means. Obviously such an approach in
China still remains blank at the time of
writing.
For the purpose of initiating an approach
to determine whether there really exists a
"sex sensitive period" during Chinese
Alligator egg incubation, the Anhui
Research Center of Chinese Alligator
Reproduction has been conducting
experimental studies since 1988 in search of
factual understanding. The results of the
two-year study (1988-1989) are reported
here.
Materials and Methods
The eggs for the experiment were
selected from captive reproduction at the
Anhui Research Center. It is imperative to
know the exact time when the eggs are laid.
The time difference for the laying of the
experimental eggs should not be more than 6
hours, nor remain in the natural environment
over 12 hours. It is essential that the entire
brood be collected immediately and then the
eggs divided into separate groups to be
hatched under artificial temperature control.
Each experimental group is made up
with a corresponding number of eggs from
each pre-determined brood to erase the
influence which may originate from the
different broods.
In 1988, three experimental groups were
organized: 88-1, 88-2 and 88-3 together
with a control group. The time to undergo
the high temperature treatment was pre-
arranged with Group 88-1 from the 2nd to
the 15th day after the eggs were laid, Group
88-2 from the 16th to the 29th day, and
Group 88-3 from the 30th to the 43rd day.
All the high temperature treatments were
conducted in a constant temperature box.
For the rest of the time, each group was
taken to the incubation room under the
normal temperature. The average
temperature received by the groups at the
various stages are listed in Table 1 (The
temperature appearing on the list and all lists
hereafter is in Centigrade).
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 158
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1995
TABLE 1.
1988.
The incubation temperature of experimental groups and control group at various time periods in
* At 2nd day of the high treatment, the constant temperature box was bad and the embryos were all dead.
TABLE 2. The incubation temperature of experimental groups in 1989.
Attention must be paid to comparing the
growth of young alligators in the first 8
months after hatching.
Based on the experiments achieved from
Group 88-2, 9 groups were established in
1989. The time for the high temperature
treatment of various groups was shortened
to 96 hours. The time threshold for the
treatment of each group was to be alternated
from one to two days. Because of some
unanticipated causes, the experiment on
Group 88-3 was not satisfactorily
accomplished. Another group, No. 10, was
then set up, to pass through the prolonged
alternate high temperature treatment for 7
days. The average value of the treatment
group to various groups and the temperature
at various stages at other times are listed in
Table 2.
Care is also required to note the
comparison among the hatching results of
various groups in 1989, and also the cause
of mortality of young alligators in the first
ten months of growth.
Tissue-section tests were used for sex
identification in order to determine the
correct sex without error.
April 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 159
TABLE 3. The incubation results, growth comparisons and sex ratio of the 1988 groups (weight in grams
and length in centimeters).
Note: *n=17, **n=19
TABLE 4. The incubation results, growth comparisons and sex ratio of the 1989 groups.
Results
The main results from the 1988
experiment are shown in Table 3, and the
main results from the 1989 experiments are
shown in Table 4.
Discussion
According to the incubation results from
Group 88-1, it is understood that in the first
14 days of incubation was the "high
temperature sensitive period" of the
alligator's embryo. The embryo is easily
damaged and even death occurs in the high
temperature for experimental purposes.
It is worthy to note that in another group
which underwent the experimental high
temperature simultaneously, all the tested
embryos were found dead in the first 14
days, because of the application of
Vol. 6, p. 160
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1995
36±0.5°C to the temperature environment
(The data relative to this test is not presented
here). Therefore", the range of temperature
control at this stage for Group 88-1, in fact,
reached the high temperature limit. In
comparison, the average temperature applied
to Group 88-2, which was raised 0.5°C
higher than that of Group 88-1, safety could
be ensured at that time threshold.
From data gathered from various groups
in 1988 on the growth of young alligators, it
indicated that although among the three
groups, the weight of young alligators in
Group 88-2 was the largest, those in Group
88-1 had the smallest weight. However,
after 90 days (Nov. 25), the young
alligators of Group 88- 1 overtook the other
two groups, and the weight of Group 88-2
became smallest among the three groups.
Such condition was maintained until the
conclusion of the experiment. The average
length of the young alligators in the three
groups showed a similar phenomenon (See
Table 3). This suggests that the young
alligators, which were under the treatment of
the special temperature at the "sex sensitive
period", have become comparatively weak.
The sex proportion of Group 88-1, 88-2
and the control group revealed that Group
88-1 was almost the same as the sex
proportions of wild Chinese Alligators
which we have studied (M:F=5:1). The
time threshold of high temperature treatment
for Group 88-2 was just at the "sex sensitive
period". All of them were males. Those in
the control group showed sex differences
somewhere between the other two groups.
The cause of the latter condition is still
unknown (Table 3).
In the experimental test in 1989, the sex
proportion from the various groups was
much beyond expectation. It provided the
understanding that the time threshold for the
"sex sensitive period" in the incubation of
the Chinese Alligator is quite wide in range.
Direct study on experiments and Group 88-2
pointed out that the time threshold must be
from the 14th to the 27th day during the time
of incubation.
Based on the incubation results of young
alligators in various groups as well as the
cause of mortality in the first 10 months, it
was determined that the physical condition
of young alligators in Groups 89-1 to 89-9
was considerably weak, corresponding with
the result obtained in 1988. Comparatively
speaking, those in Group 89-10 proved to
be better. The materials relative to their sex
distinction revealed that the time threshold
for high temperature in this group has
somewhat deviated from the "sex sensitive
period". Therefore, during the time of the
"sex sensitive period", the unisexual
offspring that we obtained from treatment of
artificial temperature control were
considerably weak. At the initial stage of
growth, they require particular care.
Direct study has discovered that there
may exist some other factors which
influence the "sex sensitive period" of the
Chinese Alligator. At present, we are deep
in our research on this field.
Literature Cited
CHENG, B. H., Z. H. HUA, B. H. LI. 1985.
[Chinese Alligator]. Anhui Science and Technology
Publishing House, Hefei, 1st edition. (In Chinese).
FERGUSON, M. W. J. AND T. JOANEN. 1982.
Temperature of egg incubation determines sex in
Alligator mississipiensis. Nature 296:850-853.
WANG, P. C. 1989. [Progress of studies on
environmental sex determination in reptiles]. Acta
Ecologica Sinica 9(l):84-90. (In Chinese).
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 161-166
Karyotypes of Four Microhylid Frogs from
Xishuangbanna, Southern Yunnan, China
XIAO-MAO ZHENG AND GUAN-FU WU
Chengdu Institute of Biology, Accidentia Sinica, Chengdu, Sichuan, 610041 China
Abstract: -The karyotypes of Microhyla butleri, ornata and pulchra and Kaloula pulchra pulchra from
Xishuangbanna, southern Yunnan are reported. The karyotype of Microhyla butleri is reported for the first
time. Its diploid number of chromosomes (2n=22) differs from the other species investigated in the same
genus which is 24. The results of M. ornata and M . pulchra are also different from those obtained by the
previous authors. The karyotype of Kaloula p. pulchra (2n=28) had a slight difference from the result obtained
by the previous authors. The further C-banding analysis of this species revealed that an amount of
heterochromatin is located in the centric, terminal and interstitial position of chromosomes.
Key Words: Anura, Microhylidae , Microhyla, Kaloula, cytotaxonomy, China
Introduction
The karyotypes of Microhyla ornata
from Sichuan and Fujian were reported by
Chen (1983) and Gao et al. (1985)
respectively. The karyotypes of Microhyla
pulchra, Kaloula pulchra pulchra from
Guangzhou were reported by He (1986). In
the present study, the karyotypes of those
species from Xishuangbanna, southern
Yunnan, are reported, and they are analyzed
by means of C-banding and silver-staining
NORs techniques. In addition, the
karyotype of Microhyla butleri from the
same locality is reported for the first time.
Materials and Methods
Microhyla ornata (4 males, 4 females),
M. pulchra (5 males, 5 females), M. butleri
(5 males, 1 female) and Kaloula p. pulchra
(2 males, 1 female) were captured in
Xishuangbanna, southern Yunnan, China in
May 1991. Chromosome preparations were
made from the bone marrow cells by the
method of Wu et al. (1981). C-banding and
silver-staining NORs were carried out
following the methods of Sumner (1972)
and Tan et al. (1986).
Results
The karyotypes for the four species are
separately shown in Figs. 1-3 and the
chromosome measurements in Table 1. The
secondary constrictions and results of Ag-
NORs are listed in Table 2.
The diploid chromosome number of M.
ornata and M. pulchra is 24, with 18 m, 4
sm and 2 m or 2 sm chromosomes, whereas
that of M. butleri is 22 with 18 m and 4 sm
chromosomes. Kaloula p. pulchra had 28
including 20 m, 6 sm and 1 sm or 1 st. In
four species, the chromosome length
decreased gradually, not forming distinct
groups in size. The conspicuous secondary
constrictions (SC) were found on the long
arm of No. 5 of K. p. pulchra, No. 8 of M.
butleri and Nos. 8, 10 of M. pulchra,
whereas the unremarkable one can be sought
on the long arm of No. 11 of M. ornata in a
few mitotic metaphases. No consistent
heteromorphic pairs were observed in all
four species.
The C-banding were successfully
obtained in K. p. pulchra. The centric
positive bands were discovered on all
chromosomes, especially present on smaller
ones; terminal bands were shown on Nos.
2-4; interstitial bands, as well, can be
observed on both the short and long arm of
No. 1 and the short arm of No. 4. The
result still revealed the highly
heterochromatic region possesses two-thirds
of the length of No. 5 (Fig. 3). The
prominent heterochromatinization are
observed in individuals of both sexes, and
there are no difference between both sexes,
indicating the existence of sex-
differentiation.
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 162
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1995
A
c \y.
r .' '&*
*c;w » » » ••
a i< »
B
V -t
*
1/
/i
/U>. 0'> /\A A'*
J[X AX ** ix
** Xtf A* **
FIG. 1. Karyotypes of Microhyla butler i (A) and A/, omala (B).
The silver-staining NORs revealed that
NOR is located on No. 10, associated with
the secondary constriction in M. pulchra
(Fig. 2). M. butleri and AT. p. pulchra are
also treated with the silver-staining NORs
technique. Although no perfect spread of
silver-staining NORs are in the two species,
NOR associated with SC can be sought in
some cells.
Discussion
Karyotypes
The karyotypes of M. ornata and M.
pulchra from Xishuangbanna were different
from those of the other localities (Table 2).
Firstly, all 12 chromosome pairs, except
No. 3 in two species, are metacentric, but
Nos. 7-9 from Xishuangbanna changed to,
or close to, submetacentric. Next, the
April 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 163
y' A^
Ia „(( oft /\0
: \ 8s« ]A l\K
» • # #
FIG. 2. Karyotype and Ag-NORs of Microhyla pulchra.
numbers and positions of SC on the
chromosomes are distinctly varied between
the same species from Xishuangbanna and
the other localities (Table 2). These results
seem to show that the karyotypic type of the
species are gradually altered due to slowly
fitting for the various environments.
There are about 20 species described in
the genus Microhyla that range over Asia
only. Up to now, seven species have been
analyzed karyologically. The karyotypic
character proved their obvious interspecific
differentiation. In M. nornata and mixtura,
st chromosomes can be observed. The
positions of SC on the chromosomes are
quite different between these species: ornata
on Nos. 3, 9 and 11; heymonsi on No. 2
(Gao et al., 1985; Guo et al., 1987); pulchra
on several pairs; inornata (Zhao, 1988) and
mixtura (Guo et al., 1991) on No. 9 and
butleri on No. 8. Moreover, this evident
differentiation is reflected on the various
diploid number in the genus. Most of them
have 2n=24 except for inornata and rubra
with 2n=26 and butleri with 2n=22 (the
present study). Diploid number of 22, 24,
26 and 28 are known for Microhylidae.
Usually, most species in the same genus
have the same diploid number in anurans.
On the other hand, if we supposed the 24
was the diploid number of the genus
Microhyla, it would be possible to consider
whether butleri, inornata and rubra might be
separated from the genus.
Vol.
6, p.
164
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1995
/
ft f& « «
■> u
»t
:2
^
Art *K M A<> A
X ;{ X » * * * *
/
.' -
*
\
FIG. 3. Karyotype and C-bands of Kaloula p. pulchra.
The karyotypes of K. p. pulchra from
Xishuangbanna and Guangzhou are
compared (Table 2) and the difference
between them are not obvious. Unlike in
Microhyla, five species in Kaloula whose
karyotype are known have 2n=28, and the
conspicuous SC located on No. 5 except K.
picta (Kuramoto, 1980). The interspecific
differentiation is less clear. The differences
between these species are shown on the
variety of centromere type of a few
corresponding chromosome pairs.
C-bands and NORs
Although many microhylids are analyzed
karyologically, their C-banding is rarely
reported. The C-bands of K. rugifera are
even mentioned (Zeng et al., 1989) in which
the interstitial and terminal bands except
centric are observed. In K. p. pulchra, not
only interstitial and terminal but also centric
bands are easily seen (Fig. 3). In the two
species, the interstitial bands associated with
the main SC on No. 5 are enhanced, which
indicates the genetic stability in this genus.
The C-bands of the two species present the
April 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.6, p. 165
TABLE 1
China.
Chromosome measurements of four microhylid species from Xishuangbanna, southern Yunnan,
TABLE 2. Karyotypes of four microhylid species from different localities
Vol.
6, p.
166
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1995
heterochromatin of microhylids are widely
spread on the centric, interstitial and terminal
positions of chromosomes. The results are
very similar to those in the higher anurans.
It suggests that the evolutionary level of
microhylids correspond to that of the higher
anurans from cytogenetics. The obvious
heterochromatinization of No. 5 in K.
pulchra does not show sex differentiation,
and it acts as part of a special sign to
distinguish it from other species.
The stable and conspicuous SC is
always the location of NORs. In fact,
silver-staining NORs shows that NORs of
K. pulchra, K. rugifera, M. pulchra, M .
butleri,M. ornata, M. mixtura, and M .
heymonsi are just located in the position of
their main SC. Tymowska (1977)
concluded these species in the genus show a
close relationship due to having the same
NORs. From this point, the close
relationship exist between species in the
genus Kaloula for they have the same SC on
No. 5. On the contrary, those species in the
genus Microhyla reveal their higher
interspecific differentiation level because of
their different NOR association with the
main SC.
Literature Cited
GAO, J. M., X. ZHAO AND H. B. DING. 1985. A
comparative study on the karyotypes of two species
of Microhyla. Acta Herpetologica Sinica, Chengdu,
new ser. 4(3): 163-165, 2 plates. [In Chinese with
English abstract].
GUO, C.W. AND Y. W. DONG. 1987. Studies on
the karyotype and Ag-NORs of Microhyla heymonsi
Vogt. Hereditas, Beijing 9(6): 12-14. [In Chinese
with English abstract].
GUO, C. W., Y. W. DONG AND S. H. ZHAN.
1991. Studies on the karyotype and Ag-NORs of
Rana tientaiensis and Microhyla mixtura. Hereditas,
Beijing 13(2):6-8, 2 plates. [In Chinese with
English abstract].
HE, H. Y. 1986. Comparative studies on the
karyotypes of nine anuran species of Guangdong
Province. Acta Herpetologica Sinica, Chengdu, new
ser. 5(3):171-175, 2 plates. [In Chinese with
English abstract].
KURAMOTO, M. 1980. Karyotypes of several
frogs from Korea, Taiwan and the Philippines.
Experientia, Basel, CHE 36:826-827, 2 plates.
SUMNER, A. T. 1972. A simple technique for
demonstrating centromeric heterochromatin.
Experimental Cell Research 75:304-306, 3 plates.
TAN, A. M., Z. A. WU, E. M. ZHAO AND H. X.
OUYANG. 1986. A handy one-step method for
silver-staining NORs. Acta Herpetologica Sinica,
Chengdu, new ser. 5(l):72-74, 1 plate. [In
Chinese].
TYMOWSKA, J. 1977. A comparative study of the
karyotypes of eight Xenopus species and subspecies
possessing a 36-chromosome complement.
Cytogenetics and Cell Genetics, Basel, CHE
18:165-181.
WU, G. F., W. M. YANG AND E. M. ZHAO. 1981.
Studies on genus Vibrissaphora (Amphibia:
Pelobatidae). 3. A preliminary observation on
karyotype of Vibrissaphora liui (Pope). Acta
Herpetologica Sinica, Chengdu, old ser. 5:139-142.
[In Chinese with English abstract].
WU, Z. A. AND H. Y. YANG. 1981. The
karyotype of Kaloula borealis. Acta Zoologica
Sinica, Beijing 27(1): 106. [In Chinese].
ZENG, X. M. AND G. F. WU. 1990. Studies on
the karyotype of Kaloula rugifera Stejneger. Pp.
169-172. In Er-mi Zhao (ed.): From Water onto
Land, China Forestry Press, Beijing. [In Chinese
with English abstract].
ZHAO, E. M. 1988. Microhyla inornata Boulenger,
1890 found in mainland China, with its karyotypic
report. Acta Herpetologica Sinica, Chengdu, new
ser. 1988(2):119-121. [In Chinese with English
abstract].
Qu
ne 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. ft, pp. 167-171
Cytotaxonomic Studies on Chinese Pelobatids VI. The Karyotypes, C-bands
and Ag-NORs of Megophrys minor and Oreolalax major
XIAO-MAO ZHENG AND GUAN-FU WU
Chengdu Institute of Biology, Accidentia Sinica, Chengdu, Sichuan, China
Abstract: -Chromosome preparations were successfully stained for C-bands and Ag-NORs in two Chinese
pelobatids, Megophrys minor and Oreolalax major. The results were analyzed and compared. The karyotype
formula of O. major was 6+7 like most species of Chinese Oreolalaxinae whereas M . minor was 5+8 just as
in most species of Chinese Megophryinae. The SC on the long arm of chromosome No. 6 associated with
the C-band-positive was speculated the Standard NORs of genus Oreolalax. The NOR just in the conspicuous
SC was not emerged firmly in the genus Megophrys.
Key words: Anura, Pelobatidae, Megophrys, Oreolalax, cytotaxonomy, China
Introduction
Chinese pelobatids axe attributed to two
subfamilies with about 50 species (Tian et
al., 1986). The karotypes of 15 species
among those 50 species, with the majority
distributed in the Heng Duan Mountains
region where the karyotypic characteristics
of some anurans are unusual (Zeng and Wu,
1989), were reported. In this paper, two
other species, Oreolalax major and
Megophrys minor were analyzed by means
of C-banding and silver-staining NORs
techniques.
Materials and Methods
Megophrys minor (3 males and 1
female) were collected on Mt. Emei,
Sichuan Province, China and in Maowen
County, Sichuan Province, China,
respectively. Oreolalax major (3 males)
were captured from Mt. Emei in 1989-90.
Chromosome preparations were performed
by centrifugal air-drying method (Wu et al.,
1981) using 0.4 M KC1 as hypotonic
solution for 40 minutes. C-banding was
made following Sumner (1972), for 5
minutes with Barium Hydroxide treatment at
54° C. Silver-staining NORs was prepared
following Tan et al. (1986), AgN03 acting
time for about 5 minutes at about 55° C.
Results
The measurements of chromosomes for
the two species are shown in Table 1.
All specimens of M. minor from two
places, Mt. Emei and Maowen had 2n=26
and the complement included five pairs of
large (Nos. 1-5) and eight pairs of small
(Nos. 6-13) chromosomes. Nos. 1, 4-5
and 8-12 were metacentric (m), whereas
Nos. 2-3 and 6-7 were submetacentric (sm)
chromosomes. The last pair was telocentric
(t). The highly differentiated heteromorphic
sex chromosomes as seen in Pyxicephalus
adspersus (Schmidt, 1980a) were not found
when males and females were compared.
Three males of O. major also had 2n=26
with the complement of six pairs of large
(Nos. 1-6) and seven pairs of small (Nos.
7-13) chromosomes. The chromosomes
were metacentric except for Nos. 3-5 and 9
with submetacentric and No. 6 with sub- or
metacentric. Whether or not highly
differentiated heteromorphic sex
chromosomes are present is not known, due
to the lack of female animals.
The conspicuous secondary constriction
was found in a pericentric position on the
long arm of chromosome No. 6 of O. major
whereas the small inconspicuous one can be
seen in a proximal position on the short arm
of chromosome No. 6 of M. minor (Figures
1 and 2).
The result of silver-staining NORs
revealed that Ag-NORs were present on
chromosome No. 6 associated with the
secondary constriction in both species (Figs.
1, 2). The strongly C-band-positive was in
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 168
Asiatic Herpetological Research
April 1995
TABLE 1 . The arm ratio and relative length of Megophrys minor and Oreolalax major.
1 1
\ *
•
D
>
N
FIG. 1
centric position on each chromosome pair of
M. minor, and only two weakly positive C-
bands were discovered in O. major. One
was associated with the secondary
constriction of chromosome No. 6, and
another was in the proximal position of the
long arm of chromosome No. 1 which was
not related to the secondary constriction
(Figs. 1, 2).
Unfortunately, we cannot get the C-
bands from females from the two species.
Moreover, it is also impossible to know
whether the early stage of ZW/ZZ sex
chromosomes differentiation like Poecilia
shenops var. melanistica (Haaf and
Schmidt, 1984) and Leiopelma hamiltoni
(Green, 1988) exists or not.
Discussion
Karyotypes
There is no doubt that M. minor has the
second karyotype formula (5+8) of
Morescalchi (1973) as shown in Table 1.
April 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 169
B
4i II si u »
U II *i u ii
■i
•
j{ ii 1< H »
•i*.
II
_ . . -
• • . »
SI U ■'
FIG. 2
TABLE 2. The karyotypes of three Megophrys species and six Oreolalax species.
This result corresponded to that of most
species of Chinese Megophryinae. The
karyotype of M. minor was roughly similar
to those of the other two species of
Megophrys, M. lateralis (Wu, 1987) and M.
omeimontis (Zeng and Wu, 1989). All of
them had several pairs of sm, st and t
chromosomes, and chromosome No. 3 was
sm (Table 2). The difference among species
of the genus were mainly shown on the
position of secondary constriction (SC): on
the short arm and long arm of chromosome
No. 6 for M. minor and M. omeimotis; on
the short arm of chromosome No. 5 for M.
lateralis. Besides, these three species can be
distinguished from each other by the number
of sm, st and t chromosome pairs.
As shown in Table 1, the karyotype of
O. major was classified into the first formula
(6+7) of Morescalchi. The result was the
same as the other 5 species of genus
Oreolalax, O. pingii, O. rugosa, O. popei,
O. omeimontis (Wu, 1988) and O. schmidti
(Zeng and Wu, 1989). The karyotype of O.
major only consists of m and sm
chromosomes like the other 5 species of the
same genus (Table 2). Moreover, 6
Oreolalax species had a conspicuous SC
present on the long arm of chromosome No.
6. The differences among the Oreolalax
Vol. 6, p. 170
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
species were only reflected on the
arrangement of m and sm chromosomes.
Compared with the genus Megophrys,
the Oreolalax species had no st
chromosomes and all chromosomes in the 6
known species were m or sm except
chromosome No. 13 of O. schmidti (Table
2) which was t chromosomes. That their
SC always appeared firmly on the long arm
of chromosome No. 6 was different from
Megophrys, in which 3 species had 3
different positions of SC. Furthermore, the
number of the large sm chromosome pairs
of the Oreolalax species were much more
than that of Megophrys. Oreolalax was a
subgenus of the Scutiger (Duellman, 1985)
and it was considered as a genus (Myers and
Leviton, 1962) which was attributed to
Megophryniae. The differences of the two
subfamilies (most species mentioned above)
were present on two different karyotype
formulas: the former was 6+7, whereas the
latter was 5+8. It was thought that the more
primitive karyotypic characteristics the
karyotype of pelobatids had, the more t, st
and sm pairs of chromosomes in
comparison with that of the higher Anura
(Duellman, 1985; Morescalchi, 1973). This
position is still similar to the point of view
on morphological taxonomy.
C-bands and NORs
C-bands in pelobatids were found more
weakly and in less number than those in
higher Anura (Bufonidae, Ranidae, and
Hylidae). The C-banding of M. minor was
very similar to those of the other two species
of Megophyrs, M. nasuta (Schmidt, 1980b)
and M. omeimontis. The constitutive
heterochromatin emerged on the precentric
area of each pair of chromosomes. The C-
band associated with the SC on
chromosome No. 6 (M. nasuta, M.
omeimontis) and No. 5 (M. minor) was not
enhanced to be particularly distinguished
with centric C-band. The result of the C-
banding treatment to Oreolalax species were
less active than that to Megophrys. The
centric C-bands were always weak (O.
omeimontis, 0. pingii, and 0. rugosa) or
invisible (O. schmidti, O. major, and this
paper). Most of them had no centric C-
bands and only had one interstitial C-band
positive on chromosome No. 6 which was
just associated with the position of the SC.
Apart from one on chromosome No. 6, O.
major had the other interstitial C-band on
chromosome No. 1. This is different from
the other species of this genus. If the
interstitial C-bands revealed the relics of
chromosome rearrangement (Schmidt,
1978a; King, 1980), it should be possible
that the karyotype of O. major shows more
higher evolutionary level in the Oreolalax.
It is said that stable and conspicuous SC
is always the location of NORs. In respect
to the genus Rana, Schmidt (1978b)
concluded that the Standard NORs were
always emerged in this SC on the long arm
of chromosome No. 10 and thought it as a
sign of Rana. The result of silver staining in
O. major and O. schmidti proved that NOR
was just in the SC on the long arm of
chromosome No. 6. In terms of the other
four species of this genus, Oreolalax with
the same SC, it is speculated that the SC
region on chromosome No. 6 should be in
the location of the standard NORs of this
genus. Furthermore, it is possible the close
relationship between species in this genus
was shown due to them having the same
NORs (Tymoska, 1977). The NOR of M.
minor and M. omeimontis emerged on the
place associated with themselves SC.
Compared with Oreolalax, they did not have
the same SC associated with NOR, thus
species showing higher interspecific
differentiation.
Literature Cited
DUELLMAN, W. E. AND LINDA TRUEB. 1985.
Biology of Amphibians. McGraw-Hill, New York.
670 pp.
GREEN, D. M. 1988. Heteromorphic sex
chromosomes in the rare and primitive frog
Leiopelma hamiltoni from New Zealand. Journal of
Heredity 79:165-169.
HAAF, T. AND M. SCHMIDT. 1984. An early
stage of ZW/ZZ sex chromosome differentiation in
Peocilia sphenops var. melanistica (Poeciliidae,
Cyprinosontiformes). Chromosoma 89:37-41.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol.6, p. 171
KING, M. 1980. C-banding studies on Australian
Hylid frogs: Secondary constriction structure and
the concept of Euchromatin Transformation.
Chromosoma 80:191-217.
MYERS, G. S. AND A. E. LEVITON. 1962.
Generic classification of the high-altitude pelobatid
toads of Asia (Scutiger, aelurophryne, and
Oreolalax). Copeia 1962(2):287-291.
MORESCALCHI, A. 1973. Amphibia. Pp. 233-
248 In A. B. Chiarelli and C. Capanna (eds.),
Cytotaxonomy and vertebrate evolution. Academic
Press. London-New York.
SCHMIDT, M. 1978a. Chromosome banding in
Amphibia. I. Constitutive heterochromatin and
nucleolus organizer regions in Bufo and llyla.
Chromosoma 66:361-388.
SCHMIDT, M. 1978b. Chromosome banding in
Amphibia. II. Constitutive heterochromatin and
nucleolus organizer regions in Ranidae,
Microhylidae and Rhacophoridae. Chromosoma
68:131-148.
SCHMIDT, M. 1980a. Chromosome banding in
Amphibia. V. Highly differentiated ZW/ZZ sex
chromosomes and exceptional genome size in
Pyxicephalus adspersus (Anura, Ranidae).
Chromosoma 80:69-96.
SCHMIDT, M. 1980b. Chromosome banding in
Amphibia. IV. Differentiation of GC- and AT- rich
chromosome regions in Anura. Chromosoma
77:83-103.
SUMNER, A. T. 1972. A simple technique for
demonstrating centrometric heterochromatin.
Experimental Cell Ressearch 75:304-306.
TAN, A. M. , Z. G. WU, E. M. ZHAO, AND H. X.
OUYANG. 1986. A handy one-step method for
silver-staining NORs. Acta Herpetologica Sinica
5:72-74. (In Chinese).
TIAN, W. S. AND Y. M. JIANG (EDITORS),
ASSISTED BY G. F. WU, Q. X. HU, E. M. ZHAO,
AND Q. Y. HUANG. 1986. Identification manual
for Chinese species of amphibians and reptiles.
Science Press, Beijing. 164 pp. (In Chinese).
TYMOWSKA, J. 1977. A comparative study of the
karyotypes of eight Xenopus species and subspecies
possessing a 36-chromosome complement.
Cytogenetics and Cell Genetics 18: 165-181.
WU, G. F., W. M. YANG, AND E. M. ZHAO.
1981. Studies on genus Vibrissaphora . 3. A
preliminary observation on karyotype of
Vibrissaphora liui. Acta Herpetologica Sinica. 5:
139-142. (In Chinese).
WU, G. F. 1987. Cytotaxonomical studies on
Chinese Pelobatids III. The analysis of the
Karyotypes of Megophrys lateralis and
Atympanophyrs shapingensis. Acta Herpetologica
Sinica. 6: 45-48. (In Chinese).
WU, G. F. 1988. Cytotaxonomical studies on
Chinese Pelobatids IV. The Karyotypes and C-
bands of four species in the genus Oreolalax. Acta
Herpetologica Sinica. 1: 1-4. (In Chinese).
ZENG, X. M. AND G. F. WU . 1989.
Cytotaxonomical studies on Chinese Pelobatids V.
The Karyotypes, C-bands and AgNORs of
Megophrys omeitmontis Oreolalax schmidt.
Chinese Herpetological Research 2: 37-45.
I June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, pp. 172-180 |
Amphibians and Reptiles of the Royal Chitwan National Park, Nepal
George R. Zug1 and Joseph C. Mitchell2
'Department of Vertebrate Zoology, National Museum of Natural History, Washington, DC, USA, 20560
2Department of Biology, University of Richmond, Richmond, Virginia, USA, 23173
Abstract. -The Royal Chitwan National Park encompasses over 900 km2 of grassland and forest in south-
central Nepal. This mixture of habitats provides the home for 1 1 frog species, two crocodilians, eight turtles,
ten lizards, and 24 snakes. A checklist documents species occurrences and habitat preferences; species
accounts provide natural history observations for selected species of the park's herpetofauna.
Key Words: Nepal, Amphibia, Salientia, Reptilia, Crocodylia, Testudines, Lacertilia, Serpentes, checklist,
natural history
FIG. 1. Map of Royal Chitwan National Park. The Smithsonian camp was on the northeastern edge of the
park and adjacent to Sauraha. After Sunquist (1988: figure 1)
Introduction
The Royal Chitwan National Park
(RCNP) is a mixed grassland and forested
area in south-central Nepal, centered at
approximately 27°30'N 84°20'E (Fig. 1).
The park lies in the Siwalik Range of low
rolling hills in front of the Himalayas and
along the Nepal-India border. The park is
bordered to the north by the Rapti River, to
the west by the Narayani River and
Someswar Hills, to the south by the Reu
River, and to the east by the Hasta River.
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
January 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 173
TABLE 1. A list of the known amphibians and reptiles of the Royal Chitwan National Park and
neighboring areas. Habitat occurrence is noted by abbreviations within brackets and represents our
observations or field notes associated with United Slates National Museum voucher specimens from the
Chitwan area; thus, data are not available for many species and the habitats listed for a species may not
encompass all habitats occupied by that species. The habitats and their abbreviations are defined in the
Materials and Methods section. The type of voucher supporting each taxon's occurrence in the Chitwan area
follows the habitat categories in the brackets: *, specimen in a permanent collection/museum; s, sight and/or
photographic record or specimen examined in a nonpermanent collection; 1, literature record.
Vol. 6, p. 174
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Nearly a third of the park is a floodplain
valley floor (150-250 m elevation; Anon.,
1985) covered by a mix of grasslands,
patches of hardwood forest, marshes, ponds
and small streams. The Churia Hills (250-
600 m), occupying the southeastern and
central third of the park, are covered largely
by sal forest. The climate is monsoonal
with heavy rains typically from June
through September, then becoming
progressively drier and drought-like through
April; May is a transitional month with
increasingly heavier rains. Total annual
precipitation averages about 230 cm. Daily
temperatures generally range from 5-30° C
in the cool, dry winter season (November-
February) through 16-40° in the dry
premonsoonal months (March-May) to 20-
34° during the monsoonal rains of June-
September (Bhatt, 1977; Gurung, 1983;
Sunquist, 1981).
The Royal Chitwan National Park was
established in the mid 1960s to provide a
preserve for large mammals, particularly the
Bengal tiger and the Indian rhinoceros
(Sunquist, 1981; Laurie, 1982; Sunquist
and Sunquist, 1988). Until the mid 1950s,
the Siwalik Range and the encompassing
terai area were a high malaria area and had
low human density. The control of malaria-
carrying mosquitoes in the 1950s allowed
explosive human colonization. Fertile flood
plains became pastures and farmlands, and
the hill forests were cut for firewood and
local building materials. The park is now
totally surrounded by human settlements.
The pastures and farmlands abut the park
and expose it to daily incursions by an
inadequately fed and fueled human
population and their domestic animals.
The following observations on the
species composition and natural history of
the Chitwan herpetofauna derive from a
report submitted to the Nepal Department of
National Parks and Wildlife Conservation in
1986 (report's checklist used but uncited in
Maskey and Schleich, 1992:Table 1,
Schleich and Maskey, 1992:254, and
Schleich, 1993). The report was designed
as a field guide for park visitors and the
training of park personnel; it included an
identification key, which will be published
separately in the Smithsonian Herpetological
Information Service series.
Materials and Methods
Our visits to the park included a
premonsoonal survey in April 1985 and a
postmonsoonal one in November 1985.
Episodic collections by the staff of the
Smithsonian-Nepal Terai Ecology Project
provided additional vouchers and
observations. The headquarters' staff of the
Royal Chitwan National Park and the guides
and naturalist of Gaida Wildlife Camp
maintained synoptic collections of
amphibians and reptiles, especially snakes,
collected in and around the park. The
specimens from the preceding sources
provide a primary data base for constructing
the herpetofaunal list of RCNP. We also
include taxa reported in the literature,
although we did not confirm the specific
identification of these taxa.
To document the habitat occurrence of
the herpetofauna, we use the following
habitat categories: Aquatic — river (R),
within and along the shore of rivers and
major tributary streams; ponds and small
streams (P), streams of <2 m width and
temporary pools of water, modified by f, g,
or h to denote location in forest/woodlands,
grasslands, or human-occupied sites; marsh
(M), marshes adjacent to rivers or formed in
grasslands by small streams. Flood plain —
terai grasslands (G); woodlands (W),
canopied forest patches on slightly elevated
hummocks scattered throughout the
grasslands. Hills - sal forest (F). Human
sites — commensal (C), living on, in, or
immediately adjacent to human and domestic
animal buildings; agricultural areas (A),
pastures, fields, and fence-row habitats.
These habitat occurrences are based
exclusively on our observations or field
notes associated with voucher specimens.
The habitat occurrences are summarized in
Table 1.
The following species accounts
represent those species for which we can
provide new or broader based observations.
Snout-vent length (SVL) in frogs, lizards,
and snakes is distance (mm) from tip of the
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 175
.
■
FIG. 2. The Chitwan frogs Rana danieli (left; USNM 266838) and Rana syhadrensis (right; USNM
266878).
snout to the cloacal opening; carapace length
(CL) in turtles is the straight-line distance of
the shell on the midline. Body weights (g)
were taken with a Pesola scale. Statistics
were performed by a PC version of Statistix
4.0. A priori statistical significance was set
at a = 0.05; means are followed by ± one
standard deviation.
Species Accounts
The herpetofauna of the Chitwan area
consists of 11 amphibians and 44 reptiles
(Table 1). At this time, none of the
amphibians or terrestrial reptiles are
considered threatened, and only the two
crocodilians are officially recognized as
endangered or threatened species.
Estimates of abundance are desirable,
but our field work did not coincide with the
seasons of likely greatest activity for most
species. Premonsoonal conditions are
drought-like, and these conditions suppress
the activity of most species except for a few
lizards. The postmonsoonal visit occurred
as day and night time temperatures were
declining, and over the two week visit,
lizards slowly disappeared. Nonetheless,
our observations show the herpetofauna of
RCNP to be rich and diverse.
Frogs
Bufo. Neither of the two toad species
(B. melanostictus, B. stomaticus) were
common. We captured nine individuals,
only one of which was a B. melanostictus
(32.1 mm SVL, 3 g). This latter individual
was discovered (November) beneath a
decomposing log in the forest. All B.
stomaticus occurred in human-modified
habitats. Recent metamorphs (9.4 ± 0.9
mm SVL, n = 5) were captured (April) on a
mud bank of the Rapti River.
Rana cyanophlyctis. The skittering
frogs were the most abundant of the
Chitwan postmonsoonal amphibians; none
were seen in April. They occurred in a wide
variety of flood plain habitats from riverside
to the small ponds and streams in the terai
grassland and farmlands. In late afternoon
and at night, numerous individuals sat at the
water's edge on the bank and in the water.
Human or animal movement along the shore
would send the frogs skittering outward on
the river in a semicircular path, some frogs
landing behind the disturbance, others ahead
and then repeating the escape or avoidance
reaction.
Of the R. cyanophlyctis captured (n =
27), only a single female (55.2 mm SVL)
was sexually mature. The immature frogs
ranged 25.9 - 50.2 mm SVL; presumably
they all represent young of the year,
although derived from egg clutches laid at
different times during the monsoon rains.
This sample yields a regression, Mass =
-9.0814 + 0.4184 SVL (r = 0.90).
Vol. 6, p. 176
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
Rana danieli{F\g. 2). Three juveniles
(31-38 mm SVL) were found in the sal
forest. The premonsoonal individual
occurred beneath a log (with a R .
syhadrensis) beside a small stream; the two
postmonsoonal frogs were beneath logs on
the forest floor 10 m or more from a small
stream. These individuals represent the first
R. danieli from Nepal and are a significant
westward range extension (700 km) from
the Indian type locality in the Khasi Hills,
Assam (Pillai and Chanda, 1977 ).
Rana limnocharis. Three species (R.
limnocharis, pierrei, syhadrensis) of the
limnocharis complex occur in Chitwan. Our
observations show R. limnocharis and R.
syhadrensis to be forest-floor species and
syntopic in sal forest. Two adult male R.
limnocharis (36.2 & 44.3 mm SVL, 3.0 &
8.5 g) were captured (November) beneath
logs; a few other individuals were seen in
the sparse ground litter of the sal forest.
Rana pierrei. A single immature male
(46.0 mm SVL, 10.8 g) was discovered
(November) sitting in the "lawn" of the SI
camp at night.
Rana syhadrensis(Fig. 2). Of the
Chitwan frogs, R. syhadrensis was
abundant during both the pre- and
postmonsoonal surveys. Most individuals
captured were juveniles (41 of 42) with SVL
<31 mm (18 - 30 mm SVL). Two recent
metamorphs (18 mm SVL) were captured
(April) in the leaf litter along the bank of a
small sal forest stream. Most individuals
were captured (April & November) beneath
forest-floor litter or in tree buttresses.
Rana tigerina. Two individuals, both
immature (44.7 & 63.3 mm SVL), were
found in or near rhino wallows within
riverine forest.
Tomopterna breviceps. We saw no
individuals of this species during our pre-
and postmonsoonal sampling. Their
absence at these time supports Schleich and
Maskey's comment (1992) that Tomopterna
are active on the surface only during the
breeding season at the beginning of the
monsoon.
Turtles
Turtles are uncommonly seen in the
park's waters, grassland, and forest. When
they are found, they become food for local
inhabitants. Our turtle sightings and
vouchers derive mainly from shells on
kitchen middens or shells nailed to walls of
local tea shops.
Indotestudo elongata. Frazier (1992)
showed that this species is the only tortoise
confirmed to occur in Nepal. Earlier reports
of Geochelone elegans and Testudo
horsfieldii are incorrect, usually
misidentifications. We saw in several tea
houses tortoise shells nailed to the wall as
decoration. Our voucher is a shell salvaged
from a dog at the Smithsonian camp. Its
anterior end had been sawed off, attesting to
tortoises as local food items.
Melanochelys trijuga. An adult female
(215 mm CL; 1.2 kg) was found (Oct.) in
the grass bordering a rhino wallow next to a
patch of riverine forest. She was judged to
be 7 yr old and had grown an average of
20.4 mm/yr (PL) since hatching. Dinerstein
et al. (1988) provided additional information
on this female and on the occurrence of this
species in Nepal..
Lizards
Calotes versicolor. The garden lizard was
the most common of Chitwan lizards, and
the most readily observed reptile, owing to
their use of elevated forage and basking sites
on shrubs, trees, fence posts, etc. Adult
males (87.1 ± 6.8 mm SVL, 71.3 - 97.0
mm. n = 16; 22.5 ± 5.9 g, 8.8 - 30.3 g, n =
16) averaged larger than adult females (77.9
± 8.5 mm SVL, 66.7 - 87.0 mm, n = 7;
15.2 ± 6.2 g, 9.1 - 22.4, n = 5). Adults
(21:1, adults:juveniles) predominated in the
premonsoonal sample and juveniles (2:4) in
the postmonsoonal one. The presence of
gravid females in the premonsoon period
and juveniles in the postmonsoonal suggest
that most egg-laying occurs at the beginning
of the monsoon in Chitwan. The
postmonsoonal juveniles averaged 53.7 ±
25 mm SVL (50.0 - 55.7 mm) and
presumably represent the size of the
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 177
FIG. 3. A possible defense mechanism; neural spines projecting through the median row of dorsal scales in
a Bun,;arusfasciatus (USNM 267012) from the Royal Chitwan National Park.
season's cohort at the end
growing season.
ol
first
Body temperatures of adults basking in
the mid morning (0800-0950 hr; April)
averaged 35.3 ± 1.64° C (33.4 - 38.2, n =
11) compared to an average ambient
temperature (in shade) of 33.9 ± 0.86 (30.4
- 32.5, n = 5). The body temperature of a
single juvenile, captured in the shade, was
32.2° C, identical to ambient temperature
Hemidactylus. We observed three of the
four Chitwan geckos (Table 1). The rarity
of//, flaviviridis, H. frenatus, and//.
garnotii and their exclusive commensal
occurrence suggest that these three species
are exotics. In contrast, H. brookii is
abundant both on human-made structures
and in some forested sites. We provided a
brief review (Mitchell and Zug, 1988) of //.
brookii biology around the Smithsonian
camp.
Female //. brookii mature at 43 mm
SVL, males at 42 mm. They are active at
night in the forest and on buildings. During
the day, forest individuals hide beneath the
bark of dead trees, in litter filled tree
buttresses, and beneath logs. Four //.
frenatus (37 - 53 mm SVL) and two //.
garnotii (52 - 55 mm SVL) were captured on
the camp building during the H. brookii
survey; none were seen in the adjacent
forest.
Scincella sikimmensis. Three adult
Scincella (31 - 35 mm SVL) were found
beneath logs or litter in the riverine and sal
forest. The two Mabuya (M. dissimilis, M.
macularia) appear to be more open-habitat
denizens, e.g., at the forest edge or along
trails in the grassland, although a M .
macularis was found beneath a log with a S.
sikimmensis.
Snakes
Snakes suffer the same level of
persecution in the Chitwan area as in most
rural communities, i.e., death when seen.
The local population is primarily Hindu,
although some of the original Chitwan
residents, Tharu, remain. There is no
evidence of either culture practicing
tolerance of snakes, and the Tharu are
Vol. 6, p. 178
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
reported to eat pythons (but no other snake
species) and varanid lizards.
Amphiesma stolata. Two males (387 &
440 mm SVL, 19 & 22 g) were found dead
on unpaved streets in Sauraha in April.
Villagers said that smaller one was found in
a house and killed and the other one in a
drainage ditch. Children had killed both of
them and tossed them on the street.
Lycodon aulicus. A female (181 mm
SVL, 2 g) was discovered in soil beneath a
rotting stump in November. Possibly, she
was preparing to hibernate.
Oligodon arnensis. An adult male (662
mm SVL, 17.1 g) was captured at 2100 hr
(April) crossing a path in the Smithsonian
camp. To avoid capture, it flattened its head
by the lateral extension of the proximal ends
of the jaws and struck repeatedly with the
mouth open. The strike behavior was a
bluff, because it did not bite even though its
mouth contacted a plastic bag several times.
Also it coiled several times in a three minute
interval; the head was flattened and held
close to the body, and it struck laterally
several time from this posture. Its tail was
partially coiled but never in the defensive
posture described for other Oligodon species
(Greene, 1973). Daniel (1983) reported
body inflation and head flattening in this
species. This individual inflated its body
only slightly. Its body temperature was
27.8° C, compared to 29.2° C ambient air
temperature, suggesting that it had emerged
recently from its daytime retreat.
Bungarus fasciatus. An adult female
(1570 mm SVL) was killed in the
Smithsonian camp (April) one evening.
Presumably during the human attack, she
voluntarily extruded 36 neural spines
through the vertebral scales (Fig. 3). Neural
spines are exposed in this individual at
vertebral scale 1 1 (counting posteriorly from
the parietal scale), 136-139, 142-157, 172-
178, 181, 184-189, and 190-191. Several
spines protrude 3 mm above the scale
surface, and in other instances, vertebral
scales are slit longitudinally but the neural
spines do not project presently above or
through the scale.
A. H. Savitzky (personal
communication & in lecture) called our
attention to this novel antipredator
mechanism. He has also discovered that
several other species of kraits show this
specialized behavior and have a specialized
epaxial musculature and suture zones in the
vertebral scales to effect the extrusion of the
sharp neural spines when grasped by a
predator.
Naja naja. A single individual was seen
at midday (1300 hr) basking (approx. 1.2 m
above the ground) on a large clump of
elephant grass beside a game trail in the
grassland.
Comments
The known Chitwan herpetofauna
consists predominantly (>75%) of
widespread Indian-Oriental (as defined by
Leviton and Swan, 1962) taxa. The
exceptions are either Himalayan or
Indochinese-Himalayan taxa. Rana danieli,
R. pierri, R. syhadrensis, and Scincella
sikimmensis represent the Himalayan
element and they are predominantly low-to
moderate elevation species confined to the
southern face of the Himalayas and its
foothills. Indotestudo, Elachistoon, Boiga
ochracea, and Trimeresurus albolabris share
a similar Himalayan distribution as the
preceding group, but have distributions
extending into western Indochina.
One additional frog, Microhyla ornata, is
a likely resident of Chitwan. It is reported
higher in the Rapti drainage system (Nahoe
and Ouboter, 1987), as well as being
widespread in northern India. We excluded
it from the present list, because we found no
literature or specimen voucher placing it
adjacent or within the RCNP.
In summary, the Chitwan herpetofauna
consists of 1 1 frogs and 44 reptiles. With a
few exceptions, the taxa represent a subset
of the herpetofauna of northern India. As
human population growth continues, the
value of RCNP and its resident animals and
plants will increase as an essential biological
reserve.
June 1995
Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 179
Acknowledgments
Our field work was supported by the
Smithsonian Research Opportunity fund.
The staff of the Smithsonian-Nepal Terai
Ecology Project [formerly the Smithsonian
"Tiger Camp"] provided daily assistance.
We especially wish to acknowledge the
support and encouragement of Eric
Dinerstein, director of the Terai Project, and
Chris Wemmer of the Smithsonian's
National Zoological Park Conservation &
Research Center. The Nepal Department of
National Parks and Wildlife Conservation
encouraged and provided permits for our
field surveys and for the export of voucher
specimens. The original report submitted to
the national parks' department was reviewed
and improved by A. Dubois, R. F. Inger, T.
K. Shrestra. The staffs of the RCNP
headquarters and Gaida Wildlife Camp
allowed us to examine their synoptic
collections. We thank all of the preceding
organizations and individuals for their
support and assistance.
Appendix
Notes to Table 1
1. MNHN specimens, Dubois (1974:
appendix).
2. Schleich and Maskey (1992) state that
two species of Tomopterna are known from
Chitwan, but they do not identify either
species.
3. Schleich and Maskey (1992) report
voucher specimens.
4. Iverson (1992).
5. Moll (1984) lists 14 turtle species from
the Gandak River south of the Gandak Dam
to Bettiah. Since the Gandak R. is a
continuation of the Narayni R. in India,
some of these species (Geoclemys
hamiltoni, Hardella thurji, Kachuga smithi,
K. tentoria, Morenia petersi, Lissemys
punctata, Aspideretes hurum) might also
occur in Chitwan.
6. Schleich and Maskey (1992) report a
voucher specimen. Moll and Vijaya (1986)
report a Chitwan occurrence based on a
photograph.
7. Gurung (1989); we have excluded other
species from Gurung's list because they
appear to be misidentifications, e.g.,
Enhydris enhydris, Rhapdophis subminata.
8. Royal Chitwan National Park
headquarter's synoptic collection.
9. Kramer (1977).
10. Gaida Wildlife Camp synoptic
collection.
11. Swan and Leviton (1968).
Literature Cited
ANON. 1985. Royal Chitwan National Park,
Nepal, fprinted handout with map] Dept. Natl.
Parks & Wildl. Conserv., Kathmandu
BHATT, D. D. 1977. Natural History and
Economic Botany of Nepal. Orient Langmann Ltd.,
New Delhi.
DANIEL, J. C. 1983. The Book of Indian Reptiles.
Bombay Natural History Society, Bombay, India.
DINERSTEIN, E., G. R. ZUG, AND J. C.
MITCHELL. 1988. Notes on the biology of
Melanochelys (Reptilia, Testudines, Emydidae) in
the terai of Nepal. Journal of the Bombay Natural
History Society (1987) 84(3):687-688.
DUBOIS, A. 1974. Liste commentee d'amphibicns
recolte au N6pal. Bulletin du Museum national
d'Historie naturelle, 3rd ser., Zool. (213):341-41 1.
DUBOIS, A. 1975. Un noveau complexe d'especes
jumelles distinguee par le chan: les grenouilles du
Nepal voisines de Rana limnocharis Boie
(amphibiens, anoures). Compte Rendu des Seances
de l'Academie Sciences, Paris, ser. D 281: 17 17-
1720.
FRAZIER, J. 1992. The land tortoise in Nepal: a
review. Journal of the Bombay Natural History
Society 89(l):45-54.
Vol. 6, p. 180
Asiatic Herpetological Research
June 1995
GREENE, H. W. 1973. Defensive tail display by
snakes and amphisbaenians. Journal of Herpetology
7:143-161.
GURUNG, K. K. 1983. Heart of the Jungle. The
Wildlife of Chitwan, Nepal. Andre Duetsch Ltd.,
London.
IVERSON, J. B. 1992. A Revised Checklist with
Distributional Maps of the Turtles of the World.
Privately printed, Richmond, Indiana.
KRAMER, E. 1977. Zur Schlangenfauna Nepals.
Revue Suisse Zoologie. 84(3):721-761.
LAURIE, A. 1982. Behavioural ecology of the
greater one-horned rhinoceros {Rhinoceros
unicornis). Journal of Zoology, London 196:307-
341.
MASKEY, T. AND H. H. SCHLEICH. 1992.
Untersuchungen und Schutzmassnahmen zum
Gangesgavial in Sudnepal. Natur und Museum
122(8):258-267.
MITCHELL, J. C. AND G. R. ZUG. 1988.
Ecological observations on the gecko Hemidactylus
brookii in Nepal. Amphibia-Reptilia 9:405-413.
MOLL, E. O. 1984. Freshwater turtles in India:
their status, conservation and management.
Hamadryad 9(3):9-17.
MOLL, E. E. [SIC], AND J. VIJAYA. 1986.
Distributional records for some Indian turtles.
Journal of the Bombay Natural History Society
83:57-62.
NAHOE, L. M. R., AND P. E. OUBOTER. 1987.
The distribution of reptiles and amphibians in the
Annapurna-Dhaulagiri region (Nepal). Zoologische
Verhandelingen (240): 1-105.
PILLAI, R. S. AND S. K. CHANDRA. 1977. Two
new species of frogs (Ranidae) from Khasi Hills,
India. Journal of the Bombay Natural History
Society 74(1):136-140.
SCHLEICH, H. H. 1993. Contribution to the
systematics and to a bibliography of the amphibians
and reptiles from Nepal. Journal of the Nepal
Research Centre 9:141-168.
SCHLEICH, H. H., AND T. M. MASKEY. 1992.
Der Chitwan-Nationalpark im Suden Nepals. Natur
und Museum 122(8):248-257.
SUNQUIST, F., AND M. SUNQUIST. 1988. Tiger
Moon. University of Chicago Press, Chicago.
SUNQUIST, M. E. 1981. The social organization
of tigers (Panthera tigris) in Royal Chitwan
National Park, Nepal. Smithsonian Contributions
to Zoology (336): 1-94.
SWAN, L. W. AND A. E. LEVITON. 1962. The
herpetology of Nepal: A history, check list, and
zoogeographical analysis. Proceedings of the
California Academy of Sciences 32:103-147.
I June 1995 Asiatic Herpetological Research Vol. 6, pp. 181-1X5 |
Guidelines for Manuscript Preparation and Submission
Summary
Manuscripts must:
1) be written in English.
2) be of letter quality (laser printed or typewritten on bond paper).
3) include camera ready figures (if any).
4) include complete and accurate literature citations.
5) include complete and accurate localities with latitude and longitude.
6) include a camera ready map illustrating regions discussed (when applicable).
Manuscripts failing to meet these criteria will be returned for correction.
Purpose and Content
Asiatic Herpetological Research publishes articles concerning but not limited to Asian
herpetology. The editors encourage publications from all countries in an attempt to create an
open forum for the discussion of Asian herpetological research.
Articles should be in standard scientific format and style. The following sections should
be included:
Title. The title should reflect the general content of the article in as few words as possible. A
poor title may cause readers to read no further.
Names and Addresses. The names and addresses of all authors must be complete enough to
allow postal correspondence.
Abstract. The abstract should briefly summarize the nature of the research, its results, and
the main conclusions. Abstracts should be less than 300 words.
Key Words. Key words provide an index for the filing of articles. Key words provide the
following information (when applicable): 1) Taxonomy (e.g. Reptilia, Squamata,
Gekkonidae, Gekko gecko ). 2) Geography (e.g. China, Thailand). 3) Subject (e.g.
taxonomic validity, ecology, biogeography). The order of taxonomy, geography, and
subject should be observed.
Text. Manuscripts must be in English and spelling must be correct and consistent. Use
Webster's New International Dictionary for reference. For clarity, use active voice
whenever possible. For example, the following sentences in active voice are preferable to
those in passive voice.
Active voice:
"Lizards were extremely common on the site." and "I examined three female snakes."
Passive voice:
"Lizards were observed to be extremely common on the site." and "Three female snakes were
examined."
Abbreviation. Do not abbreviate unless the full phrase has already appeared. Scientific
names may be abbreviated only if they have appeared fully in the same paragraph. Never
begin a sentence with an abbreviation of a scientific name.
© 1995 by Asiatic Herpetological Research
Vol. 6, p. 182 Asiatic Herpetological Research June 1995
Standard Format
Manuscripts following standard format should include introduction, methods, results, and
discussion sections. While other formats are acceptable, the editors encourage the use of
standard format. Please do not type in all capital letters (headings, Fig., Table, and
authors names in the Literature Cited section).
Introduction. The introduction typically states the significance of the topic and reviews prior
research.
Methods. This section should clearly state where, when, and how research was carried out.
Include sample sizes. Protocols designed by other investigators must be properly cited.
Research materials and their manufacturers should be listed. The reader must be able to
replicate the methods of the author(s).
Results. This section states the results and their significance to the investigation. Figures
and tables may be used to clarify, but not to replace, results statements in the text. Statistics
should be used when applicable. Large amounts of data should be avoided, or included as an
appendix at the end of the article.
Discussion. The discussion is a synthesis of the introduction and the results. No new
information should be discussed unless it was presented in the results section. New findings
should be discussed in relation to prior research. The author(s) should feel free to present
several possible interpretations of the results. The editors particularly encourage suggestions
of future research in Asian herpetology.
Section Headings
Articles will be published using three section heading styles. Level 1: text is bold and
centered Level 2: text is italic and centered. Level 3: text is italic and at the beginning of the
first paragraph. Authors should take this style into account when writing manuscripts.
Statistics
Statistics must be accompanied by sample sizes, significance levels, and the names of any
tests. Investigators should pay careful attention to independence and applicability of tests,
and randomness of samples. One of the most frequent examples of nonindependence is the
use of multiple, paired t-tests instead of analysis of variance (ANOVA). In general,
multiple tests on the same data set are not valid. Descriptive statistics are in many
cases more appropriate than inferential statistics.
References
Accurate and standard references are a crucial part of any article. This is especially
important when dealing with publications from many different countries. The reader must be
able to precisely identify any literature cited. References in the text must be checked for
consistency with references in the literature cited section. All references cited in the
text must be in the literature cited section. The literature cited section may
not contain any references not mentioned in the text. Articles containing
inaccurate or inconsistent literature citations will be returned for correction.
References in Text
1) References to articles by one or two authors must include both surnames in the order they
appear in the original publication. References to articles by more than two authors must
include the first author's surname, followed by "et al."
2) The year of article follows the authors, separated only by a space.
June 1995 Asiatic Herpetological Research Vol. 6, p. 183
3) References with the same author and year are distinguished by the lower case characters
"a, b, c, ..."
4) References cited in text are listed in alphabetical order by first author.
For example, "My results also incorporate literature records (Marx et al., 1982; Marx and Rabb,
1972; Mertens, 1930; Pope, 1929; Wall, 1909, 1910a, 1910b, 1910c)."
References in Literature Cited
1) References must include all authors, in the order that they appear in the original
publication; "et al." is never used in a literature cited section.
2) The first author is listed surname first, initial(s) last. All other authors are listed initial(s)
first, surname last.
3) References with the same author and year are distinguished by the lower case characters,
a, b, c, ...
4) References cited are listed in alphabetical order by first author.
5) Names of journals are not abbreviated.
See below for examples:
Journal article.
Dial, B. E. 1987. Energetics and performance during nest emergence and the hatchling frenzy in
loggerhead sea turtles {Caretta caretta ). Herpetologica 43(3):307-315.
Journal article from a journal that uses year instead of volume.
Gatten, R. E. Jr. 1974. Effect of nutritional state on the preferred body temperatures of turtles.
Copeia 1974(4):912-917.
Journal article, title translated, article not in English.
Ananjeva, N. B. 1986. [On the validity of Megalochilus mystaceus (Pallas, 1776)]. Proceedings of
the Zoological Institute, Leningrad 157:4-13. (In Russian).
Note that for Acta Herpetologica Sinica, the year must precede the volume number. This is
to distinguish between the old and new series, and between 1982-1987, Vols.1-6 (new
series) and 1988 with no volume number, numbers 1 and 2 (new series).
Cai, M., J. Zhang, and D. Lin. 1985. [Preliminary observation on the embryonic development of
Hynobius chinensis Guenther]. Acta Herpetologica Sinica 1985, 4(2):177-180. (In Chinese).
Book.
Pratt, A. E. 1892. To the snows of Tibet through China. Longmans, Green, and Co., London. 268
pp.
Article in book.
Huey, R. B. 1982. Temperature, physiology, and the ecology of reptiles. Pp. 25-91. In C. Gans
and F. H. Pough (eds.), Biology of the Reptilia, Vol. 12, Physiological Ecology. Academic
Press, New York.
Government publication.
United States Environmental Data Service. 1968. Climatic Atlas of the United States.
Environmental Data Service, Washington, D. C.
Abstract of oral presentation
Arnold, S. J. 1982. Are scale counts used in snake systematics heritable? SSAR/HL Annual
Meeting. Raleigh, North Carolina. [Abstr].
Thesis or dissertation.
Moody, S. 1980. Phylogenetic and historical biogeographical relationships of the genera in the
Agamidae (Reptilia: Lacertilia). Ph.D. Thesis. University of Michigan. 373 pp.
Vol. 6, p. 184 Asiatic Herpetological Research June 1995
Anonymous, undated.
Anonymous. Undated. Turpan brochure. Promotion Department of the National Tourism
Administration of the People's Republic of China, China Travel and Tourism Press, Turpan,
Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region, China.
Figures and Tables
Figures and tables should be referenced in order in the text. Each table should be
typewritten, double spaced on a separate sheet. See below for instructions for figures.
Figures
Each figure illustration (line art or photograph) submitted must be "camera ready" for
publication with no modifications necessary other than reduction. Do not write on figure;
do not mount more than one figure to a sheet. AHR cannot be responsible for redrawing,
touching up, or otherwise modifying figure illustrations for authors. In addition, figure
illustrations submitted must be:
1) of publication quality with typeset text.
2) mounted on a separate 21.5 x 28 cm (8.5 x 1 1 inch) sheet with figure number on back.
3) on a separate sheet from figure legend.
Times Roman typeface is preferred. Do not submit figures with poor type or handwriting on
the face of the figure. In order to avoid wasted effort, please follow the above instructions
carefully. Please note: AHR will not alter or lay out figures for publication. Any
figure requiring modification will be returned, and may cause significant delay in publication.
Figure Legends
Figure legends should be typed on a separate sheet. Legends should explain the figure
without reference to the text. A figure and legend should make sense if separated from the
rest of the article. For example:
FIG. 2. Lateral view of live Psammodynastes pulverulentus holding a prey lizard {Anolis
carolinensis ). Note buccal tissue surrounding the enlarged anterior maxillary and dentary teeth of the
snake.
Copyright
Asiatic Herpetological Research reserves the copyrights to all material published therein,
except that excluded by permission of the editors. Any material under a prior copyright
submitted to Asiatic Herpetological Research must be accompanied by the written consent of
the copyright holder.
Submission of Manuscripts
Authors should submit letter quality, double spaced, single-sided manuscripts both in
English and in the original language on 21.5 x 28 cm (8.5 x 1 1 inch) white bond paper. If
possible, include a computer diskette containing the manuscript. Macintosh diskettes with
Word Perfect, Microsoft Word, Macwrite, Write Now, or text files, or 3.5" MS/PC DOS
diskettes with Word Perfect, Microsoft Word, RTF, or ASCII files are preferable.
Computerized manuscripts should include italic, bold, and centered text only. Additional
formatting is not necessary or desirable. Please indicate author, computer, file format, and
file name in writing on the disk.
June 1995 Asiatic Herpetological Research Vol. 6, p. 185
Manuscripts will be reviewed. The editors will attempt to choose reviewers whose
research knowledge most closely matches the content of the manuscript.
Asiatic Herpetological Research requests $25 US per printed page from authors with
funds available. Please indicate if funds are available.
Send manuscripts by postal mail to Editors, Asiatic Herpetological Research, Museum
of Vertebrate Zoology, 3101 Valley Life Sciences Building, University of California,
Berkeley CA 94720-3160 USA.
Send manuscripts by Internet email to asiaherp@uclink2.berkeley.edu as a MIME
attachment with binhex or uuencode encoding. If you use email to submit, an editor will
acknowledge receipt of your manuscript. Please note that it is possible for your email
message to disappear on the Internet without being delivered. If your message is returned, or
not acknowledged, you may want to try again or to send your manuscript by postal mail.
TARKHNISHVILI, DAVID N. On the Inheritance of the Mid-dorsal Stripe in the Iranian
Wood Frog (Rana macrocnemis) 1 1 9
WALLACH, VAN. A New Genus for the Ramphotyphlops subocularis Species Group
(Serpentes: Typhlopidae), with Description of a New Species 131
WANG, PEI-CHAO, WEI MA, BO LU AND WEN-HUI YOU. Studies on the Physiological
Ecology of Incubation in Chinemys reevesii Eggs 150
ZHANG, ZHENGDONG. Research on the Sex Sensitive Period During the Incubation of
Chinese Alligator Eggs 156
ZHENG, XIAO-MAO AND GUAN-FU WU. Karyotypes of Four Microhylid Frogs from
Xishuangbanna, Southern Yunnan, China 160
ZHENG, XIAO-MAO AND GUAN-FU WU. Cytotaxonomic Studies on Chinese Pelobatids
VI. The Karyotypes, C-bands and Ag-NORs of Megophrys minor and Oreolalax
major 166
ZUG, GEORGE R. AND JOSEPH C. MITCHELL. Amphibians and Reptiles of the Royal
Chitwan National Park, Nepal 171
GUIDELINES FOR MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION 180
1 8 6
ISSN 1051-3825
CONTENTS
NILSON, GORAN, BORIS S. TUNIYEV, NIKOLAI ORLOV, MATS HOGGREN, AND CLAES
ANDREN. Systematics of the Vipers of the Caucasus: Polymorphism or Sibling
Species? 1
AUFFENBERG, WALTER, AND HAFTZUR REHMAN. Calotes versicolor nigrigularis
Auffenberg and Rehman 1993 a Junior Primary Homonym 27
BATRA, RESHMA, AND S ANT PRAKASH. Simplified Field Technique for Obtaining Blood
from Freshwater Turtles 28
BAUER, AARON M., AND ANTHONY P. RUSSELL. The Systematic Relationships of
Dravidogecko anamallensis (Giinther 1 875) 30
DANIELS, R. J. RANJIT, AND M. S. RAVICHANDRAN. The Ceylonese Tree Frog
Polypedates cruciger Blyth, a New Record for India 36
DAS. INDRANEIL. Size-gradation in Syntopic Frogs in South India 38
GAULKE, MAREN. Observations on Arboreality in a Philippine Blind Snake 45
GAULKE, MAREN. On the Distribution of Emydid Turtles and the Anuran Genus
Microhyla in the Philippines 49
GRIFFIN, PAUL C, AND VASILI A. SOLKIN. Ecology and Conservation of
Onychodactylus fischeri (Caudata, Hynobiidae) in the Russian Far East 53
LIN, JIN, KE-MIN XU, AND DONG-GEN LIU. Studies on the Distribution of Trace
Elements in Agkistrodon blomhoffii brevicaudus Stejneger 62
LU, SHUN-QlNG, AND DA-TONG YANG. A Study on Morphological Similarity between the
Genera Nanorana and Altirana (Amphibia, Anura, Ranidae) 69
LU, SHUN-QlNG, AND DA-TONG YANG. A Study of Relationships among Ranid Frogs of
the Genera Nanorana and Altirana in the Transhimalaya Mountains of China 73
MAO, JIAN-PING, WAN-YU WANG, YU-LlANG XlONG, AND LIANG LU. Fibrinogenase
from the Venom of Trimeresurus mucrosquamatus 78
OHLER, ANNEMARIE. Digital Pad Morphology in Torrent-living Ranid Frogs 85
PANOV, EUGENY N., AND LARISA Y. ZYKOVA. Social Organization and Demography in
the Rock Agama, Stellio caucasius 97
QlNG, Jl. A Study on the Comparative Cytology of Some Endocrine Glands in Rana
plancyi between Hibernation and Post-hibernation Ill
SERBINOVA, I.A. AND V.A. SOLKIN. Reproductive Behavior in the Long-tailed
Salamander (Onychodactylus fischeri Boulenger) 113
(Continued on inside of back cover)
Harvard MCZ Library
3 2044 066
300 419